AA H431C TC_RSX 11M PLUS_2.1_System_Generation_and_Installation_Guide_Apr83 TC RSX PLUS 2.1 System Generation And Installation Guide Apr83
AA-H431C-TC_RSX-11M-PLUS_2.1_System_Generation_and_Installation_Guide_Apr83 AA-H431C-TC_RSX-11M-PLUS_2.1_System_Generation_and_Installation_Guide_Apr83
User Manual: AA-H431C-TC_RSX-11M-PLUS_2.1_System_Generation_and_Installation_Guide_Apr83
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 264
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
RSX-11 M-PLUS
System Generation
and Installation Guide
Order No. AA-H431 C-TC
RSX-11 M-PLUS
System Generation
and Installation Guide
Order No. AA-H431C-TC
RSX-11 M-PLUS Version 2.1
digital equipment corporation · maynard, massachusetts
First Printing, October 1979
Revised, April 1983
The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment
Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such
license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on
equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
affiliated companies.
Copyright @ 1979, 1983
by Digital Equipment Corporation
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
The postpaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this document
requests the user's critical evaluation to assist in preparing future
documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:
DEC
DEC/CMS
DEC/MMS
DECnet
DECsystem-IO
DECSYSTEM-20
DEC US
DECwriter
DIBOL
EduSystem
IAS
MASSBUS
PDP
PDT
RSTS
RSX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
~nmnomo
ZK2247
HOW TO ORDER ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
In Continental USA and Puerto Rrco call 800-258-1710
In New Hampshire, Alaska, and Hawaii call 603-884-6660
In Canada call 613-234-7726 (Ottawa-Hull)
800-267-6146 (all other Canadran)
DIRECT MAIL ORDERS (USA & PUERTO RICO)*
Drgrtal Equrpment Corporation
P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua, New Hampshire 03061
DIRECT MAIL ORDERS (CANADA)
Drgrtal Equipment of Canada Ltd
940 Belfast Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 4C2
Attn- A&SG Business Manager
DIRECT MAIL ORDERS (INTERNATIONAL)
Digrtal Equipment Corporatron
A&SG Business Manager
c/o D1g1tal's local subs1drary or
approved d1strrbutor
*Any prepard order from Puerto Rico must be placed
wrth the local Digital subsidrary (809-754-7575)
Internal orders should be placed through the Software Distribution Center (SOC), Digital Equipment
Corporation, Northboro, Massachusetts 01532
2/84·15
CONTENTS
Page
PREFACE
vii
SUMMARY OF TECHNICAL CHANGES
CHAPTER 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1. 3.1
1.3.2
1.3. 3
1. 3. 4
1. 3. 5
1.3.6
1. 3. 7
1.4
1.5
1. 5.1
1. 5. 2
1.5.3
1.6
1.6 .1
1.6 .2
1. 6. 3
1.6 .4
1.6.5
1.6 .6
1.6. 7
1.6 .8
1.6. 9
1. 7
CHAPTER 2
xi
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
WHICH CHAPTERS OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD YOU READ? • •
SYSTEM GENERATION AND SYSGEN • •
•
FLOW OF A SYSTEM GENERATION
•
Preparation • • • • • •
•
Copying the Distribution Kit •
• •
Applying Update • • • • • •
• •
Invoking the SYSGEN Procedure
•
Bootstrapping the Generated System
••
Saving the Generated System • • • •
• •••
Copying the Generated System •
• • • • • •
WHAT IS SYSGEN?
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • •
SYSGEN EASE-OF-USE FEATURES
• • • • • • •
Full-functionality Executive Option
•
Autoconf igure
• • • •
• • • •
• •
Saved Answer Files • • • • • •
• •••••
SECTIONS OF THE SYSGEN PROCEDURE • •
•
Choosing SYSGEN Options
•••••••••
Choosing Executive Options • •
•
Choosing Peripheral Configuration • • • • • • •
Assembling the Executive and Drivers •
• •
Building the Executive and Drivers •
• •••
Building the Privileged Tasks
• • • •
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks •
• ••••
Creating the System Image File • • •
•
Adding a Device
• • • • • • •
•
TERMS RELATING TO SYSTEM GENERATION
• • • • •
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-7
;-7
GETTING STARTED
2.1
WHAT YOU NEED BEFORE YOU BEGIN • •
• • •
Supported Target System Disks
•
2.1.2
Blank Media Requirements • • •
•
2 .1. 3
Device Mnemonic Information
•••••
2.2
THE DISTRIBUTION KIT • • • •
• • • •
• •
2.2.1
Magnetic Tape - 1600 bpi • • •
• • • • • •
2.2.2
Magnetic Tape - 800 bpi
• • • • •
2.2.3
RK07 Disk • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HOST SYSTEMS FOR GENERATING RSX-llM-PLUS
•
2.3
2.3.1
Generating a New RSX-llM-PLUS System Stand Alone
Generating a New RSX-llM-PLUS System On Line • •
2.3.2
2.4
COPYING THE DISTRIBUTION KIT • • • • • • • • •
2. 4 .1·
Copying Kits Stand Alone • • • • • • • • • • • •
2.4.1.1
The BRUSYS System
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Copying the Magnetic Tape Kit Stand Alone • •
2.4.1.2
2 .1.1
iii
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
CONTENTS
Page
2.4.1.3
2.4.2
2.4.2.1
2.4.2.2
CHAPTER 3
Copying the RK07 Disk Kit Stand Alone
Copying Kits On Line • • • • • • • • • •
Copying the Magnetic Tape Kit On Line
Copying the RK07 Disk Kit On Line
2-11
2-14
2-14
2-17
RUNNING SYSGEN
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW BEFORE YOU START
3.1
3-1
3-1
Format of SYSGEN Questions • • • •
3 .1.1
How to Get Help • • • • • • • • •
3-2
3 .1. 2
What to do if you Make a Mistake •
3-3
3 .1.3
Saved Answer Files • • •
3 .1. 4
3-5
PREPGEN • • • • • • •
• • • •
• 3-6
3.1.5
Autoconfigure • • • •
• •••
3-6
3 .1.6
What Autoconfigure Does • • • • • • • • • • • 3-6
3.1.6.1
Overriding Autoconfigure Results •
• 3-7
3.1.6.2
Hardware Supported by Autoconf igure
3-9
3.1.6.3
3-11
The Baseline System • • • • • • • •
3.1.6.4
Applying Update • • • •
• • • • • • • • 3-12
3 .1. 7
Generating a V2.l System on an RSX-llM-PLUS
3.1.8
V2.0 System
3-12
Invoking SYSGEN • • • •
3-13
3 .1.9
SYSGEN QUESTIONS • • • • • •
3-13
3.2
3.2.1
Choosing SYSGEN Options •
3-15
Choosing Executive Options • •
3.2.2
3-20
3.2.3
Choosing Peripheral Configuration •
3-31
Assembling the Executive and Drivers •
3-67
3.2.4
Building the Executive and Drivers •
3-68
3.2.5
Building the Privileged Tasks • • • • • • • • 3-70
3.2.6
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks •
3-72
3.2.7
Creating the System Image File • •
3-75
3.2.8
CHAPTER 4
AFTER SYSGEN
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
BOOTSTRAPPING AND SAVING THE VIRGIN SYSTEM • • • • 4-1
BACKING UP THE SAVED SYSTEM • • • • • • • • • • • 4-3
RECOVERING DISK SPACE AFTER A SYSTEM GENERATION • 4-3
TESTING THE SYSTEM • • • • • •
• • • • •
4-3
OTHER SYSTEM SETUP INFORMATION
• • • • • • • 4-3
The Start-Up Command File • • • • • • • • •
4-4
Installing the RMS-11 Tasks, Utilities, and
Libraries • • • • • • • • •
• • • •
4-4
Login and Batch Job Message Files
4-5
4.5.3
The Account File • • • • • • • • • •
4-5
4.5.4
Help Files • • • • • • • • • • • •
• 4-5
4.5.5
Installing and Using System Tasks • • • •
• 4-6
4.5.6
4.6
INSTALLING LAYERED PRODUCTS • • • • • • • • •
4-6
FINDING OUT MORE ABOUT THE SYSTEM
• • • 4-6
4.7
4.8
CHANGING THE SYSTEM WITHOUT REPEATING SYSGEN • • • 4-8
Altering System Parameters Using VMR •
• • • 4-8
4.8.1
4.8.2
Adding Devices • • • • • • • • • • • •
4-9
Restrictions on Adding Devices after SYSGEN
4-10
4.8.2.1
4.8.3
Rebuilding Nonprivileged Tasks • • • • • • • • 4-10
4.9
PUTTING MORE THAN ONE SYSTEM ON THE SAME VOLUME
4-10
4.10
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ERRORS • • • • • • • •
4-13
System Initialization Warning Messages • •
4-13
4.10.l
4.10.2
System Initialization FATAL Messages •
4-14
CHAPTER 5
5.1
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
SHORT DESCRIPTIONS OF THE KIT AND THE SYSTEM • • • 5-1
iv
CONTENTS
Page
Description of the Pregenerated Distribution
Kits.....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5 .1. 2
Description of the Pregenerated RSX-llM-PLUS
System • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • 5-2
5.2
INSTALLING THE PREGENERATED SYSTEM • • • • • •
5-2
5.2.1
Copying the DIGITAL-Supplied Kit Disk
• • 5-2
Copying the RL02 Kit Disk to a Blank RL02 Disk • 5-3
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
Deleting the Unused System from the System
Disk • . • . • . . • • . • • . . . • • • • . • 5-5
Copying the RL02 Kit Disk to an RD51 or Other
5.2.3
Disk • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • •
• 5-9
Copying the Kit Disk • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-9
5.2.3.1
Creating the New System Image File Using VMR 5-11
5.2.3.2
Bootstrap and Save the New System Image • • 5-13
5.2.3.3
Deleting the Unused System from the System
5.2.3.4
5-14
Disk • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
AN EXAMPLE OF COPYING THE SYSTEM • • • • • • • • 5-16
5.3
5.4
SYSTEM SETUP INFORMATION • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-20
Changing the Start-Up Procedure to Suit Your
5.4.1
System • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-20
5.4.1.1
How the Start-Up Procedure Works • • • •
5-21
5.4.1.2
Description of the Configuration File
Statements • • • • • • • • • • •
5-21
5.4.1.2.1
Start-Up Procedure Error Messages • • • • 5-27
5.4.2
The Account File • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-28
5.4.3
Login and Batch Job Message Files • • • •
5-28
5.4.4
Help Files
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-28
5.4.5
Installing the RMS-11 Tasks, Utilities, and
Libraries • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-29
5.4.6
Installing and Using System Tasks
5-29
5. 4. 7
Installing Layered Products
• • • • • 5-30
5.4.8
Installing Other Device Drivers • • • •
5-30
5.5
USING THE SYSTEM • • • • • • • • • • •
5-30
5.5.1
Finding Out More About the System • • • • • • 5-30
5.5.2
Detailed Description of Pregenerated Executive
Features • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-31
Features of the Pregenerated Systems
5.5.2.1
5-31
5.5.2.2
Hardware Supported • • • • • • • •
5-32
Tasks Supplied • • • • • •
5.5.2.3
5-33
5.5.2.4
Restrictions • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-33
CHANGING YOUR SYSTEM • • • • • • •
5.6
5-35
5.6.1
Recovering Additional Disk Space
5-35
Changing the Crash Dump Device • • • • • •
5.6.2
5-35
5.6.3
Loading Drivers • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-36
K-Series Laboratory Peripherals and LPAll-K
5.6.4
Controller • • • • • • • • • • •
5-37
5.6.5
DECnet Pool Use • • • • • • •
5-37
5.6.6
DECnet Interface Modification
5-37
5 .1.1
APPENDIX A
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
APPENDIX B
RSX-llM-PLUS DEVICES
APPENDIX C
GENERAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM TUNING
C.l
c .1.1
c .1. 2
C.1.3
c .1. 4
c .1. 5
c .1.6
GENERAL SYSTEM FEATURES
Memory Partitions
Checkpointing
•••• • •
Memory Compaction
Disk Swapping • • • •
Round-Robin Scheduler . .
Dynamic Memory (Pool)
• •
v
• • C-1
• • • • • • C-1
• • • • •
•
• • • •
. . . . .
• • • • •
•
•
• • •
•
• • • • •
• . . . • •
• •
• •
C-1
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-4
CONTENTS
Page
C. l . 7
C.2
c.2.1
c.2.2
C.3
C.4
APPENDIX D
D.1
D.2
APPENDIX E
E.1
E.2
E.3
E.3.1
E.3.2
•
Parity Support • • • • • • • • •
INCREASING FILE SYSTEM THROUGHPUT • • • •
• •
• • • • •
Multiple File Systems • • • • •
File System Options • • • • • • • •
• •
DYNAMIC CHECKPOINT SPACE ALLOCATION AND TASK
EXTENSION
• • • • • •
OVERLAPPED I/O COMPLETION
••
C-4
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-6
C-7
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
A SAMPLE STAND-ALONE SYSTEM GENERATION
• • D-2
A SAMPLE ON-LINE SYSTEM GENERATION
• • • • • D-24
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
AUTOCONFIGURE DEVICE SUPPORT • • • • •
FLOATING ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT ALGORITHM
FLOATING ADDRESS WORKSHEET
• • •
Worksheet Format • • • • • • • •
Worksheet Instructions • •
• •
•
•
•
•
• • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
•••••
• • • • •
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-3
E-4
INDEX
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 3-1
E-1
Sample Autoconf igure Output • • • •
Completed Floating Address Worksheet •
3-8
• • E-7
FIGURES
FIGURE
2-1
4-1
E-1
Examples of Paper Labels for Magnetic Tapes and
Disk Packs • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-4
Subjective and Functional Organization of the
Documentation • • • • • • • • • •
• • • 4-7
Blank Floating Address Worksheet • • • • • • • • • E-5
TABLES
TABLE
2-1
2-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
5-1
B-1
B-2
E-1
Disk Initialization Qualifier Values •
2-10
Initialization Qualifier Values
2-16
Autoconfigure Remarks and Meanings •
• • • • 3-9
Hardware Supported by Autoconfigure • • • •
3-10
RSX-llM-PLUS Baseline Device Configuration •
3-12
Terminal Configuration • • • • • • •
3-12
Disk Initialization Qualifier Values •
5-11
RSX-llM-PLUS Devices • • • •
• • • • • • • • B-1
RSX-llM-PLUS Pseudo Devices
• • • B-3
Autoconf igure Device Support •
• • E-2
vi
PREFACE
MANUAL OBJECTIVES AND INTENDED AUDIENCE
The RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide is intended
to guide a system manager through the steps required to generate an
RSX-llM-PLUS operating system. It presents the information you need
to generate a system for a specific hardware configuration and set of
application requirements.
If you need to generate an RSX-llM-PLUS operating system, you should
read this manual and use it as a guide for each step of the system
generation process.
STRUCTURE OF THIS DOCUMENT
Chapter 1, Introduction to System Generation, contains an overview of
the system generation process.
It outlines the steps involved in
producing an RSX-llM-PLUS system.
Chapter 2, Getting Started, describes the contents, copying,
of the distribution kit.
and
use
Chapter 3, Running SYSGEN, describes the step-by-step process followed
in generating a system. It provides specific information on Executive
and processor features, as well as specific device information.
Chapter 4, After SYSGEN, describes how to save and back up your
generated system, run the Virtual MCR (VMR) task, and recover disk
space after the system generation is complete.
Also discussed are
DIGITAL-supplied template files that are useful in managing your new
system, how to change the system without repeating SYSGEN, and how to
put more than one system on the same volume. This chapter includes a
list of system initialization error messages.
Chapter 5, Pregenerated RSX-llM-PLUS Kits, describes the features and
use of the pregenerated systems that are supplied on RL02 or RC25
disks for use with smaller PDP-11 configurations.
Appendixes A through E supply worksheets used for gathering system
information,
list devices included under RSX-llM-PLUS, describe
various RSX-llM-PLUS system features, describe PDP-11 vector address
conventions, and provide examples of typical system generations.
vii
PREFACE
ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS
Other manuals closely allied to the purposes of this document are
described briefly in the RSX-llM-PLUS Information Directory and Master
Index. The Information Directory defines the intended readership of
each manual in the RSX-llM-PLUS set and provides a brief synopsis of
each manual's contents.
You must read the RSX-llM-PLUS/RMS-11 Release Notes before you attempt
to perform a system generation. Information that was not included in
this and other manuals but which is vital to the performance of a
successful system generation is contained in the Release Notes, as
well as a complete summary of the new features and characteristics of
this release of RSX-llM-PLUS.
The RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide contains information on
many utility programs that are used by the system manager to assign
accounts, verify proper system operation, monitor active tasks and
resources, set up and run the Queue Manager and batch processor, and
perform other related tasks.
The RSX-llM-PLUS Guide to Writing an I/O Driver provides information
on using SYSGEN to incorporate drivers and data bases into your
system.
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS DOCUMENT
Throughout this book, symbols and other notation conventions are used
to represent keyboard characters, to convey textual information, and
to otherwise aid the presentation of material.
The symbols and
conventions used are explained below.
Convention
Meaning
A 2- to 6-character symbol indicating that
you must press a key on the terminal; for
example, ~
indicates the RETURN key and
@
indicates the LINE FEED key.
The symbol mRL/x)
indicates that you must
press
the
key
labeled CTRL while you
simultaneously press
another
key;
for
example, ~TRL/z)
indicates the CTRL and z
keys. In examples, this control key sequence
is shown as "'x; for example, "'o indicates
the result of ~TRL/~
because that is how
the
system
echoes
most
control
key
combinations.
The circumflex character, appearing
with
another
character, represents the system
response to receiving a control character.
For example, when you type mRuzJ
while
running some system tasks, the system echoes
"'z.
(On some terminals, the up-arrow ("")
character
is
used
in
place
of
the
circumflex.)
viii
PREFACE
UPPERCASE and lowercase
In command format descriptions, uppercase
characters are used to indicate portions of
command strings that you should enter exactly
as they appear.
Lowercase characters are
used as placeholders and descriptors, and
indicate the general type of information you
are to supply. An example is the following
command format description:
/CSR=csr address
The portion in uppercase
indicates
the
characters you type exactly as they appear.
The portion in lowercase indicates that you
should enter the CSR address at that point in
the command line. If the CSR address was
176300, you would type the following command
line:
/CSR=l76300
"print" and "type"
As these words are used in the
system prints and the user types.
MCR>
This is the explicit prompt of the Monitor
Console Routine {MCR}, one of the command
interfaces used on RSX-llM-PLUS systems.
>
A right-angle bracket is the system command
interface
'prompting
character.
Whenever
control is returned to the user task terminal
and the system is ready to accept input, the
prompt appears.
red ink
Color-highlighted information in
examples
indicates
information
that
you
type.
Information
in
examples
not
in
the
contrasting color represents computer output.
{}
Braces enclose lists of command or message
elements from which one item is selected or
displayed.
ix
text,
the
SUMMARY OF TECHNICAL CHANGES
This rev1s1on of the RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation
Guide reflects the following software technical changes and additions:
•
Support has been added for the following devices:
DHVll
LASO
LNOl
LP07
LP27
RA60
RA81
RC25
RX50
RD51
TU80
TSV05
•
The MICRO/PDP-11 has been added as a supported processor.
•
Support has been added
Performance Monitor.
•
RMS-11 V2.0 is included on the RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit.
There is no longer a separate RMS-11 distribution disk or
tape, nor is there separate installation documentation.
•
Pregenerated RSX-llM-PLUS systems are now available in both
RL02 and RC25 disk kits. The following is a list of some of
the changes that have been made to the RL02 pregenerated kit
since the last release of RSX-llM-PLUS:
for
SPM-llM-PLUS,
the
Software
Each pregenerated disk kit contains two
pregenerated
Executives, one that includes I- and D-space support and
one that does not.
Included on each disk is an indirect
command file you can use to increase available space on
your system disk by deleting the Executive that you do not
need.
The pregenerated kits
startup command file.
feature
a
special,
easily-edited
Support for the RAGO, RASO, RA81, RC25, RD51, RXSO,
and TSV05 has been added to the pregenerated kits.
Certain tasks have been removed from the
system kits to increase available pool space.
TUBO,
pregenerated
See Chapter 5, Pregenerated RSX-llM-PLUS Kits, for information
on these and other changes.
xi
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
The objective of the system generation procedure is to create an
RSX-llM-PLUS system tailored to your hardware configuration and
performance requirements. This chapter provides an outline of the
stages involved in performing a system generation.
1.1
WHICH CHAPTERS OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD YOU READ?
An RSX-llM-PLUS operating system is tailored for a particular type of
PDP-11 processor and configuration of peripherals through a process
called system generation. This process is controlled and performed by
a program called SYSGEN.
The RSX-llM-PLUS software you have received is supplied in one of
forms.
two
The first is the distribution kit, which contains all the software
components needed to perform a system generation using the SYSGEN
procedure. This distribution kit is supplied on magnetic tape or on
disk packs.
If you have this kit, you should read this and every
other chapter in this book except Chapter 5.
The second is the pregenerated system kit. This is a disk pack that
contains a ready-to-run RSX-llM-PLUS operating system. You do not
need to perform a system generation before using this system.
The
SYSGEN procedure and the software components necessary to generate a
new RSX-llM-PLUS system are not supplied with this kit. There are a
small number of minor changes you can make to adapt the pregenerated
system kit to your model of processor and number of peripherals.
If
you have this kit, you should turn dir~ctly to Chapter 5. You do not
need to concern yourself with the material in this and subsequent
chapters.
Chapter 5 explains how to start using your pregenerated
system.
1.2
SYSTEM GENERATION AND SYSGEN
The terms "system generation" and "SYSGEN" are
throughout this manual, but not interchangeably.
used
extensively
System generation is used to refer to the entire process of obtaining
a running RSX-llM-PLUS operating system, beginning with use of the
software components supplied to you by· DIGITAL and ending with a
ready-to-use system.
1-1
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
SYSGEN is a procedure that uses the Indirect Command Processor to
arrange and modify various software components and assemble them into
an RSX-llM-PLUS operating system that is tailored to a particular
hardware configuration.
The SYSGEN procedure is, therefore, a part of
process.
the
system
generation
Whenever this manual uses the term "system generation," the entire
process of producing an RSX-llM-PLUS system is meant.
"SYSGEN" is
used to refer to the specific Indirect procedure used in the course of
system generation.
1.3
,
FLOW OF A SYSTEM GENERATION
The process of generating an RSX-llM-PLUS operating system begins when
you make a copy of the software components supplied to you on magnetic
media and ends when you hardware bootstrap a system disk on a specific
hardware installation.
A typical system generation contains the
following steps:
1.
Preparation
2.
Copying the distribution kit
3.
Applying Update
4.
Invoking the SYSGEN procedure
5.
Bootstrapping the generated system
6.
Saving the generated system
7.
Copying the generated system
After you have completed these steps, you may need to install layered
software
products
(higher-level languages such as FORTRAN, or
communications products such as DECnet) •
1.3.1
Preparation
This manual assumes that you have a running
PDP-11
hardware
configuration
that includes a
processor with 22-bit addressing
capability and at least one of the disk drives listed in Section
2.1.1.
Depending on the type of distribution kit you have, your
system must have certain other peripheral devices.
From this point on, it is assumed that you have a hardware system
suited for
running an RSX-llM-PLUS system. For complete information
on the hardware configuration required for running RSX-llM-PLUS,
see
the RSX-llM-PLUS Software Product Description.
Before you begin generating an RSX-llM-PLUS operating system, you need
to become familiar with the system generation process and with this
manual. You also need various blank media and information about your
hardware device configuration.
Section 2.1 describes in more detail
what you need before you start.
1-2
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
1.3.2
Copying the Distribution Kit
Some RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kits are supplied on magnetic tape and
must be transferred to disk before you can begin the SYSGEN procedure.
The magnetic tapes can be used to make additional disk copies of the
distribution kit when they are needed for applying the latest Update
or
generating
RSX-llM-PLUS
systems
for
changed
hardware
configurations.
Other RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kits are supplied on disk. You should
make a copy of the DIGITAL-supplied distribution kit disk and use the
copy to perform a system generation. Save the DIGITAL-supplied disk
as a master from which you can make additional copies when they are
needed.
Section 2.1.2 lists the types and quantities of blank media
for copying the various distribution kits.
1.3.3
necessary
Applying Update
Update is an Indirect command file you use to apply a cumulative set
of corrections to RSX-llM-PLUS and layered products.
Update is
supplied with every RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit and is issued on a
periodic basis to customers who have purchased Update service.
Instructions for applying Update are provided with the Update kit
m~ium.
1.3.4
Invoking the SYSGEN Procedure
Invoking the SYSGEN Indirect command file begins an interactive
terminal session in which SYSGEN gathers the information necessary to
assemble and build the Executive and system data base.
The SYSGEN
procedure prints questions on your terminal and/or reads saved answer
file input. SYSGEN then uses the information obtained to assemble,
build, and initialize a binary system image.
This chapter contains short descriptions of the sections of the SYSGEN
procedure, while Chapter 3 presents the details of each SYSGEN
section.
1.3.5
Bootstrapping the Generated System
You need to software bootstrap your generated system to see if it runs
successfully and to prepare for saving the system back to disk in
hardware bootstrappable format.
Chapter 4 contains information on
what to do at this point in the system generation process.
1.3.6
Saving the Generated System
When you save the generated system with the SAV /WB command line, the
contents of main memory are written into the system image file. After
a system has been saved, a hardware or software bootstrap can be used
to reload and restart it.
1-3
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
1.3.7
Copying the Generated System
To guard against accidental corruption and loss of your generated
system, you should make a backup copy of the system.
In some cases,
it might be necessary to transfer the generated system to a different
type of disk.
Chapter 4 contains instructions for making copies of
system images.
1.4
WHAT IS SYSGEN?
SYSGEN is the Indirect command procedure used to tailor and build an
RSX-llM-PLUS operating system for a particular PDP-11 installation.
The SYSGEN procedure asks questions about both the software features
you wish to include in your system and about your system's hardware
configuration.
SYSGEN uses that information
to
assemble
and
task-build an RSX-llM-PLUS operating system specifically tailored to
your needs.
You should read the Release Notes for this release of RSX-llM-PLUS
before attempting to run the SYSGEN procedure. You should also be
familiar with the material in this manual before attempting to
generate your own system. This manual contains information intended
to help you understand the consequences of choosing or omitting the
various
system options.
Attempts to run SYSGEN without first
consulting the documentation may yield undesired results.
1.5
SYSGEN EASE-OF-USE FEATURES
SYSGEN contains a number of features designed to allow you to generate
a
working
system
as
easily
and rapidly as possible.
The
Full-functionality Executive option and the Autoconfigure task free
you from the necessity of deciding among many options. The saved
answer file feature lets you more easily modify your system later, if
you decide to change your original configuration.
1.5.1
Full-functionality Executive Option
The Full-functionality Executive contains all RSX-llM-PLUS optional
features.
For more information on these features and how to select
the Full-functionality Executive, see Chapter 3.
1.5.2
Autoconfigure
The Autoconfigure task automatically determines the correct hardware
configuration of the host system, including the processor type, the
CSR and vector addresses of the peripheral devices, and the presence
of any optional hardware. This information can be directly used by
SYSGEN, thereby reducing greatly the number of questions asked in the
Choosing Peripheral Configuration section. For more information on
using Autoconfigure, see Chapter 3.
1-4
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
1.5.3
Saved Answer Files
Your responses to questions asked by SYSGEN are saved in special files
as you generate your system. These saved answer files may be used
later to generate another system without your having to answer all the
SYSGEN questions again.
For more information on using saved answer
files, see Chapter 3.
1.6
SECTIONS OF THE SYSGEN PROCEDURE
The SYSGEN procedure is divided into functional sections, each with a
name that describes the main task performed within that section.
These sections are normally performed in sequence, with the SYSGEN
procedure automatically beginning the next section when it finishes
the current section.
During a complete SYSGEN, the following sections are performed:
1.
Choosing SYSGEN Options
2.
Choosing Executive Options
3.
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
4.
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
5.
Building the Executive and Drivers
6.
Building the Privileged Tasks
7.
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
8.
Creating the System Image File
An additional section, Adding a Device, is not normally performed as
part of the SYSGEN process. For more information on this section, see
Chapter 3 of this manual and Chapter 5 of the RSX-llM-PLUS Guide to
Writing an I/Q Driver.
~~In certain circumstances you may need to perform only one section of
the SYSGEN procedure or to enter the SYSGEN procedure at a point other
than the beginning. You are given these choices in the first section
of the SYSGEN procedure, Choosing SYSGEN Options. Because certain
sections rely on information obtained in other sections, you may not
always be able to perform a given section without having to go back
and redo previous sections.
For more information
individual sections,
Chapter 3.
1.6.1
on the sections of SYSGEN and on running
see the descriptions in this chapter and in
Choosing SYSGEN Options
In this section, you can choose SYSGEN options such as Autoconfigure
and saved answer files. Also included is a "menu" that allows you to
resume a partially completed SYSGEN at the appropriate section or to
perform individual sections of SYSGEN.
1-5
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
1.6.2
Choosing Executive Options
In this section, you have
Executive configurations.
the
opportunity
to
select
one
of
two
Your first choice, the Full-functionality Executive, contains all of
the
RSX-llM-PLUS
service
features.
Selecting this Executive
guarantees that there are no missing features for external tasks (for
example,
layered
products).
In addition, if you select this
Executive, you are asked fewer questions, and so the SYSGEN process is
faster.
Unless you have reason not to want all of the RSX-llM-PLUS
features available to you, you should select this Executive.
Choosing the second option, the User-tailored Executive, allows you to
tailor an Executive to your specific needs. The SYSGEN command files
ask you a series of questions about the features that you want your
Executive to contain. You would want to select this option in only a
few situations. For example, if you are generating a system intended
for use by a single user, you could exclude Resource Accounting from
your Executive.
During the Choosing Executive Options section, SYSGEN also asks you
about the amount of memory on the system that you are generating and
about the processor hardware options on the system.
1.6.3
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
In this section, SYSGEN asks you a series of questions about your
peripheral devices.
These questions constitute the most complex
portion of the SYSGEN.
Running Autoconfigure greatly reduces the
number of questions you have to answer in this section.
1.6.4
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
In this section~ SYSGEN assembles the Executive, the drivers, and the
driver data bases. SYSGEN allows you to decide if you want assembly
listings and, if so, to direct them to a file or to the line printer.
1.6.5
Building the Executive and Drivers
In this section, SYSGEN task-builds the Executive, the drivers, and
the driver data bases. SYSGEN also allows you to save the files from
a previous system generation, which may be residing in UFO [1,54]. If
you choose to save the old system generation files, SYSGEN transfers
them to a UFO that you specify.
1.6.6
Building the Privileged Tasks
In this section, SYSGEN task-builds the privileged tasks, such as MCR,
LOA, MOU, and UFD.
Whenever you rebuild the Executive, it is
necessary to rebuild the privileged tasks.
1-6
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
1.6.7
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
In this section, SYSGEN task-builds designated nonprivileged system
tasks.
A nonprivileged task need only be rebuilt when it has been
updated, either manually or by the Update procedure. The questions in
this section allow you to choose from a list those nonprivileged tasks
that need to be rebuilt.
1.6.8
Creating the System Image File
In this section, the system image file is created by a VMR indirect
command file named SYSVMR.CMD. SYSVMR automatically establishes the
partition boundaries for the system image, loads all of the drivers,
and
installs the privileged tasks built during the Building the
Privileged Tasks section.
If you want to set up the partitions in your system differently from
the way in which SYSVMR sets them up, or if you wish to modify SYSVMR
for any other reason, SYSGEN permits you to do so during this section.
1.6.9
Adding a Device
In this section, SYSGEN allows you to add or change a loadable driver
with a loadable data base in an already generated system. SYSGEN asks
you questions about the device's hardware configuration, generates a
loadable data base, and assembles and task builds the driver and its
data base. You can then load the driver into your system and bring
its associated devices on line.
This section is not performed as part of a system generation.
It is
performed if you want to add a new device or change the configuration
of a device in an existing system. This section can also be used to
add a user-supplied driver.
See Section 4.8.2 for more information on the Adding a Device section.
For a complete discussion of adding loadable device drivers,
Chapter 5 of the RSX-llM-PLUS Guide to Writing an I/O Driver.
1.7
see
TERMS RELATING TO SYSTEM GENERATION
This section defines some of the terms used in this manual.
The
purpose of defining these terms here is to familiarize you with them
before you begin generating your RSX-llM-PLUS system.
To find more
information on a given term,
consult the RSX-llM-PLUS Information
Directory and Master Index.
Executive
The Executive is the software core, or
kernel,
of
the
RSX-llM-PLUS operating system.
It is responsible for resource
allocation, multiuser protection, and intertask communications.
In general, the Executive monitors, controls, and services
system-level
activity.
It
provides
a
relatively
machine-independent multiprogramming environment in which you can
develop and run user applications.
1-7
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
pool
Pool {also known as the dynamic storage region, or DSR)
is an
area in memory that is used as a work space for storing system
data structures such as system lists, control blocks, and I/O
packets.
There are two kinds of pool in RSX-llM-PLUS:
primary pool and
secondary pool.
They differ in where they are located and how
they are used.
Primary pool is an area of memory within the Executive's address
space.
It is used for short-lived or frequently accessed data
structures. Primary pool is a critical resource because it is
used for many Executive and I/O operations and the amount
available is limited. The size of primary pool is fixed when the
system is generated. SYSGEN always makes primary pool as large
as possible.
Secondary pool is a partition in memory outside
of
the
Executive's address space. It is used for more permanent or less
frequently accessed data structures. Secondary pool can be as
large as you want; it is limited only by the amount of available
memory. The size of secondary pool is set when the system image
file is created by VMR. SYSGEN makes secondary pool a reasonable
size for your hardware and software configuration.
driver
A driver is a set of subroutines called by the Executive I/O
system in response to I/O requests from user programs. The
driver translates I/O requests into instructions directed to a
specific device type. Each type of peripheral device has its own
driver.
A driver can be either resident or loadable. A resident driver
resides within the Executive's address space, and therefore
reduces primary pool space. A loadable driver resides outside of
the Executive's address space, and is mapped when it is needed.
Because resident drivers reside within the Executive, they must
be incorporated at system generation. Loadable drivers can be
added to an existing RSX-llM-PLUS system at any time, without
requiring that you perform a new system generation.
In RSX-llM-PLUS systems with support for
all drivers must be loadable.
A driver has an associated data
particular device configuration.
base
Executi~e
that
data
space,
describes
See the RSX-llM-PLUS Guide to Writing an I/O Driver
discussion of drivers and data bases.
for
a
the
full
FCS {File Control Services)
FCS is a set of routines that a task can use to access the file
system.
It allows both record-oriented and block-oriented I/O
and provides for device-independent file operations such as
creating, deleting, opening, closing, reading, and writing. To
use FCS, a task invokes the FCS macros.
The macros call FCS
routines, which issue the actual I/O directives {QIOs).
1-8
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
The FCS routines are linked with a task when the task is
task-built.
These routines can reside in the task's image or in
a separate resident library.
{See the explanations of FCSFSL and
FCSRES.)
Most of the RSX-llM-PLUS tasks and utilities use FCS.
FCSFSL
FCSFSL is a supervisor-mode library of commonly used
FCS
routines.
You can build tasks to link to this single copy of the
FCS routines instead of including the routines in each task
image.
Having only one copy of the FCS routines in memory
instead of many reduces memory usage.
A
task
accesses
a
supervisor-mode
library
using
the
supervisor-mode mapping registers, a hardware feature available
on the PDP-11/70 and PDP-11/44 processors. Mapping the library
in supervisor mode allows the library to reside outside the
task's logical address space, thereby permitting larger tasks.
If you include supervisor-mode library support during SYSGEN,
many of the RSX-llM-PLUS tasks are built to use FCSFSL. SYSGEN
includes the letters "FSL" in these task file names so you can
tell which tasks are built to use FCSFSL.
The FCSFSL versions of
the tasks have exactly the same functionality as the versions
that link to FCSRES or that include the FCS routines in their
task images.
See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Task Builder Manual for
on supervisor-mode libraries.
more
information
FCSRES
You
FCSRES is a resident library of commonly used FCS routines.
can build tasks to link to this single copy of the FCS routines
instead of including the routines in each separate task image.
Having only one copy of the FCS routines in memory instead of
many reduces memory usage.
A task accesses a resident library by using the user-mode mapping
registers.
These registers are also used to map the task code
and data, so each task that uses the FCSRES library must reserve
some of its logical ~ddress space to map the library.
The FCSRES library uses no special hardware and can thus be used
on any of the processors RSX-llM-PLUS supports.
If you cannot
use FCSFSL tasks {because your processor does not support
supervisor mode), you may instruct SYSGEN to build many of the
RSX-llM-PLUS tasks to use FCSRES instead.
SYSGEN includes the
letters "RES"
in these task file names so you can tell which
tasks are built to use FCSRES. The FCSRES versions of the tasks
have exactly the same functionality as the versions that link to
FCSFSL or that include the FCS routines in their task images.
See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Task Builder Manual for
on resident libraries.
1-9
more
information
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
ACP (Ancillary Control Processor)
An ACP is a privileged task that implements a particular file
structure on a class of devices.
It performs volume-related
functions such as maintaining directories, allocating space for
files,
creating
and
deleting
files,
and enforcing file
protection. When a volume is mounted, it is associated with the
ACP that understands its file structure.
Usually, a task talks to FCS, FCS talks to the ACP, and
talks to the device driver.
RSX-llM-PLUS supplies two ACPs: FllACP for the
structure and MTAACP for
the ANSI formatted
structure.
the
Files-11
magnetic
ACP
disk
tape
Full-functionality Executive
The Full-functionality Executive, which is one of the options you
can select in the Choosing Executive Options section of SYSGEN,
contains all of the RSX-llM-PLUS service features.
Selecting
this Executive ensures that there are no missing features for
external tasks (for example, layered products). In addition,
if
you select this Executive, the SYSGEN procedure is shorter.
User-tailored Executive
The User-tailored Executive, which is one of the options you can
select from the Choosing Executive Options section of SYSGEN,
allows you to tailor an RSX-llM-PLUS Executive to your specific
needs.
The SYSGEN command files ask you a series of questions
about the features that you want your Executive to contain.
You
would select this option only if the Full-functionality Executive
contained features that
were
not
compatible
with
your
application.
mapped system
PDP-11 processors supporting memory management hardware are known
as mapped systems.
The memory management hardware converts
virtual addresses to physical addresses in memory.
RSX-llM-PLUS
does not support unmapped systems and only runs on systems
incorporating memory management hardware.
on-line system
An on-line system is an operating environment that shares
resources with other processing or development work in progress.
In the context of SYSGEN, generating an RSX-llM-PLUS system on
line means that you are using host system software and not the
baseline system provided on the distribution kit.
stand-alone system
A stand-alone system is an operating environment that
is
dedicated to a single activity.
In the context of SYSGEN,
generating an RSX-llM-PLUS system stand alone means that you are
using the baseline system provided on the distribution kit.
1-10
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
baseline system
The baseline system is the stand-alone RSX-llM-PLUS system
included as part. of the distribution kit. It contains those
software components necessary for you to generate an RSX-llM-PLUS
system.
target system
The target system is the operating system produced by the system
generation procedure, as well as the hardware configuration on
which it is intended to run. System generation may take.place on
the target system computer or on a different computer (see "host
system").
host system
The host system is that system on which you perform
an
RSX-llM-PLUS system generation. It may be the same hardware on
which you intend to run your new target system, or it may be a
separate
configuration that is more convenient for system
generationo
virgin system
A virgin system is a system image after SYSGEN has executed the
SYSVMR.CMD indirect command file and before the system has been
bootstrapped and saved.
saved system
A saved system is a system image that has been bootstrapped and
then written back to the system image file on disk using the MCR
SAV command.
hardware bootstrap
A hardware bootstrap is a process whereby a user initiates a
software system startup. Using the console switches and/or the
console terminal, you can instruct the bootstrap ROM to load into
memory the hardware bootblock record from an input device. The
bootblack record contains a pointer to the code necessary to load
the system image into memory.
software bootstrap
A software bootstrap is a process whereby a privileged user
initiates a new software system startup from an already running
system. Software bootstrapping requires the use of the MCR BOO
command.
{See
the
RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual,
particularly the SAV and BOO commands, for~details on software
bootstrapping.) Any valid RSX···llM-PLUS system image can be
software bootstrapped.
Autoconf igure
The Autoconfigure task automatically determines the correct
hardware
configuration
of the host system, including the
processor type, the CSR and vector addresses of the host system's
peripheral devices, and the presence of optional hardware. This
information can be used directly by SYSGEN, thereby reducing
greatly the number of questions asked in the course of running
SYSGEN.
1-11
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
saved answer file
Saved answer files contain the text of each question asked in the
various sections of SYSGEN, along with your answers to those
questions. These files are created by SYSGEN as you generate
your system.
You may use previously generated saved answer files to generate a
system without having to answer all the SYSGEN questions again.
PRE PG EN
A PREPGEN is the SYSGEN procedure performed without executing the
MCR command lines that assemble, task-build, and manipulate
certain files. You have the opportunity to answer all SYSGEN
questions and saved answer files are created, but a new system is
not assembled or built, and no files are deleted.
You are given the choice of performing a
you invoke the SYSGEN procedure.
PREPGEN
shortly
after
Performing a PREPGEN saves time and prevents mistakes.
PREPGEN
lets you run through the SYSGEN questions and become familiar
with them before you use your answers to actually generate a new
system.
The saved answer files generated can then be used to
perform an unattended SYSGEN.
Update
Update is an interactive procedure for applying a cumulative set
of corrections to your RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit.
Update
kits are issued periodically by DIGITAL. Update is supplied with
every RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit and is issued on a periodic
basis to customers who have purchased Update service. After you
apply Update to your distribution kit, you must perform SYSGEN to
incorporate the patches into your system.
DIGITAL-supplied driver
The RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit contains drivers for the
hardware devices supported on RSX-llM-PLUS. These drivers are
referred to as DIGITAL-supplied drivers and are supported by
DIGITAL.
user-supplied driver
Many users have applications that
require
customized
or
special-purpose drivers.
Any device driver that is not included
on the distribution kit is considered a user-supplied driver.
dual-access device
A dual-access (or dual-ported) device is an I/O device that can
be accessed by either of two controllers.
This requires a
dual-access hardware option that is only available with certain
devices.
This hardware provides two ports for accessing the
device, with each port connected to a different controller. Only
one port is allowed access to the device at any one time.
1-12
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM GENERATION
Under RSX-llM-PLUS, each port is
connected
to
different
controllers on the same system. This provides high availability
and allows load sharing between the two ports.
A dual-access device can also be connected to controllers on two
separate
systems,
but RSX-llM-PLUS does not support this
configuration.
mixed MASSBUS configuration
A mixed MASSBUS configuration is a peripheral configuration in
which devices of different types are connected to the same
MASSBUS controller (RH controller) •
Normally, a controller has only one type of device connected to
it.
For example, the first MASSBUS controller (RHA) might have
all the RP04s, RPOSs, and RP06s (device type DB) connected to it,
the second controller
(RHB) might have all the RM03s and RMOSs
(device type DR) connected to it, and so on.
In a mixed MASSBUS configuration, a controller has different
types of devices connected to it.
For example, the first MASSBUS
controller (RHA) might have both an RP06 (device type DB) and an
RM03 (device type DR) connected to it.
CSR (Control and Status Register)
Every peripheral device has a unique address on the UNIBUS. When
addressing a device, you are actually addressing a set of
registers that communicate with the device. The CSR address is
the address of a single register within that set of device
registers;
it is used by drivers to access any of the other
registers within that set.
vector
Associated with every device is a unique two-word location in the
low end of memory called a vector.
(The memory locations from 0
through 776(octal) are the vector areas.) Each vector stores the
processor status word
(PS) and the program counter (PC) of the
interrupt service routine for a specific device. When a device
interrupts the processor, the processor saves the current PS and
PC on the stack and loads the PS and PC from the device's vector.
The address in the new PC points to the interrupt service
routine.
Not all vectors are assigned to peripheral devices.
Some are
reserved for software interrupts.
For instance, execution of the
TRAP instruction causes an interrupt where a new PS and PC are
loaded from the vector reserved for
use only by the TRAP
instruction.
In addition, there are what are known as "floating vectors."
Floating vectors are those addresses from location 300(octal)
through location 776(octal). The assignment of devices to those
vectors is left to the discretion of the system manager and the
field service representative. Generally, floating vectors are
used for assigning multiple devices of a given type that require
more than one controller. See Appendix E for a description of
the algorithm used to assign floating vectors.
interrupt
An interrupt is a mechanism whereby the various external hardware
subsystems communicate a need for software servicing.
1-13
CHAPTER 2
GETTING STARTED
This chapter describes the steps you must take to prepare for invoking
the SYSGEN procedure.
2.1
WHAT YOU NEED BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Before you begin to follow the system generation procedure described
in this manual, you should gather the necessary media, software, and
hardware information that you will need in the course of the system
generation.
The following
is a list of the items essential to a
successful system generation:
•
Distribution Kit - DIGITAL supplies on magnetic tapes or disks
the RSX-llM-PLUS system software components that are used to
generate a working system. Section 2.2 describes the contents
of specific distribution kits.
•
Blank Media - In the course of generating a system, you
require a number of blank disks to back up the distribution
kits and to contain the generated system.
The type and
quantity of media required depends on the type of distribution
kit you have. See Section 2.1.2 for a discussion of blank
media requirements.
•
Device, CSR, and Vector Data for the Target Hardware - You
need a list of the hardware devices to be supported on the
generated system, their respective controllers, and
the
respective CSR and vector address data. You need this data
even if you use Autoconfigure to aid in configuring your
peripheral devices, since some of your devices may have
nonstandard CSR and vectors addresses and therefore will not
be detected by Autoconfigure.
If you are generating an RSX-llM-PLUS system for the first
time, you should obtain CSR and vector information from the
DIGITAL Field Service personnel who installed your hardware
system.
If you are already running an RSX-llM-PLUS system on
the hardware configuration for which you are generating an
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l system, you can obtain this information
using the following CON command line:
CON DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES FULL
The resulting display lists the CSR and vector information
contained in the system data base, which generally, although
not necessarily, reflects the actual hardware configuration.
More information on the format of the display and on the CON
command can be found in the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management
Guide.
2-1
GETTING STARTED
•
Completed Worksheets - Appendix A contains a
number
of
worksheets that are useful in organizing and collecting the
information you need to generate a system.
There
are
worksheets for the CSR and vector address information you must
gather, as well as an Executive options worksheet that you can
use to record the choices you make as you read through the
Choosing Executive Options section in Chapter 3.
You should make copies of these worksheets, fill them out, and
keep them with you as you invoke SYSGEN.
•
RSX-llM-PLUS/RMS-11 Release Notes - You must read the Release
Notes before you attempt to perform a system generation.
The
Release Notes contain information and warnings that were not
incorporated into this and other manuals.
•
RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide - This
manual provides step-by-step instructipns for each of the
operations you must perform and should be on hand as you
proceed through the system generation procedure.
2.1.1
Supported Target System Disks
Before you can invoke SYSGEN, you must copy the distribution kit
software to the disk upon which you will generate the new system.
Throughout this manual, this disk is called the target system disk.
For an RSX-llM-PLUS system generation, your target system disk may
one of the following:
RK07
RM02
RM03
RMOS
2.1.2
RM80
RA60
RASO
RA81
be
RP04
RP05
RP06
RP07
Blank Media Requirements
Use the following guidelines in determining what quantity
media to have on hand as you generate your system:
•
blank
Target System Disk - If you have the magnetic tape kit, you
need at least one disk to make a copy of the distribution kit.
If you intend to use an RK07 as the target system disk, you
need two blank RK07 disks, because the entire magnetic tape
distribution kit does not fit on one RK07 disk.
If you have the RK07 disk kit, you need two blank
to copy both of the distribution kit disks.
•
of
RK07
disks
Backup Copy of Generated System - You should keep a backup
copy of the finished RSX-llM-PLUS system you generate, in case
the system disk becomes accidentally corrupted.
You can back
up the target system disk to magnetic tape or to another disk,
depending on your needs and hardware configuration. You need
one 2400~ft magnetic tape (two 2400-ft tapes if you save the
system on tape at a density of 800 bpi instead of 1600 bpi)
for backing up the system to tape.
If you back up the system
to disk, you need a blank disk of sufficient size to hold the
files on the target system disk.
If you have an RC25 or RL02 pregenerated system kit, see Chapter 5 for
blank media requirements.
2-2
GETTING STARTED
2.1.3
Device Mnemonic Information
In RSX-llM-PLUS commands and in SYSGEN, peripheral devices are
referred to both by their hardware names {for example, RM05 disk
drive, TU77 tape drive) and by their software device mnemonics
(for
Appendix B contains a list of hardware
example, DRl:
and MMO:).
names and their respective software device mnemonics
for
all
RSX-llM-PLUS devices.
2.2
THE DISTRIBUTION KIT
A distribution kit is a collection of magnetic media containing the
software components you need to generate an RSX-llM-PLUS system.
There are five types of distribution kits for RSX-llM-PLUS:
•
Magnetic tape - 800 bpi
•
Magnetic tape - 1600 bpi
e
RK07 disk
e
RC25 disk
•
RL02 disk
The RC25 and RL02 disk kits are unlike the other kits.
They each
contain a pregenerated, ready-to-use RSX-llM-PLUS system, and a system
generation is not needed. You must follow different procedures for
setting up and using these kits.
See Chapter 5 for a complete
description of the contents and use of the RC25 and RL02 pregenerated
system kits.
Procedures for handling the magnetic tape
described in this and subsequent chapters.
and
RK07
disk
kits
are
to
the
Each kit contains the following software items:
•
Update, a procedure used to apply
RSX-llM-PLUS and layered product files
corrections
•
The distribution kit proper, containing the RSX-llM-PLUS
Executive
and
driver
source
files,
privileged
and
nonprivileged tasks, object libraries, SYSGEN command files,
and other files needed to generate an RSX-llM-PLUS system
•
The
baseline
system,
a
pregenerated,
bootstrappable,
RSX-llM-PLUS system supplied as an operating environment for
performing a stand-alone system generation
•
A stand-alone RSX-llS system {BRUSYS), used to copy the
distribution kit tape to disk {or, in the case of the RK07
disk kit, to copy the kit disk to another RK07 disk)
Update is used to apply the latest corrections to the RSX-llM-PLUS
distribution kit and/or layered products you might install on your
system.
The distribution kit proper, the baseline system, and the
BRUSYS system are used together to perform a system generation.
Update has its own installation instructions and documentation.
The distribution kit proper consists of two parts.
The first part
contains all the source, command, and object files necessary to
perform a system generation, while the second part contains source and
other miscellaneous files.
2-3
GETTING STARTED
In magnetic tape kits, these parts exist on the tape as backup sets
created by the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU), one backup set for
each part. You must copy these backup sets to disk before you can
perform a system generation.
In RK07 disk kits, each part is supplied on a separate disk.
You
should make a copy of the distribution kit disks and use those copies
to perform a system generation. Save the DIGITAL-supplied disks as
masters from which you can make fresh copies of the unaltered
distribution kit, should the need arise.
Figure 2-1 is an example of the paper labels that are attached to the
magnetic tapes or disk packs in the RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kits.
0
A Y-M950C-BC
RSX-11 M-PLUS V2.1 BIN RK7 1/2
ID:RSX11MPBL15 DIST KIT
© 1983
D1g1tol Equipment Corporation
ZK-1156-82
Figure 2-1 Examples of Paper Labels
for Magnetic Tapes and Disk Packs
Each paper label contains many of the following items of information:
•
DIGITAL product order number
•
Operating system name and version number
•
Tape format (for example, BRU) or disk
BIN, meaning "binary")
•
Density (for magnetic tapes only)
•
Type of distribution kit (such as RK7 for the RK07 disk kit)
•
Software
volume
ID :MPLUSBLl 5SRC)
•
Descriptive text {such as DIST KIT or BRUSYS
SYSTEM)
•
Tape reel or disk pack number (such as 1/5, which means
one of five reels")
label,
prefixed
format
(for
example,
(such
as
STANDALONE
COPY
"ID:"
"reel
Check the tapes or disks you receive against the lists in the
following sections to identify the various elements of the kit and
ensure that you have received a complete kit.
The following sections describe each type of distribution kit.
2-4
GETTING STARTED
2.2.1
Magnetic Tape - 1600 bpi
The kit consists of three magnetic tapes:
e
Distribution kit (ID:RSX11MPBL15 DIST KIT)
•
Update kit
•
BRUSYS stand-alone system
2.2.2
Magnetic Tape - 800 bpi
The kit consists of four magnetic tapes:
e
Distribution kit tape 1 {ID:RSX11MPBL15 DIST KIT 1/2)
•
Distribution kit tape 2 (ID:RSX11MPBL15 DIST KIT 2/2)
•
Update kit
•
BRUSYS stand-alone system
The first distribution kit tape contains all of the first BRU backup
set and part of the second. The second distribution kit tape contains
the remainder of the second BRU backup set.
2.2.3
RK07 Disk
The kit consists of three RK07 disks:
•
Distribution kit disk 1 (ID:RSX11MPBL15 DIST KIT)
•
Distribution kit disk 2 (ID:MPLUSBLlSSRC DIST KIT)
•
Update kit
The first distribution kit disk contains all the software components
necessary to perform a complete system generation.
The second
distribution kit disk contains miscellaneous source files.
2.3
HOST SYSTEMS FOR GENERATING RSX-llM-PLUS
To generate an RSX-llM-PLUS system, you must have
a
running
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.0 or V2.l system to manage the host computer's
resources. The host computer is the computer on which you are
generating your new RSX-llM-PLUS system.
It may or may not be the
computer for which you are generating the new RSX-llM-PLUS system;
that computer is referred to as the target computer.
2.3.1
Generating a New RSX-llM-PLUS System Stand Alone
If your hardware installation is new, or you do not have access to a
computer running an RSX-llM-PLUS V2.0 or V2.l system, you must use the
baseline system supplied with the distribution kit to manage the host
computer's resources and run the SYSGEN procedure. This is known as a
stand-alone system generation.
2-5
GETTING STARTED
2.3.2
Generating a New RSX-llM-PLUS System On Line
If the host computer is already running an RSX-llM-PLUS system (either
V2.0 or V2.l), you can use the running system to copy the distribution
kit and run the SYSGEN procedure and related tasks. This is known as
an on-line system generation.
2.4
COPYING THE DISTRIBUTION KIT
Before you can invoke SYSGEN, you must
software to the target system disk.
copy
the
distribution
kit
Even if you have an RK07 disk distribution kit, you should make a copy
of the DIGITAL-supplied distribution kit disk and use that copy as the
target system disk.
If you work on a copy of the distribution kit,
you will always have an unaltered copy of the distribution kit to use
should the target system disk accidentally become corrupted during the
system generation procedure.
In addition, if you intend to apply the
latest corrections to your RSX-llM-PLUS system using Update you must
have an unaltered copy of the original distribution kit.
Since you must copy the magnetic tape distribution kit to a disk
before invoking SYSGEN, the original kit tapes can be used at any time
to make fresh disk copies.
The procedure for copying your distribution kit depends on the type of
kit you have and whether you are performing a stand-alone or an
on-line system generation.
If you have an RC25 or RL02 pregenerated system kit, turn directly
the special instructions in Chapter 5 of this manual.
to
If you are generating your new system stand alone, read Section
next.
2.4.1
If you are generating your new system
next.
2.4.2
2.4.1
on
line,
read
Section
Copying Kits Stand Alone
If you have a magnetic tape distribution kit, you must copy the
distribution kit to the target system disk.
If you have an RK07 disk
kit, you must make a copy of the distribution kit disk to use as the
target system disk.
The following sections describe the procedures
used to copy each type of distribution kit using the BRUSYS and
baseline stand-alone systems.
2.4.1.1 The BRUSYS System - The BRUSYS system is
memory-resident RSX-llS system.
It is meant
prepare the target system disk and to copy
distribution kit, or to copy RK07 disk kits.
contained on the target system disk is used
environment for stand-alone system generations.
a
limited-feature,
to be used only to
the magnetic tape
The baseline system
as the operating
Included with the BRUSYS system are copies of the following utilities:
•
Backup and Restore Utility (BRU)
•
Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD)
2-6
GETTING STARTED
•
Disk Volume Formatter (FMT)
•
Disk Save and Compress Program (DSC)
Also included is a special-purpose configuration program (CNF)
that
allows you to change the CSR and vector addresses in the BRUSYS
system.
The BRUSYS system expects your devices to be at the following
CSR and vector addresses:
Device
DB
DM
DR
DU
MM
MS
MT
Formatter
Number
0
CSR
Vector
254
210
150
154
224
330
320
176700
177440
176300
172150
172440
172522
172522
If your devices are at different CSR and vector addresses, if your
MM-type magnetic tape drive is on a different formatter number, or if
CNF returns an "Invalid device" message, you must change the values in
BRUSYS.
You can do this by using the following CNF switches when you
enter the device name:
/CSR=csr address
/VEC=vector address
/FOR=formatter number
The vector addre~ses that BRUSYS expects for DR-, MS-, and MT-type
devices are nonstandard.
The CSR address that BRUSYS expects for
DR-type devices is also nonstandard. If you are using one of these
devices as an input or output device, you will always have to change
the values in BRUSYS to match the CSR and vector addresses of your
hardware.
You can enter the standard values for these devices by
using the following responses to CNF:
DR:/CSR=l76700/VEC=254
MS:/VEC=224
MT:/VEC=224
To begin copying your distribution kit, you must hardware bootstrap
the BRUSYS stand-alone system on your host computer. The procedure
for hardware bootstrapping the BRUSYS system depends on the bootstrap
hardware present on the host computer.
For information on the bootstrapping procedures for specific hardware
configurations, refer to the documentation supplied with your hardware
or consult DIGITAL Field Service.
If you have a magnetic tape kit, read Section 2.4.1.2 next.
If you have an RK07 disk kit, read Section 2.4.1.3 next.
2.4.1.2 Copying the Magnetic Tape Kit Stand Alone - Use the following
procedure to copy either the 800-bpi or 1600-bpi magnetic tape kits
using a host computer stand alone. The output disk referred to in
this section is the blank disk you intend to use as the target system
disk. All commands shown in this section are issued to the MCR
command line interpreter.
2-7
GETTING STARTED
1.
Load the BRUSYS tape and the output disk on the appropriate
drives.
If you are not familiar with the procedure for
loading tapes or disks on your drives, consult the hardware
documentation for the drives.
2.
Hardware bootstrap the BRUSYS tape. The RSX-llS stand-alone
system prints an identification line on the console terminal,
then begins to run the Stand-Alone Configuration and Disk
Sizing Program (CNF).
3.
In response to the "First device" prompt from CNF, enter the
/DEV switch.
CNF prints a list of the CSR and vector
addresses that BRUSYS expects for each device. For example:
>Enter first device: /DEV
Device
------
DB
DK
DL
DM
DP
DR
DU
MF FOR=O
MM FOR=O
MS
MT
CSR
------
176700
177404
174400
177440
176714
176300
177510
175400
172440
172522
172522
Vector
-----254
220
160
210
300
150
154
260
224
330
320
~
CSR Status
---------Present
Present
Present
Present
Not Present
Present
Present
Not Present
Present
Not Present
Not Present
In the example, CNF does not find devices at the default CSR
addresses for DP-, MF-, MS-, and MT-type devices. If any of
those devices were to be used in copying the distribution kit,
the actual CSR and/or vector address for that device would
have to be entered using the /CSR or /VEC switches.
If both of the devices you are using to copy the distribution
kit are at the CSR and vector addresses that BRUSYS expects,
follow the instructions in Step 4.
The vector addresses that BRUSYS expects for DR-, MS-, and
MT-type devices are nonstandard. The CSR address that BRUSYS
expects for DR-type devices is also nonstandard. If you are
using one or both of these devices to copy the distribution
kit, skip to Step 5 for instructions on how to change the
values in BRUSYS to match the CSR and vector addresses of your
hardware.
If one or both of the devices you are using to copy the
distribubion kit are not at the CSR and vector addresses that
CNF prints on your terminal, skip to Step 5.
4.
Enter your device specifications in response to the prompts
from CNF. The "first device" is the tape drive containing the
BRUSYS tape;
the "second device" is the drive containing the
output disk.
If CNF returns an "Invalid device" message when you enter
either of the device specifications, follow the instructions
in Step 5.
If CNF does not print the error message, skip to Step 6.
2-8
GETTING STARTED
5.
If your magnetic tape controller or your disk controller, or
both, are not connected to CSR and vector addresses that
BRUSYS expects, or if your MM-type magnetic tape drive is on a
formatter number other than zero, you must modify the software
to incorporate the correct addresses.
You can do this by using the following CNF switches
enter each device name:
when
you
/CSR=csr address
/VEC=vector address
/FOR=formatter number
For example, assume that you have a TU16 magnetic tape at
nonstandard CSR and vector addresses of 176300(octal) and
150(octal), respectively, and an RP04 with the
default
addresses.
Assuming that the unit number of both units is
zero, the following is the sequence of commands to CNF:
Enter first device: MMO:/CSR=l76300/VEC=l50
Enter second device: DBO:
~
~
If CNF prints an "Invalid device" error message when you enter
either of the device specifications, check to see that the
actual CSR and vector addresses for that device are the ones
you entered.
6.
After you have successfully entered device specifications for
the first and second devices, press the RETURN key and enter
the date and time using the TIM command.
Then use the TIM
command again to verify that you entered the correct date and
time. For example:
Hit RETURN and enter date and time as 'TIM HH:MM MM/DD/YY'
>TIM 20:06 03/02/82
~
>TIM~
20:06:01 3-MAR-82
>
7.
Format the output disk, if necessary.
Disks purchased from
DIGITAL are supplied preformatted. You may skip this step if
you are certain that your disk is properly formatted.
Disks
from other vendors or disks that have produced I/O errors may
need to be formatted. For example, if your output disk is
DBO:, use the following command sequence:
>RUN FMT
~
>
FMT> DBO:/VERIFY
** WARNING
~
- Data will be lost on DBO:
Continue? [Y OR N]: Y ~
Start formatting
Start verification
Operation complete
FMT>
(CTRL/Z)
2-9
**
GETTING STARTED
8.
Run the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) on your output disk.
For example, if your output device is DBO:, use the following
command sequence:
>RUN BAD
>
ID
BAD> DBO:/LIST ~
BAD -- DBO: Total bad blocks= O.
BAD> (CTRL/Z)
9.
Remove the BRUSYS tape from the tape drive, and replace it
with the distribution kit tape.
(If you have an 800-bpi tape
kit, load the first of the two distribution kit tapes.)
10.
Run the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU)
to copy the first
backup set on the distribution kit tape to the output disk.
For example, if you have a 1600-bpi distribution kit tape
mounted on MMO:, and an RP06 output disk mounted on a drive
designated as DBO:, use the following command sequence:
>RUN BRU
>
ID
BRU>/DENSITY:l600/VERIFY/MAX:20956/HEADERS:l0478
From:
MMO: ID
To:
DBO: ID
ID
BRU - Starting Tape 1 on MMO:
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MMO:
BRU - Starting verify pass Tape 1 on MMO:
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MMO:
BRU - Completed
BRU>
(CTRL/Z)
If you have an 800-bpi tape kit, alter the argument
/DENSITY switch to 800 (for example, /DENSITY:800).
of
the
You should alter the values specified in the /MAX and /HEADERS
switches to suit the type of disk volume to which you are
copying the distribution kit tape. Use the appropriate values
from Table 2-1 for the arguments of the /MAX and /HEADERS
switches.
Table 2-1
Disk Initialization Qualifier Values
Device
Value for /MAX
Switch
Value for /HEADERS
Switch
RA60
RASO
RA81
RK07
RM02/RM03
RM05
RM80
RP04/RP05
RP06
RP07
24617
14629
54815
10567
10567
30781
14923
10567
20956
62007
12308
7314
51699
1654
4049
25593
7461
5283
10478
51699
2-10
GETTING STARTED
If BRU prints messages indicating that the verify operation
failed,
repeat this entire step.
If the verify operation
fails again, use a new output disk.
If the verify operation
fails once again,
it is likely that your distribution kit
tape is defective and should be replaced.
When BRU finishes, the output disk contains a
bootstrappable
baseline system and is referred to as the target system disk.
NOTE
Do not remove the distribution kit tape
from the drive at this point.
The
second backup set
is
automatically
copied
by
the
baseline
start-up
procedure that runs after you bootstrap
the baseline system in the next step.
11.
Hardware bootstrap the target system disk.
This brings the
baseline
system
into
memory.
{Consult your hardware
documentation or DIGITAL Field Service for
information on
bootstrapping
disks
on
your
particular
hardware
configuration.)
When the baseline
system
comes
up,
it
prints
an
identification line and invokes the baseline start-up command
file, BASTART.CMD, which asks a
number
of
questions
pertaining
to
your
system.
Answer
these inquiries
appropriately.
BASTART.CMD then runs on-line BRU to copy the
second backup set from the distribution kit tape. When
BASTART.CMD exits, you may remove the distribution kit tape
from the tape drive.
Proceed to Chapter 3 for the next step
in the system generation procedure.
2.4.1.3 Copying the RK07 Disk Kit Stand Alone - Use the following
procedure to copy the RK07 disk kit using the host computer stand
alone.
The output disk referred to in this section is the blank disk
you intend to use as the target system disk. All commands shown in
this section are issued to the MCR command line interpreter.
l.
Load the first distribution kit disk and a blank RK07 disk on
your RK07 drives.
If you are not familiar with the procedure
for loading RK07 disks, consult the hardware documentation for
the drives.
2.
Hardware bootstrap the distribution kit disk. This brings the
baseline system into memory.
The baseline system prints an
identification line and invokes the baseline start-up command
file,
BASTART.CMD, which prompts you for the date and time.
Type CTRL/Z in response to the prompt
to
exit
from
BASTART.CMD.
This command file will be run again after you
have copied your kit.
3.
Physically write-protect the distribution kit disk,
then
software bootstrap the BRUSYS system,
using the following
command line:
>BOO [6,54]BRUSYS ®TI)
2-11
GETTING STARTED
This brings the BRUSYS system into memory.
The RSX-llS
stand-alone system prints an identification line on the
console terminal, then runs the Stand-Alone Configuration and
Disk Sizing Program (CNF).
4.
In response to the "First device" prompt from CNF, enter the
/DEV switch.
CNF prints a list of the CSR and vector
addresses that BRUSYS expects for each device. For example:
>Enter first device: /DEV (8fi)
Device
------
DB
DK
DL
DM
DP
DR
DU
MF FOR=O
MM FOR=O
MS
MT
CSR
------
176700
177404
174400
177440
176714
176300
177510
175400
172440
172522
172522
Vector
-----254
220
160
210
300
150
154
260
224
330
320
CSR Status
---------Present
Present
Present
Present
Not Present
Present
Present
Not Present
Present
Not Present
Not Present
If the RK07 disk drives that you are using to copy the
distribution kit are at the CSR and vector addresses that CNF
prints on your terminal, follow the instructions in Step 5.
If the RK07 disk drives that you are using to copy the
distribution kit are not at the CSR and vector addresses that
CNF prints on your terminal, skip to Step 6.
5.
Enter your device specifications in response to the prompts
from CNF.
The "first device"
is the drive containing the
distribution kit disk;
the "second device"
is the drive
containing the output disk.
If CNF returns an "Invalid device" message when you enter
either of the device specifications, follow the instructions
in Step 6.
If CNF does not print the error message, skip to Step 7.
6.
If your your disk controller is not connected to CSR and
vector addresses that BRUSYS expects, you must modify the
software to incorporate the correct addresses.
You can do this by using the following CNF switches
enter each device name:
when
you
/CSR=csr address
/VEC=vector address
For example, if your disk controller is at nonstandard CSR and
vector
addresses
of
177400(octal)
and
240(octal),
respectively, and you are using drives DKO:
and DKl:
the
following is the sequence of commands to CNF:
Enter first device: DKO:/CSR=l77400/VEC=240 (8fi)
Enter second device: DK1:/CSR=l77400/VEC=240 (8fi)
2-12
GETTING STARTED
If CNF prints an "Invalid device" error message when you enter
either of the device specifications, check to see that the
actual CSR and vector addresses for that device are the ones
you entered.
7.
After you have successfully entered device specifications for
the first and second devices, press the RETURN key and enter
the date and time using the TIM command.
Then use the TIM
command again to verify that you entered the correct date and
time. For example:
Hit RETURN and enter date and time as 'TIM HH:MM MM/DD/YY'
>TIM 07:47 05/20/82 ~
>TIM ~
07:47:01 20-MAY-82
>
8.
Format the output disk, if necessary.
Disks purchased from
DIGITAL are supplied preformatted. You may skip this step if
you are certain that your disk is properly formatted.
Disks
from other vendors or disks that have p,roduced I/O errors may
need to be formatted.
For example, if your output disk is
DMl:, use the following command sequence:
>RUN FMT
~
>
FMT> DMl:/VERIFY
**
~
WARNING - Data will be lost on DMl:
Continue? [YORN]: y
**
~
Start formatting
Start verification
Operation complete
FMT> mRuzi
9.
Run the Bad Block Locator Utility {BAD) on your output disk.
For example, if your output device is DMl:, use the following
command sequence:
>RUN BAD ~
>
BAD> DMl:/LIST (fil]
BAD -- DMl: Total bad blocks=
BAD> mRL/z)
10.
o.
Run the Backup and Restore Utility {BRU)
to copy
the
distribution kit disk to the output disk.
For example, if the
distribution kit disk is mounted on DMO:
and the output disk
is mounted on DMl:, use the following command sequence:
>RUN BRU
~
>
BRU>/VERIFY ~
From:
OMO: ~
To:
DMl: ~
BRU - Starting verify pass
BRU - Completed
BRU> mRL/zJ
2-13
GETTING STARTED
If BRU prints messages indicating that the verify operation
failed, repeat this entire step.
If the verify operation
fails again, use a new output disk. If the verify operation
fails once again, it is likely that your distribution kit disk
is defective and should be replaced.
When BRU finishes, the output disk contains a bootstrappable
baseline system, and is referred to as the target system disk.
11.
Remove the first distribution kit disk and the copy you just
made from their drives, and replace them with the second
distribution kit disk
and
another
blank
RK07
disk,
respectively.
Repeat steps 8, 9 and 10 to copy the second
distribution kit disk.
When BRU finishes, remove the second distribution kit disk and
replace it with the copy of the first distribution kit disk
(the target system disk).
Write-enable the copy of the
distribution kit disk.
At this point, you should set aside your original distribution
kit disks for safekeeping. The copies of these disks that you
just made should be loaded and ready in your RK07 drives and
both disks should be write-enabled.
12.
Hardware bootstrap the target system disk.
This brings the
baseline
system
into
memory.
(Consult your hardware
documentation or DIGITAL Field Service for information on
bootstrapping
disks
on
your
particular
hardware
configuration.)
When the baseline system comes up, it prints an identification
line
and
invokes
the baseline start-up command file,
BASTART.CMD, which asks a number of questions pertaining to
your system.
Answer these inqu1r1es appropriately. When
BASTART.CMD exits, proceed to Chapter 3 for the next step in
the system generation procedure.
2.4.2
Copying Kits On Line
The following two sections describe procedures for copying the
magnetic tape and RK07 distribution kits using a host computer already
running an RSX-llM-PLUS system.
If you have a magnetic tape kit, read Section 2.4.2.1 next.
If you have an RK07 disk kit, read Section 2.4.2.2 next.
2.4.2.1 Copying the Magnetic Tape Kit On Line - Use the following
procedure to copy either the 800-bpi or 1600-bpi magnetic tape kits
using a host computer running an RSX-llM-PLUS system. The output disk
referred to in this section is the blank disk you intend to use as the
target system disk. All commands shown in this section are issued to
the MCR command line interpreter.
1.
Log in to a privileged account on the host system.
2.
Load the distribution kit tape and the output disk on the
appropriate drives.
(If you have an 800-bpi tape kit, load
the first of the two distribution kit tapes.) If you are not
familiar with the procedure for loading tapes or disks on your
drives, consult the hardware documentation for the drives.
2-14
GETTING STARTED
3.
Allocate and mount the distribution kit tape and the target
system disk.
Use the MOU /FOR switch to mount the tape and
the disk as foreign volumes.
For
example,
if
your
distribution kit tape is on MSO: and your output disk is on
DR2:, use the following command sequence:
>ALL
>ALL
>MOU
>MOU
4.
MSO: ~
DR2: ~
MSO:/FOR ~
DR 2 :/FOR ~
Format the output disk, if necessary.
Disks purchased from
DIGITAL are supplied preformatted. You may skip this step if
you are certain that your disk is properly formatted.
Disks
from other vendors or disks that have produced I/O errors may
need to be formatted.
For example, if your output disk is
DR2:, use the following command sequence:
>RUN $FMT ~
FMT>DR2 :/VERIFY ~
**
WARNING - Data will be lost on DR2:
**
Cont in u e? [ Y OR N ] : Y tBill
Start formatting
Start verification
Operation complete
FMT>
5.
(CTRL/Z)
Run the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) on your output disk.
For example, if your output disk is DR2:, use the following
command sequence:
)RUN $BAD ID
BAD> DR2:/LIST ID
BAD -- DR2: Total bad blocks= O.
BAD> (CTRL/Z)
6.
Run the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU)
to copy the first
backup set on the distribution kit tape to the output di'sk.
For example, if you have a 1600-bpi distribution kit tape
mounted on MSO:, and an RM03 output disk mounted on DR2:, use
the following command sequence:
)RUN $BRU ID
BRU>/DENSITY:l600/VERIFY/INITIALIZE/MAX:l0567/HEADERS:4049
From:
MSO: ~
To:
DR2: ~
BRU - Starting Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - Starting verify pass Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - Completed
BRU>
(CTRL/Z)
2-15
~
GETTING STARTED
If you have an 800-bpi tape kit, alter the argument
/DENSITY switch to 800 (for example, /DENSITY:800).
of
the
You should alter the values specified in the /MAX and /HEADERS
switches to suit the type of disk volume to which you are
copying the distribution kit tape. Use the appropriate values
from Table 2-2 for the arguments of the /MAX and /HEADERS
switches.
Table 2-2
Disk Initialization Qualifier Values
Device
RAGO
RASO
RA81
RK07
RM02/RM03
RM05
RM80
RP04/RP05
RP06
RP07
Value for /MAX
Switch
Value for /HEADERS
Switch
24617
14629
54815
10567
10567
30781
14923
10567
20956
62007
12308
7314
51699
1654
4049
25593
7461
5283
10478
51699
If BRU prints messages indicating that the verify operation
failed,
repeat this entire step.
If the verify operation
fails again, use a new output disk. If the verify operation
fails once again,
it is likely that your distribution kit
tape is defective and should be replaced.
When BRU finishes, the output disk contains a bootstrappable
baseline system and is referred to as the target system disk.
NOTE
Do not remove the distribution kit tape
from the drive at this point.
The
second backup set
is
automatically
copied by the baseline start-up command
file that you invoke in Step 8.
7.
Dismount the target system disk and mount it again, this time
using the volume label
(RSX11MPBL15)
instead of the /FOR
switch.
Then set your device default to the target system
disk device.
For example, if your target system disk is
DR2:, use the following command sequence:
>OMO DR2:/LOCK=NOUNLOAD IBITJ
DMO -- TTSS:
dismounted from DR2:
>MOU DR2:RSX11MPBL15 IBITJ
>ASN DR2:=SY: lliITJ
2-16
***
Final dismount initiated
***
GETTING STARTED
8.
Change your default UFO to [2,54], then invoke the baseline
start-up
command file, BASTART.CMD.
Use the following
command sequence:
>SET /UIC=[2,54] ~
»@BASTART ~
BASTART.CMD asks a number of questions pertaining to your
system.
Answer these inquiries appropriately. BASTART.CMD
then runs BRU to copy the second backup set from the
distribution kit tape.
When BASTART.CMD exits, you may
remove the distribution kit tape from the tape drive.
Proceed to Chapter 3 for the next step in the system
generation procedure.
2.4.2.2 Copying the RK07 Disk Kit On Line - Use the following
procedure to copy the RK07 disk kit using a host computer running an
RSX-llM-PLUS system. The output disk referred to in this section is
the blank disk you intend to use as the target system disk. All
commands shown in this section are issued to the MCR command line
interpreter.
NOTE
The procedure requires two free RK07
drives.
If your system has only two
RK07 drives, and one of them contains
your system disk, you cannot copy your
RK07 kit on line, and you must use the
stand-alone copying procedure described
in Section 2.4.1.3.
1.
Log in to a privileged account on the host system.
2.
Load the first distribution kit disk and a blank RK07 disk on
your RK07 drives, then write-protect the distribution kit
disk.
If you are not familiar with the procedure for loading
RK07 disks, consult the hardware documentation for the drives.
3.
Allocate and mount the kit disk and the output disk, using the
/FOR switch with the MOU command to mount the disks as foreign
volumes.
For example, if your distribution kit disk is OMO:
and your output disk is DMl:, use the following command
sequence:
>ALL
>ALL
>MOU
>MOU
4.
DMO: ~
DMl: ~
DMO:/FOR ~
DMl :/FOR ~
Format the output disk, if necessary.
Disks purchased from
DIGITAL are supplied preformatted. You may skip this step if
you are certain that your disk is properly formatted.
Disks
from other vendors or disks that have produced I/O errors may
2-17
GETTING STARTED
need to be formatted.
For example, if your
DMl:, use the following command sequence:
output
disk
is
>RUN $FMT ~
FMT> DMl :/VERIFY ~
** WARNING - Data will be lost on DMl: **
Continue? [ Y OR N ] : Y IB:ru
Start formatting
Start verification
Operation complete
FMT>
5.
(CTRL/Z)
Run the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) on your output disk.
For example, if your output disk is DMl:, use the following
command sequence:
>RUN $BAD ~
BAD> DMl :/LIST IBTIJ
BAD -- DMl: Total bad blocks= O.
BAD> (CTRL/Z)
6.
Run the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU)
to copy
the
distribution kit disk to the output disk.
For example, if the
distribution kit disk is mounted on DMO:
and the output disk
is mounted on DMl:, use the following command sequence:
>RUN $BRU ~
BRU>/VERIFY/INITIALIZE ~
From:
OMO: IBTIJ
To:
DMl: IBID
BRU - Starting verify pass
BRU - Completed
BRU >
(CTRL/Z)
If BRU prints messages indicating that the verify operation
failed,
repeat this entire step.
If the verify operation
fails again, use a new output disk. If the verify operation
fails once again, it is likely that your distribution kit disk
is defective and should be replaced.
When BRU finishes, the output disk contains a bootstrappable
baseline system and is referred to as the target system disk.
7.
Dismount the first distribution kit disk and the copy you just
made. For example, if the distribution kit disk is mounted on
OMO:
and the copy is mounted on DMl:, use the following
command sequence:
>OMO OMO:/LOCK=UNLOAO IBITJ
OMO -- TT36:
dismounted from DMO:
>DMO DMl :/LOCK=UNLOAD IBITJ
DMO -- TT36:
dismounted from DMl:
2-18
***
Final dismount initiated
***
***
Final dismount initiated
***
GETTING STARTED
Remove the first distribution kit disk and the copy from their
drives, and replace them with the second distribution kit disk
and another blank RK07 disk, respectively.
Repeat steps 3, 4,
5, and 6 to copy the second distribution kit disk.
When BRU finishes, remove the second distribution kit disk and
replace it with the copy of the first distribution kit disk
(the target system disk).
Write-enable the copy of the
distribution kit disk.
At this point, you should set aside your original distribution
kit disks for safekeeping.
The copies of these disks that you
just made should be loaded and ready in your RK07 drives and
both disks should be write-enabled.
8.
Dismount the target system disk, and mount it again, this time
using the volume label
(RSX11MPBL15)
instead of the /FOR
switch. Then set your device default to the target system
disk device.
For example, if your target system disk is OMO:,
use the following command sequence:
>DMO DMO:/LOCK=NOUNLOAD ~
DMO -- TT13:
dismounted from OMO:
>MOU DMO:RSXllMPBLlS (B[]
>ASN DMO:=SY: ~
9.
***
Final dismount initiated
***
Change your default UFO to [2,54], then invoke the baseline
start-up command file, BASTART.CMD.
Use the following command
sequence:
>SET /UIC=[2,54] ~
>@BASTART ~
BASTART.CMD asks a number of questions pertaining to your
system.
Answer
these
inquiries
appropriately.
When
BASTART.CMD exits, proceed to Chapter 3 for the next step in
the system generation procedure.
2-19
CHAPTER 3
RUNNING SYSGEN
3.1
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW BEFORE YOU START
This section contains general information
conventions, and features.
concerning
SYSGEN
format,
Format of SYSGEN Questions
3.1.1
The Indirect Command
questions take.
Processor
determines
the
format
that
SYSGEN
The general format for SYSGEN questions is an asterisk followed by the
question number, the text of the question, and a prompt (contained
inside brackets) indicating the type of response required.
Question numbers consist of two characters designating the section of
SYSGEN followed by a number designating the particular question in
that section (for example,
SUOlO).
The
following
are
the
two-character designators for each section:
SU
CE
CP
AE
BE
BP
BN
CS
Choosing SYSGEN Options
Choosing Executive Options
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
Building the Executive and Drivers
Building the Privileged Tasks
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
Creating the System Image File
The questions are numbered sequentially, but not consecutively.
You
can use question numbers for looking up a particular question in this
chapter;
the question numbers printed by SYSGEN are the same as the
ones in this chapter.
The prompt at the end of each SYSGEN question indicates what type of
response is required, the range of acceptable responses, and the
default response.
SYSGEN questions require a response in one of the following ways:
•
An ASCII string response
•
A logical response -- Y (for yes) or N (for no)
•
A numeric response
Most SYSGEN questions have an implied response, known as the default.
The default is the value assumed by SYSGEN if an option is not
explicitly specified.
Many of the SYSGEN questions contain the
default response within brackets immediately following the text of the
3-1
RUNNING SYSGEN
question.
How the default response appears in a given question
depends on the type of response required for that question (ASCII
string, logical, or numeric).
Press the RETURN key without entering any characters to select the
default response for any SYSGEN question (unless the explanatory text
that accompanies the question explicitly states that there is no
default for that question).
The following is a typical SYSGEN question requiring an
response:
*
CEOlO
ASCII
string
What is your target processor type? [S R:S.-12. D:"ll/70"]:
The first key letter
(S)
inside the brackets indicates that the
response should be an ASCII string -- in this case, a processor type.
The second key letter (R)
indicates that the range or number of
characters allowed in the response is from 5 to lO(decimal). The
third key letter (D) indicates that the default response is "11/70".
Pressing the RETURN key without entering any characters enters the
default response.
The following is a typical SYSGEN
(logical) response:
*
CE270
question
requiring
a
Yes
or
No
Do you want to include XDT? [Y/N D:N] :
The prompt [Y/N] at the end of the above question indicates that the
response should be either a Y (for yes) or an N (for no). The default
response for this example is No, but Yes/No questions can also have a
default response of Yes.
The following
response:
*
CP0836
is
a
typical
SYSGEN
question
requiring
a
numeric
What is the physical unit number of DB2:? [O R:0-7 D:2]:
The prompt at the end of the above question indicates that the
question requires a numeric response. The first key letter (O) inside
the bracket indicates that the response is an octal number.
A key
letter of "D" in this position indicates that the response is a
decimal number. The second key letter (R) indicates that the range
for the· response is from O through 7. The third key letter (D)
indicates that the default response is 2.
If you are not certain how to answer a particular question, take the
default by pressing the RETURN key without entering any characters.
The defaults have been chosen so that they will produce acceptable
results with most systems.
You can change your answer and perform
another SYSGEN later. It is easier to generate a simple, working
system first, and then to tailor that system by performing additional
system generations later when you have gained
experience
and
familiarity with SYSGEN and RSX-llM-PLUS.
If you answer a question with an incorrect value, SYSGEN displays a
message describing the error and suggests a procedure to correct the
problem. The question then appears again on your terminal.
3.1.2
How to Get Help
You should, of course, become familiar with this manual and the SYSGEN
procedure before sitting down to begin generating your system. To the
extent possible, this manual presents step-by-step procedures to
3-2
RUNNING SYSGEN
follow in preparing for and performing the SYSGEN
should keep it with you as you generate your system.
procedure.
You
All of the questions posed during SYSGEN have associated help
paragraphs.
You can, if you choose, have the help paragraphs printed
on your terminal before each question is asked by answering Yes to the
following question:
* SUOlO
Do you always want the explanation printed?
If you feel sufficiently familiar with the SYSGEN procedure and do not
choose to have the help paragraphs automatically printed, you may
still examine the help paragraphs for any question by pressing the ESC
key in response to the question. SYSGEN prints the help paragraphs
and asks the question again.
Other manuals in the
RSX-llM-PLUS
documentation
set
contain
information relative to system generation. Where appropriate, this
manual contains pointers to specific manuals and, sometimes, to
chapters within those manuals.
3.1.3
What to do if you Make a Mistake
If at any time you wish to
CTRL/Z.
exit
from
the
SYSGEN
procedure,
press
Note that exiting from SYSGEN in this way may render the current saved
answer files unsuitable for future use.
For more information on
dealing with saved answer files, see Section 3.1.4 in this chapter.
If you enter a response out of the proper range for a specific
question or set of questions, or if you choose options that are
incompatible, SYSGEN prints an error message on your terminal.
If the message is labeled as a warning, take appropriate action as
described in the error message, or simply note the content of the
message for later reference.
If the message is labeled as fatal, SYSGEN exits.
After correcting
the condition that caused the error, you can restart SYSGEN by doing
the following:
1.
Change your default UFD back to [200,200] using the
command, as follows:
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
2.
Check to see if
Section 3.1.4);
3.
Invoke SYSGEN:
>@SYSGEN
MCR
SET
~
the saved answer files are
if they are not, delete them.
usable
(see
~
If you are performing a PREPGEN (as you should before actually
generating a system) and you make a mistake, you can redo the PREPGEN
and correct the mistake. When you run the PREPGEN the second time,
use the saved answer files for those sections that are correct; do
not use the saved answer file for the section in which you made the
mistake. See Section 3.1.5 for information on performing a PREPGEN.
If you do not discover a mistake until after you have completed
SYSGEN, you may still be able to correct the mistake without
performing another complete SYSGEN.
3-3
RUNNING SYSGEN
Most of your answers in the Choosing Executive Options section govern
conditionally assembled code in the Executive and therefore cannot be
changed without performing another SYSGEN.
The exceptions are the
following:
•
The console driver and the Queue Manager can be task built and
added to the system at any time.
•
The batch processor can be task built and added to the system
if virtual terminal support and the Queue Manager have been
included.
•
Either version of the file system ACP (FCPMDL or FCPLRG)
be task built and added to the system at any time.
•
Your answer to the memory size question is not crucial.
The
size you specify is used as the size of the virgin system.
Once the system is bootstrapped and saved, the actual memory
size is determined and used.
•
If you choose floating point processor support, the system
will run on processors with or without a floating point unit.
can
The answers that you give to the following questions in the Choosing
Peripheral Configuration section can be changed after you have
completed SYSGEN:
•
SYSGEN asks for the CSR and vector addresses of every
controller in your system. If you specify a wrong address,
you can change it after your system image file has been
created by using the VMR CON command.
•
SYSGEN asks for the drive type for many
For example:
*
CP0860
of
the
disk
units.
Is DBO: an RP04, RPOS, or RP06?
This information determines the size of the disk and is only
important for the device on which you will be bootstrapping
the virgin system image, and for RKOSF disks.
If you will be bootstrapping the virgin system from an RK06 or
RK07, you must specify the correct d~ive type during SYSGEN.
If you will be bootstrapping the system from any other type of
disk, you must specify the correct drive type or the drive
type of a larger disk. When the system is bootstrapped and
the devices are brought on line, the actual drive type
overrides whatever you specified during SYSGEN.
The RKOSF disk is treated as two units. It is important to
specify the correct drive type for these devices so that
SYSGEN will generate the correct number of units.
•
If you leave out a device whose driver can be built with a
loadable data base, you can add the device to your system
after the SYSGEN is complete.
See Section 4.8.2 for a
description of adding a device after SYSGEN.
•
If you specify the wrong configuration for a device whose
driver is built with a loadable data base, you can respecify
the configuration and replace the incorrect data base after
the SYSGEN is complete. See Section 4.8.2 for a description
of adding a device after SYSGEN.
3-4
RUNNING SYSGEN
3.1.4
Saved Answer Files
Whenever you answer a question during SYSGEN, the text of the question
as asked and your response are placed in files on the target disk.
These saved answer files can be used to redo a SYSGEN without
requiring that you answer all the questions again.
SYSGEN creates three saved answer files:
SYSGENSAl.CMD
Contains the responses to questions in the
Choosing
Executive
Options, Assembling the
Executive and Drivers, Building the Executive
and Drivers, Building the Privileged Tasks, and
Creating the System Image File sections
SYSGENSA2.CMD
Contains the responses to questions in
Choosing Peripheral Configuration section
the
SYSGENSA3.CMD
Contains the responses to questions in
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks section
the
In later system generations, you can use these files as input.
When you specify these files as input, SYSGEN uses the information
contained in the files as answers to SYSGEN questions, without
printing the questions on your terminal.
If SYSGEN encounters a
question for which there is no saved answer, it prints that question
on your terminal and prompts for a response.
Before creating each saved answer file, SYSGEN asks you for a comment
describing the system being generated. This comment is included in
the saved answer file as documentation and is printed when the saved
answer file is used as input. This comment may contain more than one
line. SYSGEN will continue prompting for input until you enter a null
line (produced by pressing RETURN without entering any characters in
response to the prompt) •
Each saved answer file contains a list of the SYSGEN questions, each
followed by its response.
The files also include headings that
indicate when each file was created. The responses are in the form of
Indirect Command Processor .SET directives:
.SET symbol value
where
symbol
value
An internal SYSGEN symbol
Your response
In the Choosing SYSGEN Options section, SYSGEN asks if you want to use
saved answer files for input. If you respond Yes, the saved answer
file that you specify will supply the answers to the proper section or
sections.
Every time you perform SYSGEN, it creates saved answer files with the
names given above. Each time you specify saved answer files as input,
SYSGEN uses the saved answer files from the last time SYSGEN was
performed (unless you specify different input files).
If you exit SYSGEN by typing CTRL/Z, the saved answer file is closed
at the point in the questions where it was interrupted. If you later
use that file as input, SYSGEN examines the file and prints a message
warning that the file may be incomplete. SYSGEN reads the answers
that the file contains, then begins asking questions from the point at
which you left off in the aborted SYSGEN. As you answer further
questions, SYSGEN appends your answers to the incomplete file.
3-5
RUNNING SYSGEN
If SYSGEN exits abnormally, the saved answer files it was creating may
be incomplete or locked.
You may have to unlock or delete these
incomplete files;
therefore, it is important that you keep track of
the various versions of saved answer files that you are creating. One
way to do this is to rename the current saved answer files with
meaningful names after you exit SYSGEN.
You can use saved answer files to perform a SYSGEN without ha~ing to
spend much time at a terminal waiting for assembly and task-building
to complete;
see Section 3.1.5 in this chapter.
PREPGEN
3.1.5
PREPGEN is the SYSGEN procedure performed with MCR command lines
inhibited.
You have the opportunity to answer all the questions, and
saved answer files are created, but a new system is not assembled or
built, and no files are deleted. Performing a PREPGEN is a way of
quickly generating saved answer files that can then be used to perform
a "real" SYSGEN unat~ended.
To perform a PREPGEN, invoke SYSGEN normally and respond
following question:
*
SU080
Yes
to
the
Do you want to do a PREPGEN?
If you have never generated an RSX-llM-PLUS system before, or if you
are unfamiliar with this version of RSX-llM-PLUS, you may find it
useful to run through the questions a number of times to make the
proper choices for your installation. PREPGEN allows you to change
your choices in, for example, the Choosing Peripheral Configuration
section without having to reanswer the questions in the Choosing
Executive Options section. After you are satisfied with your answers,
you can then perform a "real" SYSGEN using the saved answer files from
the PREPGEN.
Autoconfigure
3.1.6
Of all the sections of SYSGEN, the longest and most complicated is the
Choosing
Peripheral
Configuration
section.
It is not always
convenient to obtain the correct CSR and vector addresses for your
specific peripheral devices. Although SYSGEN provides default CSR and
vector addresses for most devices, there is no guarantee that your
devices correspond to those addresses.
If you are performing a stand-alone system generation and the host
computer is the computer for which you are generating an RSX-llM-PLUS
system, you can avoid confusion by directing
SYSGEN
to
run
Autoconfigure on your hardware.
To run Autoconfigure,
question:
*
SUlOO
answer
Yes
when
SYSGEN
asks
the
following
Do you want to run Autoconf igure on the host system hardware?
3.1.6.1 What Autoconfigure Does - When you answer Yes
to
the
Autoconfigure question, SYSGEN automatically determines the correct
hardware configuration of your host system: the processor type, the
CSR and vector addresses of your peripheral devices, and any optional
hardware that may be present (such as floating point or extended
3-6
RUNNING SYSGEN
instruction set hardware).
SYSGEN displays complete configuration
information at your terminal after Autoconfigure has finished.
You may use the Autoconfigure results for responses to questions in
the Choosing Peripheral Configuration section of SYSGEN. In this
case, SYSGEN automatically answers (and, therefore, bypasses) any
questions for which Autoconfigure results can be used as responses.
You can also override the results of Autoconfigure (see Section
3.1.6.2).
Autoconfigure is a valid option only if
you
are
generating
RSX-llM-PLUS on the baseline system (that is, performing a stand-alone
system generation) •
Autoconfigure can accurately determine
the
hardware
configuration
only
when
there
is rio pending I/O.
Autoconfigure uses a complex series of device interrupts, which
requires that there be no other activity on the system.
If you use an input saved answer file containing a saved peripheral
configuration and also run Autoconfigure on the host system, SYSGEN
merges the device information from both the saved answer file and the
autoconfiguration into a single list. Where there are discrepancies
in the saved answer file and the Autoconfigure list, the saved answer
file always overrides the Autoconfigure results.
If SYSGEN fails to report Autoconfigure results (as described in
Example 3-1) within one minute, then Autoconfigure has failed to
determine the configuration of your hardware.
If this occurs, you
must rebootstrap the baseline system and invoke SYSGEN again without
choosing the Autoconfigure option.
When SYSGEN fails to report
Autoconfigure
results,
a severe hardware malfunction may have
occurred, or you have not followed the standard DIGITAL configuration
algorithm detailed in Appendix E.
Autoconfigure does not find all the devices about which SYSGEN asks
questions. Section 3.1.6.3 describes those devices that Autoconfigure
finds. Note that for many devices, Autoconfigure finds only the first
controller.
If you use Autoconfigure, SYSGEN does not ask about any of the devices
that Autoconfigure finds, but uses the Autoconfigure results instead.
SYSGEN always asks about those devices that are not found by
Autoconfigure.
Table 3-1 lists all the remarks that may be
with the configuration information.
output
by
Autoconfigure
3.1.6.2 Overriding Autoconfigure Results - When you direct SYSGEN to
run Autoconfigure, SYSGEN asks the following question, allowing you to
override the results of Autoconfigure:
*
SUllO
Do you want to override the Autoconfigure results?
This option directs SYSGEN to display the Autoconfigure results in the
default field of each question. Instead of directing SYSGEN to use
Autoconfigure results as responses to the questions in the Choosing
Peripheral Configuration section, each SYSGEN question appears with
the Autoconfigure results as the default instead of the standard
default response. You may· then examine the Autoconf ig ure results and
either enter a different response or press the RETURN key to input the
A.utoconfig ure result.
You can-~~verride Autoconfigure results to enter information not
normally determined by Autoconfigure. For example, if your system has
four RK06 drives, but one is down with serious hardware problems,
3-7
RUNNING SYSGEN
Autoconfigure would only report finding three of them.
If you know
that the drive will be repaired soon, you can
override
the
Autoconfigure results by entering 4 as the number of units for the
RK06, instead of the default of 3 provided by Autoconfigure.
Table 3-2~ lists the devices supported by the Autoconfigure
Devices
that
are
not listed in Table 3-2, as well
malfunctioning devices, cannot be automatically configured.
option.
as any
Example 3-1
Sample Autoconf igure Output
Processor Type:
Memory Size:
11/70
512. Kw
Options:
Floating Point Processor (FPll)
Extended Instruction Set (EIS)
Extended (22-bit) Addressing
Switch Register (SWR)
Display Register
Cache Memory
Parity Memory
Name
Vector
OKA
220
OMA
RHA
210
224
CSR
0
2
RK05
RK05
0
1
2
RK06
RK06
RK07
0 0
0-1
TU77
TU77
0
RM03
0
MLllA
0
1
2
3
RP06
RP06
RP05
RPOS
Remarks
177440
172440
150
176300
RHC
204
176400
RHO
254
176700
264
214
200
270
060
???
310
314
324
340
350
360
???
Type
177404
RHB
DXA
OTA
LPA
LPB
YLA
YLB
YMA
YMB
YMC
YHA
YHB
YHC
YHD
Unit
1 771 70
177342
177514
164004
177560
175610
170500
170510
170520
160020
160040
160060
160100
TM03
TM03
Dual access
Failed to interrupt
Failed to interrupt
3-8
RUNNING SYSGEN
Table 3-1
Autoconfigure Remarks and Meanings
Remark
Meaning
Failed to interrupt
The specified device is either
malfunctioning
or the hardware
configuration
is
nonstandard,
causing Autoconf igure to report
unreliable
information.
Autoconf igure
places
three
question marks (???) in the vector
field of the report. SYSGEN does
not include the specified device
in the resulting system.
Mixed MASSBUS devices
Autoconfigure
has
detected
a
MASSBUS controller configured with
several. classes of
peripherals
attached to it (for example, an
RM03 and an RP06).
TM02
TM03
Indicates the type of magnetic
tape
formatter associated with
this slave drive. Magnetic tape
unit numbers are displayed in the
following format:
0 1
where
0
1
is the
formatter
unit
number
is the slave unit number
Priority n
Autoconf igure
has
detected
a
device with an interrupt priority
higher than expected. The actual
interrupt priority is n.
Dual access
The specified unit has the dual
access
option installed.
Dual
access allows a unit to be shared
by two controllers.
???
(in the vector field)
Sector interleaved
See "Failed to interrupt" above.
The
RS03
or
RS04
displayed
supports
sector
interleaving,
which allows the unit to optimize
data accesses.
3.1.6.3 Hardware Supported by Autoconfigure - Autoconfigure supports
most standard devices supplied by DIGITAL. For those DIGITAL devices
in your hardware configuration not supported by Autoconfigure, SYSGEN
asks the appropriate question in the Choosing Peripheral Configuration
section to get the specific controller information for those devices.
Autoconfigure does not determine the number of units for DK, DP, DT,
or MT devices.
It does determine the CSR and vector addresses for
those devices. SYSGEN asks questions in the Choosing Peripheral
3-9
RUNNING SYSGEN
Configuration section
for those devices.
that
require you to input the number of units
All devices that are to be configured into
your
system
by
Autoconf igure must be connected to the system bus and must be powered
up.
In addition, DK-type and DU-type devices must have a disk
spinning in the drive for Autoconfigure to work properly.
Table 3-2 is a list of the hardware supported by Autoconfigure. Refer
to Appendix E for more information on the hardware supported by
Autoconfigure and the algorithm used to assign addresses to devices
attached to the UNIBUS.
NOTE
Your host system configuration
must
conform
to
the
standard
PDP-11
configuration algorithm (described in
Appendix E) for Autoconfigure to report
reliable information.
Table 3-2
Hardware Supported by Autoconf igure
Processors
MICRO/PDP-11 2
PDP-11/2 3-PLUS
PDP-11/24
PDP-11/44
PDP-11/70
22-Bit Addressing
Processor/Memory Options
FP-11
KE-llE
KW-llP
FPP - Floating Point Processor
EIS - Extended Instruction Set
CIS - Commercial Instruction Set
Programmable Clock
Cache Memory
Switch Register
Display Register
Parity Memory
I/O Peripherals and Controllers
CT
DB
DD
DK
DL
DM
DP
TAll cassettel
RP04/05/06 disk drive
TU58 DECtape II
RKll/RKosl
RL211/RL01/RL02 diskl
RK611/RK711 RK06/RK07 diskl
RP11/RP02/RP03 diskl
1. Autoconfigure detects only the first controller for these devices.
2. Autoconfigure reports a processor type of "11/23-PLUS" for this
processor.
(continued on next page)
3-10
RUNNING SYSGEN
Table 3-2 (Cont.)
Hardware Supported by Autoconfigure
I/O Peripherals and Controllers (Cont.)
DR
DS
DT
DU
DX
DY
EM
LP
MM
MS
MT
PR
PP
RH
YH
YL
YL
YL
YL
YM
YZ
RM02/RM03/RM05/RM80/RP07 disk drive
RS03/RS04 fixed-head disk
TC11/TU56 DECtape!
UDA50/RC25/RA60/RA80/RA81 disk drive
RQDXl/RXSO/RDSl disk drivel
RXll/RXOl floppy diskl
RX211/RX02 floppy diskl
MLll semiconductor disk emulator
LP/LS/LVll line printer
TU16/45/77/TE16 magnetic tape drive
TS11/TU80/TSV05 magnetic tape drive
TM11/TU10/TE10/TS031
PRll/PCll paper tape readerl
PCll paper tape punchl
RH11/RH70 MASSBUS controller
DHll/DHVll asynchronous terminal interface
DLll/DLVll-A/B asynchronous interface
DLll/DLVll-C/D/E asynchronous interface
DLll/DLVll-J asynchronous interface
DLll-W console interface with line clock
DMll-BB modem controller for DHll
DZll/DZVll asynchronous terminal interface
1. Autoconfigure detects only the first controller for these devices.
3.1.6.4 The Baseline System - The baseline system is a stand-alone
RSX-llM-PLUS system included with the distribution kit.
It contains
all the software components and Executive features necessary for you
to generate an RSX-llM-PLUS system.
If you copied your distribution kit stand alone in Chapter 2,
baseline system should be currently running on the host computer
will be used to invoke and perform the SYSGEN procedure.
If
baseline is not currently running, you must hardware bootstrap
distribution kit disk before you invoke SYSGEN.
This brings
baseline system into memory and starts it running.
If you copied your distribution kit on line and intend
SYSGEN on line, you do not need the baseline system.
to
the
and
the
the
the
invoke
The peripheral devices generated into the baseline system are shown in
Tables 3-3 and 3-4.
3-11
RUNNING SYSGEN
Table 3-3
RSX-llM-PLUS Baseline Device Configuration
Device
Mnemonic
DB
DR
MM
DK
DM
DL
DU
MS
DX
DY
DD
LP
MT
No. of
Units
CSR
Vector
176700
176700
172440
177404
177440
174400
172150
172 522
177170
160000
160000
177514
160000
8
8
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
1
2
254
254
224
220
210
160
154
400
264
410
420
200
430
Table 3-4
Terminal Configuration
Controller
Mnemonic
YLA (console)
YLB
YHA
YZA
3.1.7
Controller
Type
Terminal
Lines
DLll/DLVll
DLll/DLVll
DHll/DHVll
DZll/DZVll
1
1
16
8
CSR
177560
160000
160000
160000
Vector
60
440
450
460
Applying Update
Update is an Indirect command file used to apply a cumulative set of
corrections to RSX-llM-PLUS and the layered products. The latest
Update is supplied with every RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit.
Updates
are issued periodically to customers who have purchased Update
service.
Instructions for applying Update are provided with the Update medium.
You must always apply Update to a copy of the unaltered distribution
kit since each Update is cumulative (that is, Update B contains all
the corrections previously distributed in Update A along with the
latest corrections) •
3.1.8
Generating a V2.l System on an RSX-llM-PLUS V2.0 System
You can copy the distribution kit and perform an on-line SYSGEN using
an
RSX-llM-PLUS
V2.0 system as the host system.
Follow the
instructions given in Chapter 2 for copying the distribution kit on
line.
3-12
RUNNING SYSGEN
After you have made a copy of your distribution kit, do the following:
•
If it is not mounted already, mount your target system disk
and assign logical device SY: to it. For example, if your
target system disk is spinning in DBO:, use the following
command sequence:
>MOU DBO: RSX11MPBL15 ID
> ASN DBO: =SY: ID
•
Set your default UFD to [200,200] and invoke the BLlOGEN.CMD
command file located in UFO [200,200]. This command file
installs the tasks needed to perform SYSGEN. These tasks are
installed for use by your terminal only, so you must invoke
BLlOGEN.CMD from the same terminal from which you intend to
invoke SYSGEN.
For example:
>SET /UIC= [200, 200] ID
> @BLlOGEN ID
•
Invoke the SYSGEN command file in UFO [200,200].
For example:
> @SYSGEN IBfl)
•
3.1.9
Proceed to Section
SYSGEN asks.
3.2
for
descriptions
of
the
questions
Invoking SYSGEN
Before you invoke SYSGEN, you should have made a copy of your
distribution kit following the instructions in Chapter 2. After you
have made a copy of your distribution kit, do the following to invoke
the SYSGEN procedure:
•
If it is not mounted already, mount your target system disk
For example, if your
and assign logical device SY: to it.
target system disk is spinning in DBO:, use the following
command sequence:
>MOU DBO:RSX11MPBL15 ID
> ASN DB 0: =SY : ID
•
Set your default UFO to
[200,200]
command file.
For example: ·
and
invoke
the
SYSGEN
>SET /UIC=[200,200] ID
> @SYSGEN ID
This procedure invokes the first
starts the SYSGEN questions.
3.2
SYSGEN
Indirect
command
file
and
SYSGEN QUESTIONS
The rest of this chapter describes the questions asked by the SYSGEN
procedure.
SYSGEN uses your responses to the questions asked in the
various sections to assemble and task-build a version of RSX-llM-PLUS
that meets your specific needs and is tailored to your hardware
conf ig ur at ion.
3-13
RµNNING SYSGEN
If this is your first time generating an RSX-llM-PLUS system, you
should use Autoconfigure to determine (if possible) your peripheral
configuration and choose the Full-functionality Executive option.
Choosing these options reduces the number of questions you must
answer, and although the system that results may not be optimized for
your needs, you will have a correct full-functionality system. The
first example in Appendix D is an example of this type of system
generation.
When you have gained experience and familiarity with your system, you
can perform another SYSGEN to produce a system that is tailored
specifically to your requirements.
SYSGEN never asks all of the questions described in this chapter,
since many involve choices that are mutually exclusive. Therefore,
while not every question in a sequence will appear on your terminal,
the order in which they are listed in this section parallels the order
in which SYSGEN asks them.
The questions are divided into eight sections:
•
Choosing SYSGEN Options
•
Choosing Executive Options
•
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
•
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
•
Building the Executive and Drivers
•
Building the Privileged Tasks
•
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
•
Creating the System Image File
3-14
RUNNING SYSGEN
SYSGEN OPTIONS
3.2.1
Choosing SYSGEN Options
In this section, SYSGEN asks questions about the kind of SYSGEN you
wish to perform. You can specify the saved answer files to be used,
whether you want to do a PREPGEN, whether you want
to
use
Autoconfigure, and whether you want to do a complete SYSGEN.
You answers to the questions in this section are not saved in a saved
answer file.
The questions are asked every time you invoke SYSGEN.
The following is a description of all the possible
Choosing SYSGEN Options section.
*
SUOlO
questions
in
the
Do you always want the explanation printed? [Y/N D:N]:
If you are unfamiliar with SYSGEN, the help paragraph for each
question can be printed automatically before the question appears on
your terminal.
Enter Yes if you have not performed a SYSGEN
performing a V2.l SYSGEN for the first time.
you
are
If you answer No, you may still obtain the help paragraph for
question by pressing the ESC key in response to the question.
any
*
*
SU020
before
or
if
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the Executive options? [Y/N D:N]:
SYSGEN always creates saved answer files containing your responses to
the questions asked by SYSGEN. The following is a list of the files
created and the responses they contain:
SYSGENSAl.CMD
Choosing Executive Options,
Assembling
the
Executive and Drivers, Building the Executive
and Drivers, Building the Privileged Tasks,
Creating the System Image File
SYSGENSA2.CMD
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
SYSGENSA3.CMD
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
If you have performed a SYSGEN (or PREPGEN) before, you can use the
saved answer files created in the course of the previous SYSGEN as
input to this SYSGEN. The SYSGEN procedure uses the saved answers as
your responses to the questions in this SYSGEN.
You should perform a PREPGEN first to create saved answer files and
then perform a SYSGEN specifying those saved answer files as input to
the various SYSGEN sections.
For more information on saved answer files, see Section 3.1.4 in
chapter.
this
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN asks you to provide the
file name for the saved answer file that contains answers to the
questions in the Choosing Executive Options, Assembling the Executive
and
Drivers, Building the Executive and Drivers, Building the
Privileged Tasks, and Creating the System, Image File sections.
3-15
RUNNING SYSGEN
SYSGEN OPTIONS (Cont.)
If you answer No, SYSGEN proceeds to Question SU040.
*
SU030
Enter saved answer file name [S o:•sYSGENSAl.CMD•J:
Enter the file specification of the saved answer file containing
previously
generated answers to the questions in the Choosing
Executive Options, Assembling the Executive and Drivers, Building the
Executive and Drivers, Building the Privileged Tasks, and Creating the
System Image File sections.
This question is asked only if you indicated that you
saved answers to the "Executive group" questions.
*
*
SU040
wished
to
use
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the peripheral configuration? [Y/N D:N]:
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN asks you to provide the
file name for the saved answer file that contains answers to questions
in the Choosing Peripheral Configuration section.
If you answer No, SYSGEN proceeds to Question SU060.
* suoso
Enter saved answer file name [S D:•sYSGENSA2.CMD•]:
Enter the file specification of the saved answer file containing
previously
generated answers to the questions in the Choosing
Peripheral Configuration section.
This question is asked only if you indicated that you wished to
saved answers to the Choosing Peripheral Configuration section.
*
*
SU060
use
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the nonprivileged task builds? [Y/N D:N]:
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN asks you to provide the
file name for the saved answer file that contains answers to questions
in the Building the Nonprivileged Tasks section.
If you answer No, SYSGEN proceeds to Question
*
SU070
suoeo.
Enter saved answer file name [S D:•sYSGENSAJ.CMD•J:
Enter the file specification of the saved answer file containing
previously generated answers to the questions in the Building the
Nonprivileged Tasks section.
This question is asked only if you indicated that you wished
saved answers to the nonprivileged task-build questions.
* suoso
to
use
Do you want to do a PREPGEN? [Y/N D:N]:
PREPGEN allows you to answer all the SYSGEN questions and create saved
answer files without performing SYSGEN: no MCR commands are executed,
no files are deleted, and the Executive is not assembled or built.
3-16
RUNNING SYSGEN
SYSGEN OPTIONS (Cont.)
After successfully completing the PREPGEN, you can invoke
use the saved answer files generated during PREPGEN.
proceeds unattended.
SYSGEN and
SYSGEN then
For more information on PREPGEN, see Section 3.1.5.
*
*
50090
Enter the name of the disk drive containing your
target system disk [ddnn:] [S R:2-5]:
Enter the unit designation (for example, DB2:) of the drive containing
the
copy
of
the distribution kit prepared according to the
instructions in Chapter 2.
This disk volume will be referred to
in
this and subsequent chapters as the target system disk.
*
SUlOO
*
Do you want to run Autoconf igure on the host system
hardware? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes if you wish to use the Autoconfigure task to determine the
hardware configuration of the host system.
For a description of the
Autoconfigure task, see Section 3.1.6.
If the host processor is not the processor for
generating this system, answer No to this question.
This question appears only if you are running on the
(that is, performing a stand-alone SYSGEN).
which
baseline
you
are
system
After determining your hardware configuration, Autoconfigure prints a
table of what it found.
If no results are printed within a few
minutes, Autoconfigure has failed and you should rebootstrap your
system and restart the SYSGEN.
Do not use Autoconfigure the next
time.
If you have already performed a PREPGEN or SYSGEN during which you ran
Autoconfigure, and you are using the saved answer files from that
PREPGEN or SYSGEN, it is not necessary to
run Autoconfigure again.
The saved answer files contain all the device information from
Autoconfigure.
*
SUllO
Do you want to override the Autoconfigure results? [Y/N D:N]:
If you answer Yes to this question, the configuration data obtained by
Autoconfigure appears in the default fields of each question. You can
thereby choose to use some of the Autoconfigure results
(by pressing
the RETURN key and taking the default) or override the Autoconfigure
results by entering a different response.
If you answer No to this question, SYSGEN uses all of the information
Autoconf igure obtained to answer the questions in the Choosing
Peripheral Configuration section.
Questions about devices
that
Autoconf igure supports but did not find in your configuration are not
asked. Questions about devices that Autoconfigure does not support
are asked as usual.
3-17
RUNNING SYSGEN
SYSGEN OPTIONS {Cont.)
If you are using both the Autoconfigure results
file the saved answer file responses take
Autoconfigure results.
and a saved answer
precedence over the
For additional information on Autoconfigure, see Section 3.1.6.
*
SU120
Do you want to do a complete SYSGEN? [Y/N D:Y]:
Every time you start SYSGEN, you have the following options:
•
You can do a complete SYSGEN.
•
You can continue a previous SYSGEN.
•
You can do an individual section of SYSGEN.
A complete SYSGEN performs of all of the following sections of SYSGEN:
•
Choosing SYSGEN Options
•
Choosing Executive Options
•
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
•
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
•
Building the Executive and Drivers
•
Building the Privileged Tasks
•
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
•
Creating the System Image File
If you are generating a new RSX-llM-PLUS system, you should answer Yes
to this question. If you have just applied the latest Update and are
now performing the required SYSGEN, you should answer Yes to this
question.
If you answer Yes to this question, each section leads directly
the next section, and SYSGEN proceeds to Question CEOlO.
into
If you answer No to this question, SYSGEN proceeds to Question SU130.
*
*
SU130
Do you want to continue a previous SYSGEN from
some point? [Y/N D:Y]:
If you have an incomplete SYSGEN that you wish to continue or if you
wish to redo part of a previous SYSGEN, you may start SYSGEN at any of
the sections just listed. SYSGEN proceeds from that section to the
end.
NOTE
Before you
continue
SYSGEN
at
a
particular
section,
all
previous
sections must have been successfully
completed.
3-18
RUNNING SYSGEN
SYSGEN OPTIONS (Cont.)
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN proceeds to Question SU140.
If you answer No to this question, SYSGEN proceeds to Question SU150.
*
SU140
At which section would you like to restart SYSGEN? [S R:0-1]:
Enter the letter of the section at which you wish to restart SYSGEN:
A.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Choosing Executive Options
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
Building the Executive and Drive~s
Building the Privileged Tasks
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
Creating the System Image File
This question is asked only if you answered Yes to Question SU130.
*
SUlSO
Do you want to do any individual sections of SYSGEN? [Y/N D:Y]:
Instead of performing a complete SYSGEN or continuing a previous
SYSGEN, you may specify individual sections of SYSGEN that you want to
perform. You would want to do this if you wished to add a new device
to a
previously generated system, or if you wanted to create a new
system image file.
See Chapter 4 for further
information on making
changes to a system you have generated already.
Note that the SYSGEN sections must be done
in order because each
depends upon the output of the previous sections.
Do not perform the
sections out of order.
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN proceeds to Question SU160.
If you answer No to this question, SYSGEN exits.
*
SU160
Which sections would you like to do? [S R:0.-15.]:
Enter the letters (separated by commas) of the sections of SYSGEN
wish to perform:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Choosing Executive Options
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
Building the Executive and Drivers
Building the Privileged Tasks
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
Creating the System Image File
Adding a Device
This question is asked only if you answered Yes to Question SU150.
3-19
you
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS
Choosing Executive Options
3.2.2
The questions in this section pertain to the RSX-llM-PLUS
You can assemble one of the following Executives:
•
Full-functionality
•
User-tailored
Executive.
The Full-functionality Executive is the recommended choice because it
includes all RSX-llM-PLUS Executive options. Selecting this Executive
saves time (options are included automatically and questions do not
appear)
and ensures that important options are not inadvertently
excluded.
The User-tailored Executive requires that you explicitly select the
options for which you want support. Among these options are several
that are required for optimum system performance.
Select
the
User-tailored
Executive only when specific applications require
exclusion of an option.
Your answers to questions in this section are put in the saved
file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
The following is a description of all the possible
Choosing Executive Options section.
*
CEOlO
questions
answer
in
the
What is your target processor type? [S R:S.-12. 0:•11/10•1:
Enter the processor type of
following list:
the
target
system,
choosing
from
the
MICRO/PDP-11
11/23-PLUS (also called 11/23-B)
11/24
11/44
11/70
The processor type determines whether Executive data space and
supervisor-mode library support can be included in the system. You
space
or
can run an RSX-llM-PLUS system with Executive data
supervisor-mode library support only on a PDP-11/44 or a PDP-11/70
processor. You can run a system without this support on any of the
specified processors.
*
CE020
Do you want the Full-functionality Executive? [Y/N D:Y]:
Enter Yes to select an Executive that includes all
RSX-llM-PLUS operating system options:
of
the
following
•
Support for Executive data space and user data space (This
option is included in the Full-functionality Executive only if
your processor contains I- and D-space hardware, such as the
PDP-11/70 and PDP-11/44.)
•
Support for supervisor-mode libraries (tasks linked to FCSFSL;
PDP-11/70 and PDP-11/44 only)
3 . -20
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS (Cont.)
e
Tasks linked to
PDP-11/24 only)
•
Task headers out-of-pool support
•
All DIGITAL-supplied drivers loadable
•
Interrupt Control Block (ICB) pool size of 128 words
•
Shadow recording support
•
Console driver support
•
Resource Accounting support
•
Batch processor support
•
Queue Manager for spooling
•
DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) and alternate CLI support
•
High-performance FCP
•
File windows in secondary pool
•
Virtual terminal support (maximLUn virtual terminal unit buffer
size is 184(decimal) bytes;
default virtual terminal unit
buffer size is 120(decimal) bytes)
•
Time-out
seconds
on
FCSRES
unsolicited
(MICRO/PDP-11,
terminal
input
PDP-11/23-PLUS
after
and
30(decimal)
Enter No to select the User-tailored Executive. This option requires
you to specify which Executive options you wish to include in your
system. Choosing this Executive is not recommended.
Select this
Executive only if your application demands that specific RSX-llM-PLUS
options be excluded from the system.
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN proceeds to Question CE120.
If your answer No to thi? question, SYSGEN proceeds to Question CE030.
*
CE030
Do you want to reconsider your selection? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes
if,
having
read
the
previous
descriptions
and
recommendations, you wish to select the Full-functionality Executive.
*
CEOSO
Do you want Executive data space support? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes to generate an Executive with separate instruction and data
space (the I- and D-space hardware separates code from data and maps
the two separately) •
3-21
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS (Cont.)
"
Enter No if you do not wish to include Executive
data space support.
The MICRO/PDP-11, PDP-11/23-PLUS and PDP-11/24 processors do not
contain I- and D-space hardware;
systems generated with software
support for Executive data space will not run on these processors.
You should answer No to this question if you need to generate a system
that
runs on the MICRO/PDP-11, PDP-11/23-PLUS and/or PDP-11/24
processors as well as on the PDP-11/70 and/or PDP-11/44 processors.
This option significantly increases the
pool.
available
amount
If you select this option, SYSGEN automatically includes
supervisor-mode
libraries.
In
addition,
SYSGEN
DIGITAL-supplied drivers and their data bases loadable.
of
system
support
makes
for
all
NOTE
In a system including Executive data
space
support, all drivers must be
loadable. Therefore, if you wish to
include a resident, user-written driver,
you must exclude this option.
This question appears only if you selected the User-tailored Executive
and if your target processor is a PDP-11/70 or a PDP-11/44.
*
CE060
Do you want user data space support? [Y/N D:N]:
User data space support allows tasks to use the user mode
D-space mapping hardware to map code and data separately.
I-
and
This question appears only if you selected
the
User-tailored
Executive, your target processor is a PDP-11/70 or PDP-11/44, and you
selected Executive data space support.
*
CE070
Do you want support for task headers out-of-pool? [Y/N D:N]:
This option allows task headers to reside in physical memory outside
of the dynamic storage region {pool). This increases the amount of
pool available for other system functions.
This option is required for RTEM-11, the RT-11 emulator which runs
under RSX-llM-PLUS. Note that RTEM-11 must be purchased and installed
separately. Answer Yes to this question if you intend to install
RTEM-11 on your system.
This question
Executive.
*
CE080
appears
only
if
you
selected
the
User-tailored
Do you want supervisor-mode library support? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes to generate an Executive that can map large, pure libraries
in supervisor space rather than in the user's address space. The
RSX-llM/M-PLUS Task Builder Manual supplies
details
on
using
supervisor-mode libraries.
3-22
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS (Cont.)
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN builds many of the
privileged tasks to link to FCSFSL, the FCS supervisor-mode library.
You will also be able to use the prebuilt nonprivileged tasks of the
form xxxFSL.TSK that are supplied on the distribution kit. See
Section 3.2.7.
This question appears only if you selected the User-tailored Executive
and excluded Executive data space support, and if your target
processor is a PDP-11/70 or PDP-11/44.
*
CE090
Do you want to use FCSRES, the FCS resident library? [Y/N D:N]:
FCSRES is a resident library of commonly used FCS routines. Tasks can
be built to map to the FCS routines in this library instead of
including the FCS routines in their task images. This saves physical
memory, since the many, separate copies of FCS routines that would
occur in task images are replaced by a single, shared copy used by all
tasks.
If you respond Yes to this question, SYSGEN will build many of the
privileged tasks to link to FCSRES. You will also be able to use the
prebuilt nonprivileged tasks of the form xxxRES.TSK supplied on the
distribution kit. See Section 3.2.7.
NOTE
Tasks built to link to a library on
RSX-llM-PLUS are not transportable to an
RSX-llM system.
This question is asked only if you did not include support for
supervisor-mode libraries, or if you chose the User-tailored Executive
and your processor is a MICRO/PDP-11, PDP-11/23-PLUS or PDP-11/24.
*
*
CElOO
Do you want all DIGITAL-supplied drivers and their data bases
to be loadable? [Y/N D:N]:
This question permits you to specify that all DIGITAL-supplied drivers
and their data bases are to be loadable.
This question appears only if you selected the User-tailored Executive
and if you excluded Executive data space support.
This question only applies to DIGITAL-supplied drivers (those provided
with the RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit). If you intend to include
user-supplied drivers, you will be asked to specify whether each
user-supplied driver and data base is loadable or resident in the
Choosing Peripheral Configuration section.
If you enter Yes, all DIGITAL-supplied drivers and
are built as loadable.
their
data
bases
If you enter No, you will be asked to specify whether each driver and
data
base is loadable or resident in the Choosing Peripheral
Configuration section of SYSGEN.
3-23
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS (Cont.)
*
CEllO
What is the ICB pool size (in words)? [D R:l6.-1024. 0:128.]:
For loadable drivers, the hardware cannot dispatch directly to an
interrupt service routine in the driver. The driver is outside the
Executive address space and therefore must be mapped before you use
it.
The code required to initially service an interrupt and dispatch
to the proper driver resides in an Executive structure called the
Interrupt Control Block (ICB).
Thus, the interrupt vector for a
controller serviced by a loadable driver points to an !CB rather than
to the driver.
See the RSX-llM-PLUS Guide to Writing an I/O Driver
for details.
On a system without Executive data space, ICBs are allocated from the
system pool.
On a system with Executive data space,
ICBs are
allocated from a separate ICB pool. Your response to this question
determines the minimum size of the ICB pool in the virgin system
image. When the virgin system is saved, more space is automatically
allocated to the ICB pool.
There must be one ICB, 8(decimal) words long, for every 16(decimal)
controllers of a given type which will be loaded in the virgin system
image.
The default response allocates 128(decimal) words for ICB pool space.
This amount is adequate for most systems and is the recommended
response.
If you do not enter the default response, the acceptable range
through 1024(decimal).
is
16
This question is not asked if you did not include Executive data space
support.
*
*
CE120
Do you want support for communications products
(such as DECnet)? [Y/N D:N]:
This option allows you to include DECnet or other communications
products.
Refer to the DECnet documentation for details. Note that
DECnet must be purchased and installed separately.
If you enter Yes, DCL and alternate CLI support will also be included.
*
CE124
Do you want SPM-11 support? [Y/N D;N]:
The Software Performance Monitor (SPM-llM-PLUS) is an RSX
monitoring package which you may purchase from DIGITAL.
performance
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN includes support for
SPM-llM-PLUS. Refer to the SPM-llM-PLUS documentation for details.
To use SPM-llM-PLUS, you must have expansion space available for the
KWll-P programmable clock that is provided with the SPM-llM-PLUS
package.
3-24
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS {Cont.)
*
CE.130
What is the system name? [S R:0-6 o:•RsXMPL•]:
The system name is an arbitrary character string. This should be the
same as the DECnet node name, if any.
Enter an alphanumeric· string of
six characters or fewer to be used to identify your system.
*
CE140
Do you want shadow recording support? [Y/N D:N]:
Shadow recording creates mirror images of disk volumes.
For details
on shadow recording, see the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide.
This question
Executive.
*
CE150
appears
only
if
you
selected
means
of
intercepting
The RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide
Output Task (COT) and the console driver-.---This question
Executive.
CE160
User-tailored
Do you want console driver support? [Y/N D:N]:
This option provides a
terminal messages.
*
the
appears
only
if
you
and
logging
describes
selected
the
the
console
Console
User-tailored
Do you want accounting support? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes to
include support
for
Resource
Accounting.
The
RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide describes Resource Accounting.
This question
Executive.
*
CE170
The batch
streams.
appears
only
if
you
selected
the
Do you want to include the batch processor? [Y/N D:N]:
processor
(BPR)
provides
background
processing
If you enter Yes, the Queue Manager and virtual terminal
also included.
For more information on the batch processor,
Batch and Queue Operations Manual.
This question
Executive.
*
CE180
User-tailored
appears
only
if
you
see
selected
of
job
support
are
the
RSX-llM/M-PLUS
the
User- tailored
Do you want to include the Queue Manager? [Y/N D:N]:
The Queue Manager (QMG)
provides for input and output spooling.
This question appears only if you selected the User-tailored Executive
and you have not included the batch processor.
If you included the
batch processor, the Queue Manager is automatically included and
this
question does not appear.
3-25
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS (Cont.)
For more information on the Queue
Batch and Queue Operations Manual.
*
CE190
Manager,
see
the
RSX-llM/M-PLUS
Do you want to include DCL and alternate CLI support? [Y/N D:N]:
The DIGITAL Command Language (DCL)
operating systems.
is compatible among several DIGITAL
Alternate CLI support allows you to include user-supplied command line
interpreters in your system.
For information on DCL syntax, see the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Command Language
Manual.
The RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide conta1nS-a chapter
on the OCT... task and information needed by user5Who wish to write
the i r own CL I •
This question appears only if you selected the User-tailored Executive
and you did not include support for communications products.
If you
included support for communications products, DCL and alternate CLI
support is automatically included and this question does not appear.
*
CE200
Which FCP do you want? [S R:l-6 n:•FcPLRG•]:
Two versions
RSX-llM-PLUS.
1..
of
the
Files-11
ACP
(FllACP)
are
available
on
FCPMDL
This is a SK-word, overlaid FCP, which provides
good
performance for systems with limited memory.
It provides
buffering for caching of directories and the bitmap, as well
as buffer space for about twenty open files.
Also included
are preaccessed directories, providing foL minimum use of
system pool.
2.
FCPLRG
This is a 9K-word, nonoverlaid FCP, which provides maximum
performance for FllACP.
Since it does not use overlays, it
incurs no system overhead for executing any code sequence.
FCPLRG has the maximum number of buffers for all operations,
as well as a large directory buffer.
Both versions of FllACP have the same functionality.
The default is FCPLRGo
This question
Executive.
appears
*
want support for file windows in secondary pool? [Y/N D:N]:
CE210
Do
y~u
only
if
you
selected
the
User-tailored
This option allows the FCP to put file windows in secondary pool
instead of primary pool, thus freeing valuable primary pool and
reducing the likelihood of pool space problems.
This question
Executive.
appears
only
if
you
3-26
selected
the
User-tailored
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS (Cont.)
*
CE220
Do you want virtual terminal support? [Y/N D:N]:
Virtual terminal support permits a parent task
I/O for an offspring task.
to
simulate
terminal
The RSX-llM/M-PLUS Executive Reference Manual describes
terminal support and the associated Executive directives.
virtual
This question appears only if you selected the User-tailored Executive
and you did not include batch processor support. If you included
batch processor support, virtual terminal support is automatically
included and this question does not appear.
*
*
CE230
What is the default virtual terminal unit buffer
size? [D R:l.-512. 0:120.]:
The Create Virtual Terminal
(CRVT$) directive creates the data
structure for a virtual terminal and links it to the device list.
Directive parameters include AST addresses and maximum buffer size
allowed for offspring I/O requests. If you omit the maximum buffer
length in the directive, it defaults to the value you specify in
response to this question.
The acceptable range
120 (decimal).
is
through
1
512 (decimal).
The
default
is
See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Executive Reference Manual for details,
This question appears only if you selected the User-tailored Executive
and you included batch processor support or virtual terminal support.
*
*
CE240
What is the maximum virtual terminal unit buffer
size? [D R:l.-512. D:l84.]:
Enter the maximum buffer size that
Virtual Terminal {CRVT$) directive.
can
be
specified
The acceptable range is 1 through 512(decimal).
i s 1 8 4 ( d ec i ma 1) •
in
a
The default
Create
response
See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Executive Reference Manual for details.
This question appears only if you selected the User-tailored Executive
and you included batch processor or virtual terminal support.
*
CE260
Enter unsolicited input time-out (in seconds)
[D R:0.-255. 0:30.]:
The full-duplex terminal driver discards unsolicited input upon the
expiration of the time-out value that you specify (the driver issues a
CTRL/U). The valid time-out range is 0 through 255 (decimal).
Enter zero to inhibit the
input time-out feature.
full-duplex
terminal
driver
unsolicited
The default response is 30(decimal) seconds.
This question
Executive.
appears
only
if
you
3-27
selected
the
User-tailored
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS {Cont.)
*
CE270
Do you want to include XDT? [Y/N D:N]:
The Executive Debugging Tool {XDT) provides a subset of ODT-11
commands for use in system state. If selected, XDT is included in the
Executive. This allows interactive debugging of Executive modules,
privileged tasks, I/O drivers, and interrupt service routines.
If you answer Yes to this question, consistency check code is included
in the dynamic memory allocation routines.
Note that if you included Executive data space support, XDT
reduce the available amount of primary pool.
does
not
If your target processor is a MICRO/PDP-11, PDP-11/23-PLUS
or
PDP-11/24 or if you did not include Executive data space support,
answering Yes to this question reduces the amount of primary pool.
For more information on XDT, see the RSX-llM-PLUS Guide to Writing
I/Q. Driver.
*
*
CE280
an
Enter the crash notification device CSR
address [O R:160000-177700 0:177564]:
If the system crashes, the Executive crash module issues a message
the selected device.
at
Enter the CSR address {the I/O page address of the transmitter
register) for the crash notification device. The normal device is the
console terminal, which has a CSR address of 177564{octal).
This is
the default response.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700 {octal) •
*
CE290
On what device do you wish crash dumps to be written? [S R:2-3]:
Enter the device mnemonic of the device on which you want the
Executive crash module to write memory dumps. Note that the memory
dump device must be part of the target hardware configuration, but not
necessarily generated into the target system.
Mnemonics of supported devices are DB, DD, DK, DL, DM, DT, DR, DU, MM,
MS, and MT. Enter only the device mnemonic {such as DB), not the unit
number.
The crash device must not be a fixed-medium device. For example, if
you specify DU3: as the memory dump device and DU3: is an RA80 disk
{a fixed-medium device), your system will not be able to perform a
memory dump after crashing. The crash dump module will detect that
DU3: is a fixed medium device and print an error message.~
SYSGEN
cannot check to see if DU3: is a fixed-medium device; it is your
responsibility to ensure that the device you specify is not a
fixed-medium device.
If possible, avoid using your system device as the memory dump device.
3-28
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS (Cont.)
*
CE300
What is the physical unit number of the crash unit? [O R:0-7 D:O]:
Enter the physical unit number (NOT the logical unit
memory dump device.
The acceptable range is O through ?(octal).
*
CE310
Enter memory size (in K words)
number)
of
the
The default is O.
[D R:l28.-1920. D:256.]:
Enter the amount of memory for your processor
The legal range is from 128K through 1920K.
in
1024-word
blocks.
Your answer to this question need not be precise. VMR uses this value
when it creates the system image file, and does not allow you to
create a partition or load anything in memory beyond the value you
enter to this question. When the system is bootstrapped, the actual
memory size is calculated and overrides the value you enter here.
The default response is 256(decimal).
*
CE320
Do you want floating point processor support? [Y/N D:N]:
The PDP-11 floating-point processor performs all
floating-point
arithmetic operations and converts data from integer to floating-point
format and vice versa.
If you enter Yes, the Executive dynamically determines whether
the
processor has a floating-point unit when the system is bootstrapped.
If you enter No, the
processor.
Executive
will
not
support
a
floating-point
Enter Yes to include floating-point processor support.
*
CE330
Is your system clock programmable (KWll-P)? [Y/N D:N]:
RSX-llM-PLUS requires a real-time clock for operation.
Three clocks
are available:
the KWll-P programmable frequency clock, the KWll-L
line frequency clock, and the DLll-W line frequency clock/console.
Enter Yes if your system includes the KWll-P and you want to use this
clock as your system clock. You must then specify the number of clock
interrupts per second.
Enter No if your system does not include the KW-llP, or if your system
includes a KW-llP but you do not wish to use this clock as your system
clock.
If you enter No, you must specify your local line frequency.
3-29
RUNNING SYSGEN
EXECUTIVE OPTIONS (Cont.)
*
CE340
What is the number of interrupts per second? [D R:l.-1000.):
More than lOO(decimal) clock interrupts per second greatly increases
system overhead;
you should carefully consider the impact on your
system before specifying more than lOO(decimal) interrupts per second.
NOTE
The number of interrupts you select must
be
divisible
evenly
into
10,000 (decimal).
*
CE350
Is your line frequency 50 Hz? [Y/N D:N]:
You can specify a line frequency of either 50 Hz (enter Yes) or 60 Hz
(enter No or press RETURN).
In the United States, line frequency is
always 60 Hz.
3-30
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION
3.2.3
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
The questions in this section describe the peripheral devices that can
be included in your target configuration. The questions define unique
hardware and software information
that
RSX-llM-PLUS
uses
to
communicate with peripheral devices.
During this section, you enter device-dependent parameters that define
addressing
information
as well as special attributes for the
peripheral devices. Note that CON and VMR permit you to change vector
and CSR assignments.
This flexibility lessens the importance of
precise vector and CSR assignments. The number and type of devices in
the target configuration, however, remain critical.
If you do not know the correct CSR address for a particular device,
you can specify a CSR address of 160000(octal) for that device. CON
ignores devices with CSR addresses having this value; you can enter
the correct address after SYSGEN by using the VMR or MCR CON command.
Appendix B lists the device names, controller names, and corresponding
device and controller mnemonics for all RSX-llM-PLUS devices.
In the following questions, a particular controller is defined by
distinguished
from other controllers of the same type by
following:
•
Its CSR and vector address
•
The devices that are connected to it
and
the
SYSGEN uses a two-character controller mnemonic followed by a letter
to designate a particular controller. For example, "RHA" designates a
particular RH controller. The convention is that RHA is the first
controller, RHB is the second controller, and so on.
The first controller is the first that you describe to SYSGEN.
This
is not necessarily the first controller in the hardware configuration.
You can designate any controller as controller "A" as long as your use
is consistent.
In the questions in this chapter, often a number of devices with
similar characteristics are referred to using a shorthand notation.
For example, the term "RM02/03/05/80/RP07 disks" means "the RM02,
RM03, RMOS, RM80, and RPO? disks."
Your answers to questions in this section are put in the saved
file [200,200]SYSGENSA2.CMD.
The following is a description of all the possible
Choosing Peripheral Configuration sections.
*
CP0604
questions
answer
in
How many RH controllers do you have? [D R:0.-15. D:4.]:
The RH controller is the controller for the following device types:
DB
DR
DS
EM
MM
RP04/05/06 disks
RM02/03/05/80/RP07 disks
RS03/04 disks
MLll semiconductor disk emulator
TM02/03 and TU16/TE16/TU45/TU77 magnetic tapes
3-31
the
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Enter the number of RH controllers in the target configuration.
If you enter zero, the system cannot support DB-, DR-,
MM-type devices.
DS-,
EM-,
or
If you enter a number greater than zero, SYSGEN asks device-specific
questions for DB-, DR-, DS-, EM-, and MM-type devices. Note that in
these questions you must specify the physical connection between the
RH controllers and the devices. RSX-llM-PLUS uses the following names
to distinguish the RH controllers:
RHA
RHB
RHC
RHO
(first)
(second)
(third)
(fourth)
SYSGEN requests the interrupt vector and CSR assignments for each RH
controller after you have described the RH devices. This permits
SYSGEN to apply a default interrupt vector and CSR address for each
controller based on the attached devices.
For example, the default
interrupt vector for an RH controller servicing an RP04/05/06 disk
subsystem is 254.
The following is a list of the default interrupt
vector and CSR addresses.
Device Type
DB
DR
DS
EM
MM
Vector
CSR
254
254
204
none
224
176700
176700
172040
176400
172440
If you
specify
a
mixed
MASSBUS
configuration
during
the
device-specific
questions
(for example, you enter RHA as the
controller for both DB- and MM-type devices}, SYSGEN does not apply
defaults for the vector and CSR assignments.
*
CP0612
Do you want to generate a mixed MASSBUS configuration? [Y/N D:N]:
A mixed MASSBUS configuration has different device types on the same
RH controller (for example, both DB-type and DR-type devices on RHA).
If you choose to generate a mixed MASSBUS configuration, all the
MASSBUS device data bases will be resident.
Note that the device types differ in a mixed MASSBUS configuration.
If you have an RP04 disk and an RP06 disk connected to the same
controller, you do not have a mixed MASSBUS configuration, since the
RP04 and RP06 are both DB-type devices. See Appendix B for a list of
RSX-llM-PLUS device names and types.
*
CP0808
How many RP04/05/06 disk drives do you have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
Enter the total
configuration.
number
Each RH controller can
drives.
of
RP04/05/06
support
as
3-32
many
disk
as
drives
eight
in
the
RP04/05/06
target
disk
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP0820
Are any of the units dual-access? [Y/N D:N]:
to two controllers at one
the disk at the option of the
RP04/05/06 disk drives can be connected
time;
either controller can access
system software.
If your target configuration includes more than one RH controller, you
must specify whether any of the DB: devices are dual-access units.
*
CP0836
What is the physical unit number of DBn:? [O R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number (found
RP04/05/06 drive.
*
CP0840
on
the
unit
plug)
for
each
Is DBn: a dual-access unit? [Y/N D:N]:
This question appears only if you indicated that your target system
includes dual-access RP04/05/06 drives. Enter Yes to designate this
drive as a dual-access unit.
*
CP0844
To which RH controller is DBn: connected? [S R:l-1]:
RH controllers are named alphabetically: the first is RHA, the second
is RHB, the third is RHC, and the fourth is RHO. Enter the RH
controller name for each DB: device.
(Normally, all DB: devices are
on the same RH.)
If you designated DBn: as a dual-access drive, this question does not
appear and Question CP0848 appears instead.
*
CP0848
To which RH controller is port n of DBn: connected? [S R:l-1]:
Enter the RH controller name for each port of the DB:
*
CP0860
device.
Is DBn: an RP04, RPOS, or RP06? [S R:4-4 o:•RP06•]:
Enter the drive type for this drive.
Note that for SYSGEN purposes, there is no difference between an
and an RPOS drive.
*
*
CP1008
RP04
How many RM02/03/05/80/RP07 disk drives do you
have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
Enter the total number of RM02, RM03, RMOS, RM80, and RP07 disk drives
in the target configuration.
Each RH MASSBUS controller can support as many as eight drives.
3-33
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.}
*
CP1020
Are any of the units dual-access? [Y/N D:N]:
The RM02/03/05/80/RP07 disk drives can be connected to two controllers
at one time; either controller can access the disk at the option of
the system software.
If your target configuration includes more than one RH MASSBUS
controller, this question appears. Enter Yes if any of the units are
dual-access.
*
CP1036
What is the physical unit number cf DRn:? (0 R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number (found
RM02/03/05/80/RP07 drive.
*
CP1040
on
the
unit
plug)
for
each
Is DRn: a dual-access unit? [Y/N D:N]:
This question appears only if you indicated that your target system
includes dual-access RM02/03/05/80/RP07 disk drives. Enter Yes to
designate this drive as a dual-access unit.
*
CP1044
To which RH controller is DRn: connected? [S R:l-1):
RH controllers are named alphabetically: the first is RHA. the second
RHB, the third RHC, and the fourth RHD. Enter the RH controller name
for each DR: device.
(Normally, all DR: devices are on the same
RH.)
If you designated DRn: as a dual-access device,
not appear and Question CP1048 appears instead.
*
CP1048
this
question
does
To which RH controller is port n of DRn: connected? [S R:l-1):
If you designated DRn: as a dual-access drive, you must specify the
port connection of the device. Enter the controller connection for
each port of the device.
*
CP1060
Is DRn: an RM02, RM03, RMOS, RMSO, or RP07? [S R:4-4
o:•apo1•1:
Enter the drive type for this drive.
*
CP1208
How many RS03/04 disk drives do you have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
Enter the total
configuration.
number
of
RS03/04
disk
drives
in
the
target
Each RH controller can support as many as eight RS03/04 disk drives.
*
CP1236
What is the physical unit number of DSn:? [O R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number for each RS03/04 drive.
3-34
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP1244
To which RH controller is DSn: connected? [S R:l-1]:
RH controllers are named alphabetically: the first is RHA, the second
is RHB, the third RHC, and the fourth is RHD.
Enter the RH controller
name for each DS: device.
(Normally, all DS:
devices are on the
same RH.)
*
CP1260
Is DSn: an RS03 or RS04? [S R:4-4 o:•Rso4•1:
Enter the drive type for this drive.
*
CP1408
Bow many MLll disks do you have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
Enter the total number of MLll semiconductor disk
the target configuration.
*
CP1436
emulator
units
in
What is the physical unit number of EMn:? [O R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number for each MLll unit.
*
CP1444
To which RH controller is EMn: connected? [S R:l-1]:
RH controllers are named alphabetically: the first is RHA, the second
is RHB, the third is RHC, and the fourth is RHD. Enter the RH
controller name for each EM: device.
(Normally, all EM: devices are
on the same RH.)
*
*
CP1608
How many TU16/45/77/TE16 tape drives do
you have? [D R:O.-n. D:O.]:
Enter the total number of TU16/45/77/TE16 magnetic tape drives in
target configuration.
the
Each RH controller can support as many as 64(decimal) magnetic tape
drives (the drives interface to the controller through a TM02/03
formatter).
*
*
CP1612
How many TM02/03 magtape formatters do you
have? [D R:l.-n. D:n.]:
The TU16/45/77/TE16 magnetic tape subsystem interfaces to the RH
controller through a TM02/03 formatter.
Each formatter is connected
to the RH controller as one physical unit, and in turn can support as
many as eight drives (as many as four TU77 drives).
The response to this question specifies the number of TM02/03 magnetic
tape formatters.
3-35
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION {Cont.)
*
*
CP1636
What is the physical unit number of the next
formatter? [O R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number for each TM02/03 formatter.
The physical unit number of a formatter is not determined by the
easily visible white unit number plug (or other indicator) on the tape
drive. Instead, the physical unit number of a formatter must be
determined from the formatter itself.
The TM02/03 formatter is
usually located behind the lower front door of the first tape drive
connected to the formatter (the "master" drive). The physical unit
number of the formatter is indicated by the white unit number plug
inserted into it.
*
CP1644
To which RH controller is MMn: connected? [S R:l-1):
RH controller names increment alphabetically; the first is RHA, the
second is RHB, the third is RHC, and the fourth is RHO. Enter the RH
controller name for each formatter.
(Normally all TM02/03 formatters
are on the same RH.)
*
*
CP1652
Enter the
formatter.
*
CP1656
How many tape drives are attached to this
formatter? [D R:l.-n. D:n.]:
number
of
MM:
drives
physically
connected
to
this
What is the physical unit number of MMn:? [O R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number of this tape drive on its formatter.
This is the number that appears on the unit number plug or on the
thumbwheel switch located on the front of the tape drive.
If you have eight or fewer magnetic tape drives (four or fewer TU77
drives), for convenience you should make the physical unit numbers
match the logical unit numbers.
NOTE
Only four TU77 drives are allowed on a
formatter.
Therefore,
TU77
drives
cannot have
physical
unit
numbers
greater than 3. SYSGEN cannot tell if
you have TU77 drives and so does not
detect the error if you specify physical
unit numbers greater than 3 for TU77
drives.
Those tape drives will not be
usable in the resulting system.
*
CP2068
Enter the vector address of RHx [O R:60-774 D:n]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each RH controller.
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
3-36
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP2072
What is its CSR address?
(0
R:l60000-177700 D:n]:
Enter the CSR address for each RH controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
*
CP2204
Bow many RKll cartridge disk controllers do you have? (0 D:O]:
The RKll is the controller for the RK05 disk subsystem.
Each RKll
controller can serve as many as eight RK05 removable-cartridge drives
or four RK05F fixed-platter drives.
Enter the number of RKll disk controllers in the target configuration.
*
CP2208
Bow many RKOSF fixed platter drives do you have? (0 D:O]:
Enter the number of RK05F fixed-platter drives in the
target
configuration.
The RK05F uses a double-density, fixed-platter drive
and interfaces to the RKll such that it appears as two RKOS drives.
NOTE
Enter the actual number of RKOSF drives.
Do not multiply the number by two.
*
CP2216
How many RK05 removable cartridge drives do you have? (0 D:O]:
Enter the number of RK05
configuration.
*
CP2232
removable-cartridge
Is DKn: an RK05 or RKOSF? [S R:4-5
drives
in
the
target
o:•RKos•1:
This question appears only if your system includes both
(RKOSF) and removable-cartridge (RK05) drives.
fixed-platter
Enter the drive type for this drive.
*
CP2236
What is the physical unit number of DKn:? (0 R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number for each drive.
Note that the physical unit number for an RKOSF must be even (that is,
O, 2, 4, or 6).
*
CP2244
To which DK controller is DKn: connected? [S R:l-1]:
This question appears only if the target configuration includes two or
more RKll controllers.
Enter the controller name to which each unit is physically connected.
RKll controller names are of the form DKx, where x is a character from
the DIGITAL standard alphabet (the DIGITAL alphabet omits G, I, o, and
Q for clarity).
3-37
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP2268
Enter the vector address of DKx (0 R:60-774 D:220]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each RKll controller.
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first RKll (DKA) is 220 {octal) •
The default value
Subsequent RKll
address.
the
*
CP2272
controllers
do
not
default
interrupt
for
vector
What is its CSR address? (0 R:160000-177700 D:177404]:
Enter the CSR address for each RKll controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
value for the first· RKll (DKA) is 177404 (octal) •
The
default
NOTE
Unlike the control and status register
(CSR)
for most devices, the CSR for the
RK11/RK05 is not the first of the device
registers.
The CSR is the third device
register (offset 4 from the beginning of
the device registers).
Therefore, be
careful
when
specifying
the
CSR
addresses
for
these
devices.
For
example, if the first RKll controller is
listed at 177400, the CSR address is
177404.
If you enter the wrong CSR address, you
can correct it after SYSGEN by using the
VMR or MCR CON command.
Subsequent RKll controllers do not default
the
CSR
address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
*
CP2404
How many RK611/711 disk cartridge controllers do
you have? (0 D:O]:
The RK611/711 is the controller for the RK06/07 disk subsystem.
RK611/711 controller can serve as many as eight RK06/07 drives.
Enter the number
configuration.
*
CP2408
of
RK611/711
disk
controllers
in
the
Each
target
How many RK06/RK07 disk drives do you have? [D R:l.-63. D:l.]:
Enter the total
configuration.
number
of
RK06/07
3-38
disk
drives
in
the
target
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP2420
Are any of the units dual-access? [Y/N D:N]:
The RK06/07 disk drives can be connected to two RK611/711 controllers
at one time;
either controller can access the disk at the option of
the system software.
If your target
controller, you
dual- access.
*
CP2436
configuration
must specify
includes more than one
RK611/711
whether any of the RK06/07 units are
What is the physical unit number of DMn:? (0 R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number for each RK06/07 drive.
*
CP2440
Is DMn: a dual-access unit? [Y/N D:N]:
This question appears only if you indicated that your target system
included dual-access RK06/07 drives.
Enter Yes to designate this
drive as a dual-access unit.
*
CP2444
To which DM controller is DMn: connected? [S R:l-1):
This question appears only if the target configuration includes two or
more RK611/711 controllers.
Enter the controller name to which each unit is physically connected.
RK611/711 controller names are of the form DMx, where x is a character
from the DIGITAL standard alphabet (the DIGITAL alphabet omits G, I,
O , and Q fo r c 1 a r i t y) •
If you designated DMn: as a dual-access device,
not appear and Question CP2448 appears instead.
*
CP2448
CP2460
question
does
To which DM controller is port n of DMn: connected? [S R:l-1):
Enter the name of the controller to
connected.
*
this
which
each
port
is
physically
Is DMn: an RK06 or RK07? [S R:4-4 c:•RK07•]:
Enter the drive type for this drive.
*
CP2468
Enter the vector address of DMx (0 R:60-774 D:210]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each RK611/711 controller.
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first RK611/711 (OMA) is 210(octal).
The default value
for
Subsequent RK611/711 controllers do not default the interrupt vector
address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable
range.
3-39
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP2472
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:177440]:
Enter the CSR address for each RK611/711 controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
value for the first RK611/711 (OMA) is 177440(octal).
The
default
Subsequent RK611/711 controllers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
*
CP2604
How many RLll/RLVll disk cartridge controllers do
you have? (0 0:0):
The RLll/RLVll is the controller for the RL01/RL02 disk subsystem.
Each RLll/RLVll controller can serve as many as four RL01/RL02 drives.
Enter the number
configuration.
*
CP2608
CP2636
RLll/RLVll
disk
controllers
in
the
target
How many RL01/RL02 disk drives do you have? (0 R:l.-63. D:l.]:
Enter the total
configuration.
*
of
number
of
RL01/RL02
disk
drives
in
the
target
What is the physical unit number of OLn:? [O R:0-7 O:n]:
Enter the physical unit number for each RL01/RL02 drive.
*
CP2644
To which DL controller is OLn: connected? [S R:l-1):
This question appears only if the target configuration includes two or
more RLll/RLVll controllers.
Enter the controller name to which each unit is physically connected.
*
CP2660
Is DLn: an RLOl or RL02? [S R:4-4 o:•RL02•1:
Enter the drive type for this drive.
*
CP2668
Enter the vector address of OLx (0 R:60-774 0:160):
Enter the interrupt
controller.
vector
address
for
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first controller (DLA) is 160 (octal).
each
RLll/RLVll
The default value
disk
for
Subsequent RLll/RLVll disk controllers do not default the interrupt
vector address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the
acceptable range.
3-40
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION {Cont.)
*
CP2672
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 D:l74400]:
Enter the CSR address for each RLll/RLVll disk controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal). The default CSR
address for the first RLll/RLVll controller (DLA) is 174400(octal).
Subsequent RLll/RLVll disk controllers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
CP2804
How many RPll disk pack controllers do you have? (0 D:O]:
The RPll is the controller for the RP02/RPR02/RP03 disk subsystem.
Each RPll controller can serve as many as eight RP02/RPR02/RP03
drives.
Enter the number of RPll disk controllers in the target configuration.
*
*
CP2808
How many RP02/RPR02/RP03 disk drives do you
have? [D R:l.-63. D:l.]:
Enter the total number of RP02/RPR02/RP03 disk drives
configuration.
*
CP2836
in
the
target
What is the physical unit number of DPn:? [O R:0-7 D:n]:
Enter the physical unit number for each RP02/RPR02/RP03 drive.
*
CP2844
To which DP controller is DPn: connected? [S R:l-1]:
This question appears only if the target configuration includes two or
more RPll controllers.
Enter the controller name to which each unit is physically connected.
RPll controller names are of the form DPx, where x is a character from
the DIGITAL standard alphabet (the DIGITAL alphabet omits G, I, o, and
Q for clarity) •
*
CP2860
Is DPn: an RP02, RPR02, or RP03? [S R:4-5 o:•RPOJ•]:
Enter the drive type for this drive.
Note that for SYSGEN purposes, there is no difference between an
and RPR02 drive.
*
CP2868
RP02
Enter the vector address of DPx [O R:60-774 D:254]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each RPll controller.
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first RPll (DPA) is 254 (octal).
3-41
The default value
for
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION {Cont.)
Note that subsequent RPll controllers do
vector address;
therefore, you must
acceptable range.
*
CP2872
not default the interrupt
enter a value within the
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:176714]:
Enter the CSR address for each RPll controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
value for the first RPll (DPA) is 176714 (octal).
The
default
Note that subsequent RPll controllers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
CP3004
How many MSCP disk controllers do you have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
Enter the number of Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP)
disk
controllers in your target configuration. The UDA50 and RQDXl are
MSCP controllers; all of the devices listed in Question CP3008 use an
MSCP controller.
*
CP3008
How many MSCP disk drives do you have? [D R:l.-n. D:l.]:
Enter the total
configuration.
number
of
MSCP
disk
drives
in
your
target
The following are MSCP disk drives:
RX50
RD51
RC25
RA60
RASO
RA81
The RXSO contains two 5.25-inch floppy diskette drives, each with a
formatted capacity of 400(octal)
kilobytes.
You should count each
RX50 unit (with two diskette drives) as two drives.
The RD51 is a 5.25-inch fixed-medium, Winchester technology disk, with
a formatted capacity of 10 megabytes.
The RC25 contains both a fixed and a removable disk;
both disks mount
on the same drive spindle. Each disk has a formatted capacity of 25
megabytes. You should count each RC25 unit (with two disks:
one
fixed, one removable) as two drives.
The RA60 is a removable-medium disk drive, with a
of 205 megabytes.
formatted
capacity
The RASO is a
fixed-medium, Winchester
formatted capacity of 121 megabytes.
technology
disk,
with
a
The RA81 is a fixed-medium, Winchester
formatted capacity of 456 megabytes.
technology
disk,
with
a
3-42
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP3044
To which DU controller is DUn: connected? [S R:l-1]:
This question appears only if the target configuration includes two or
more MSCP controllers.
Enter the controller name to which each unit is physically connected.
*
CP3068
Enter the vector address of DUx (0 R:60-774 D:l54]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each MSCP controller.
The acceptable range is 60(octal)
through 774(octal).
The default
value for the first MSCP controller (DUA) is 154(octal). Subsequent
MSCP controllers do not default the interrupt vector address.
*
CP3072
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 D:l72150]:
Enter the CSR address for each MSCP controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 (octal)
through 177700 (octal}.
The
default value for
the first MSCP controller (DUA} is 172150(octal).
Subsequent MSCP controllers do not default the CSR address.
*
CP3076
Enter the nwnber of command rings for DUx [D R:l.-8. D:4.]:
The only valid responses are 1, 2, 4, or 8.
Your response to this question affects the disk's throughput
size of the driver.
The number of command rings determines how many
can queue to the controller at one time.
The number of command rings also affects the size
follows:
Number of
Rings
1
2
4
8
commands
of
and
the
the
the
driver
driver
as
Additional
Bytes
70 (decimal)
138 (decimal)
274(decimal)
546 (decimal)
Four command rings are reasonable and adequate for most applications.
The default value for the number of command rings is 4.
*
CP3080
Enter the nwnber of response rings for DUx [D R:l.-8. D:4.]:
The only valid responses are 1, 2, 4, or 8.
Your response to this question affects the disk's throughput
size of the driver.
3-43
and
the
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
The number of response rings determines how
controller can queue to the driver at one time.
many
The number of response rings also affects the size of
follows:,
Number of
Rings
responses
the
driver
the
as
Additional
Bytes
70 (dee imal)
138 (decimal)
274 (decimal)
546 (dee imal)
1
2
4
8
Four response rings are reasonable and adequate for most applications.
The default value for the number of response rings is 4.
*
CP4004
How many CM/CRll card readers do you have? [O D:O]:
Enter the number of CM/CRll card readers in the target configuration.
(The card reader controllers do not support multiple units per
controller.)
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the time-out
interval, the interrupt vector address, and the CSR address for each
controller.
*
*
CP4008
Enter the number of seconds between
card reader-not-ready messages [D R:0.-255. 0:15.]:
Enter the number of seconds you want the system to wait between card
reader-not-ready messages.
(TKTN prints the messages at the console
terminal.)
The acceptable range is 0 through 255(decimal). The default
prints card reader-not-ready messages every 15 seconds.
response
To suppress the messages, enter zero.
*
CP4068
Enter vector address of the next CM/CRll [O R:60-774 D:230]:
Enter the interrupt
controller.
vector
address
for
each
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first controller is 230 (octal).
CM/CRll
card
reader
The default value
for
Subsequent CM/CRll controllers do not default the interrupt vector
address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable
range.
3-44
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP4072
What is its CSR address? [O R:160000-177700 0:177160]:
Enter the CSR address for each CM/CRll card reader controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
value for the first controller is 177160 (octal).
The
default
Subsequent CM/CRll controllers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
CP4204
Bow many TAll dual cassettes do you have? [O 0:0]:
Enter the number of TAll dual-drive magnetic tape cassette systems
the target configuration.
in
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address and the CSR address for each controller.
*
CP4268
Enter vector address of the next TAll [O R:60-774 0:260]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each TAll cassette system.
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first TAll system is 260(octal).
Subsequent TAll cassette controllers do
vector address;
therefore, you must
acceptable range.
*
CP4272
The default value
for
not default the interrupt
enter a value within the
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:177500]:
Enter the CSR address for each TAll cassette system.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
value for the first system is 177500(octal).
The
default
Subsequent TAll cassette controllers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
CP4404
How many TS11/TU80/TSV05 magtape controllers do you have? [O D:O]:
Enter the number of TSll/TU80/TSV05 magnetic tape controllers
target configuration.
in
the
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address and the CSR address for each controller.
*
*
CP4468
Enter vector address of the next
TS11/TU80/TSVOS [O R:60-774 0:224]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each
tape controller.
TS11/TU80/TSV05
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first controller is 224 (octal).
3-45
magnetic
The default value
for
RONNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION {Cont.)
Subsequent TS11/TU80/TSVOS controllers do not default the interrupt
vector address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the
acceptable range.
*
CP4472
What is its CSR address? [O R:160000-177700 0:172522):
Enter the CSR
controller.
address
for
each
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
address for the first controller is 172522(octal).
Subsequent TS11/TU80/TSV05 magnetic tape controllers
the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a
acceptable range.
*
CP4604
tape
magnetic
TS11/TU80/TSV05
The default CSR
do not default
value within the
How many TCll DECtape controllers do you have? [O D:O]:
The TCll is the controller for the TU56 DECtape subsystem. Each TCll
controller can serve a maximum of four dual-transport DECtape drives.
Enter the number
configuration.
of
TCll
DECtape
controllers
in
the
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address, the CSR address, and the number of TU56 drives for
each controller.
*
CP4668
Enter vector address of the next TCll [O R:60-774 0:214):
Enter the interrupt vector address for each TCll DECtape controller.
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first controller is 214 (octal).
Subsequent TCll DECtape controllers do
vector address;
therefore, you must
acceptable range.
*
CP4672
The default value
for
not default the interrupt
enter a value within the
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:177342):
Enter the CSR address for each TCll DECtape controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal). The default CSR
address for the first TCll controller is 177342(octal).
Subsequent TCll DECtape controllers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
3-46
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP4676
Bow many drives does DTx have? [D R:l.-8. D:2.]:
Each TCll DECtape controller supports as many as four
TU56 drives.
dual
transport
Enter the number of TU56 drives on the controller.
The acceptable range is 1 through 8.
*
CP4804
How many RXll disk controllers do you have? (0 D:O]:
The RXll is the controller for the RXOl floppy disk system.
Each RXll
controller can serve as many as two RXOl floppy disk drives.
Enter the number
configuration.
of
RXll
floppy
disk
controllers
in
the
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address, the CSR address, and the number of RXOl drives for
each controller.
*
CP4868
Enter vector address of the next RXll (0 R:60-774 D:264]:
Enter the interrupt
controller.
vector
address
for
each
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first RXll controller is 264(octal).
RXll
floppy
disk
The default value
for
Subsequent RXll floppy disk controllers do not default the interrupt
vector address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the
acceptable range.
*
CP4872
What is its CSR address? (0 R:l60000-177700 0:177170]:
Enter the CSR address for each RXll floppy disk controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal). The default CSR
address for the first RXll controller is 177170(octal).
Subsequent RXll floppy disk controllers do not default the CSR
address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable
range.
*
CP4876
How many drives does DXx have? [D R:l.-2. D:2.]:
Each RXll floppy disk controller supports as many as two
disk drives.
Enter the number of RXOl drives on the controller.
The acceptable range is 1 through 2.
3-47
RXOl
floppy
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP5004
How many RX211 disk controllers do you have? (0 D:O]:
The RX211 is the controller for the dual-density (single or double
density)
RX02 floppy disk system.
Each RX211 controller can serve as
many as two RX02 floppy disk drives.
Enter the number of
configuration.
RX211
floppy
disk
controllers
in
the
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address, the CSR address, and the number of RX02 drives for
each controller.
*
CP5068
Enter vector address of the next RX211 [O R:60-774 D:264]:
Enter the interrupt
controller.
vector
address
for
each
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first RX211 controller is 264(octal).
RX211
floppy
disk
The default value
for
Subsequent RX211 floppy disk controllers do not default the interrupt
vector address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the
acceptable range.
*
CPS072
What is its CSR address? (0 R:l60000-177700 D:l77170]:
Enter the CSR address for each RX211 floppy disk controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal). The default CSR
address for the first RX211 controller is 177170(octal).
Subsequent RX211 floppy disk controllers do not default the CSR
address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable
range.
*
CPS076
How many drives does DYx have? [D R:l.-2. D:2.]:
Each RX211 floppy disk controller supports as many as two RX02
disk drives.
floppy
Enter the number of RX02 drives on the controller.
The acceptable range is 1 through 2.
*
CPS204
How many TU58 controllers do you have? (0 D:O]:
The TU58 is the controller for the DECtape II subsystem.
controller can serve as many as two DECtape II drives.
Enter the number
configuration.
of
TU58
DECtape
II
controllers
in
Each
the
TU58
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address, the CSR address, and the number of DECtape II drives
for each TU58 controller.
3-48
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP5268
Enter vector address of next TU58 (0 R:60-774 D:300]:
Enter the
interrupt
controller.
vector
address
for
each
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first controller is 300(octal).
TU58
DECtape
II
The default value
for
Subsequent TU58 DECtape II controllers do not default the interrupt
vector address;
therefore,
you must enter a value within the
acceptable range.
*
CP5272
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:176500):
Enter the CSR address for each TU58 DECtape II controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal). The default CSR
address for the first TU58 controller is 176500(octal).
Subsequent TU58 DECtape II controllers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
CP5276
How many drives does DDx have? [D R:l.-2. D:2.]:
Each TU58 DECtape II controller can support as many as two DECtape
drives.
II
Enter the number of DECtape II drives on the controller.
The acceptable range is 1 through 2.
*
CP5404
How many LP/LS/LV11/LA180 line printers do you have? (0 D:O]:
Enter the number
configuration.
of
line
printer
controllers
in
the
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the timeout
interval
(for printer-not-ready messages),
the
interrupt vector
address, the CSR address, and the line printer type.
*
*
CP5408
Enter the number of seconds between
line printer-not-ready messages [D R:0.-255. D:l5.]:
Enter the number of seconds you want the system to wait between line
printer-not-ready messages.
(TKTN prints the messages at the console
terminal.)
The acceptable range is 0 through 255(decimal).
The default
prints line printer-not-ready messages every 15 seconds.
To suppress the messages, enter zero.
3-49
response
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
*
CP5468
Enter vector address of the next line
printer (0 R:60-774 D:200]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each line printer controller.
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first controller is 200 (octal).
Subsequent line printer controllers do
vector address;
therefore, you must
acceptable range.
*
CP5472
The default value
for
not default the interrupt
enter a value within the
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:177514]:
Enter the CSR address for each line printer controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
value for the first controller is 177514(octal).
The
default
Subsequent line printer controllers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
CP5480
Enter line printer type for LPx [S R:4-5 o:•LP2S•]:
The following is a table of the valid line
characteristics:
Printer
Type
Controller
No. of
Columns
LA180
LNOl
LPOl
LP02
LP04
LP05
LP06
LP07
LP14
LP25
LP26
LP27
LSll
LVOl
LA180
LNOl
LPll-F/H
LPll-J/K
LPll-R/S
LPll-V/W
LPll-Y/Z
LPll-G
LPll-C/D
LPll-A/B
LPll-E
LPll-U
LSll
LVll
132
132
80
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
printer
Lines per
Minute
types
and
their
Supports
Optimization
no
n/a
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
150
600
170-1110
170-1110
1110
300
460-600
1200
660-900
215-300
445-600
800-1200
60-200
500
The printer type is used to set two characteristics in the UCB:
•
Column or buff er width
You can set this characteristic in VMR or
/BUF command.
•
MCR
with
the
SET
Fast line printer support
This is an optimization performed by the driver to eliminate
unnecessary print cycles. You cannot set this characteristic
in VMR or MCR. This optimization does not apply to the LNOl
printer.
3-50
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
If you specify the wrong printer type and the driver performs
the optimization for a printer that does not support the
optimization, you may occasionally lose a line of a listing
when the printer is taken off line.
If you specify the wrong printer type and the driver does not
perform the optimization for a printer that supports the
optimization, the printer will run a little slower than it
would with the optimization, but there will be no other
adverse effects.
If you do not know the correct printer type for your printer, take the
default. This will give you a 132-column printer without fast printer
optimization. Once your system is running, you can change the number
of columns if necessary with the MCR SET command.
*
CP5484
Does LPx have lowercase characters? [Y/N D:N]:
If this line printer has both uppercase and lowercase characters,
answer Yes to this question.
If it only has uppercase characters,
answer No.
Your answer determines the initial setting for lowercase
character conversion on this printer. You can change this at any time
by using the MCR SET /LOWER command.
*
CP5604
How many TM/TMA/TMBll magtape controllers do you have? [O D:O]:
The TMll is the controller for the TUlO, TUlOW, TElO, and
drives. Each TMll can serve as many as eight tape drives.
Enter the number of TMll
configuration.
magnetic
tape
controllers
in
TS03
the
tape
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address, the CSR address, and the number of tape drives for
each controller.
*
*
CP5668
Enter vector address of the next
TM/TMA/TMBll [O R:60-774 D:224]:
Enter the interrupt
controller.
vector
address
for
each
The acceptable range is 60 through 774(octal).
the first controller is 224(octal).
Subsequent TMll controllers do
address;
therefore, you must
range.
TMll
magnetic
The default value
tape
for
not default the interrupt vector
enter a value within the acceptable
3-51
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP5672
What is its CSR address?
(0
R:l60000-177700 D:l72522]:
Enter the CSR address for each TMll controller.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
address for the first TMll is 172522(octal).
The default CSR
Subsequent TMll controllers do not default
the
CSR
address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
CP5676
How many drives does MTx have? [D R:l.-8. D:l.]:
Each TMll controller can support as many as eight TUlO,
or TS03 magnetic tape drives.
TUlOW,
TElO,
Enter the num6er of magnetic tape drives on the controller.
The acceptable range is 1 through 8.
*
CP5804
How many PCll paper tape reader/punches do you have? (0 D:O]:
Enter the number of PCll
conf ig ur ation.
paper
tape
reader/punches
in
the
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector
address and the CSR address for each PCll paper tape
controller.
In your generated system, a PCll paper tape reader/punch will be
treated as two separate devices, a paper tape punch (PP) and a paper
tape reader (PR). For example, if you have one PCll and one PRll
paper tape reader, your resulting system will have one PP device in it
and two PR devices. The one PP and the first PR represent the PCll
paper tape reader/punch. The second PR represents the PRll reader.
*
CP5868
Enter vector address of the next PCll [O R:60-774 D:70]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each PCll controller.
The acceptable
70(octal).
range
is
60
through
CP5872
The
default
is
not default the interrupt vector
enter a value within the acceptable
Subsequent PCll controllers do
address;
therefore, you must
range.
*
774 (octal) •
What is its CSR address?
(0
R:l60000-177700 D:l77550]:
Enter the CSR address for each PCll paper tape reader/punch.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
address for the first PCll is 177550(octal).
Subsequent PCll paper tape
address;
therefore, you
range.
The default CSR
reader/punches do not default the CSR
must enter a value within the acceptable
3-52
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP6004
Bow many PRll paper tape readers do you have? [O D:O]:
Enter the number of PRll paper tape readers
in
the
target
configuration.
Do not include any PCll paper tape reader/punches you
may have in this number.
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address and the CSR address for each paper tape reader.
*
CP6068
Enter vector address of the next PRll [O R:60-774 D:70]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each paper tape reader.
The acceptable
70 (octal) •
range
is
60
through
Subsequent paper tape readers do
address;
therefore, you must
range.
*
CP6072
774(octal).
The
default
is
not default the interrupt vector
enter a value within the acceptable
What is its CSR address? (0 R:l60000-177700 D:l77550]:
Enter the CSR address for each paper tape reader.
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
address is 177550(octal).
The default CSR
Subsequent paper tape readers do not default the CSR address;
therefore, you must enter a value within the acceptable range.
*
CP6204
How many LPAll lab subsystems do you have? [D R:0.-16. D:O.]:
Enter the number
configuration.
of
LPAll-K
laboratory
subsystems
in
the
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address and the CSR address for each LPAll-K.
*
CP6268
Enter vector address of the next LPAll [O R:300-774]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each LPAll-K subsystem.
The vector address is assigned from floating vector
DIGITAL Field Service if the location is unknown.
The acceptable range is 300 through 774(octal).
*
CP6272
space;
consult
There is no default.
What is its CSR address? (0 R:l60000-177700 D:l70460]:
Enter the CSR address for the LPAll-K subsystem.
The required CSR address is that of the first word of the LPAll-K
group. Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the location is unknown.
3-53
CSR
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
The acceptable range is 160000 through 177700(octal).
170460.
The default
is
There is no default CSR for a subsequent LPAll-K.
* CP6280 What is the maximum number of UMRs to be saved? [D R:0.-24. D:S.]:
The LPAll-K driver can handle up to 8 concurrent NPR transfers, each
of which must be mapped through UNIBUS Mapping Registers (UMRs).
Enter the maximum number of UMRs that the driver may access at any
instant to map all requests that may be active.
*
CP6404
How many IPll industrial control subsystems do you have? [O D:O]:
Enter the number of IPll industrial
target configuration.
control
I/O
subsystems
in
the
Consult the IPll documentation for details on the IPll I/O subsystem.
*
CP6408
Treat all controllers as one unit? [Y/N D:N]:
If you respond Yes, SYSGEN generates one Status Control Block
(SCB)
and one Unit Control Block (UCB) to cover all IPll controllers. This
creates the appearance of a single, large IPll controller with all of
the I/0 modules connected to it. This option results in a loss of
system efficiency and also decreases the total number of
A/D
converters to 16(decimal).
If you respond No, SYSGEN generates one SCB and one UCB for each IPll
controller.
Each controller must then be referenced with a different
LUN.
If you enter No, each controller can support 16(decimal) A/D
converters, but the programmer must know which controller a particular
I/O module is on, as well as the module index.
For example, consider a PDP-11 that has two IPll controllers.
Controller 0 has one M6011 digital output module (16 points) and eight
A014 A/D converter modules.
Controller 1 has two M6011 modules
(32
points), one M5010 digital input module (32 points), and three A014
modules.
If all controllers are treated as one unit (if you answered
Yes to Question CP6408), the driver causes the system to respond as if
there were only one controller with 48 digital output points (M6011),
32 digital input points (M5010), and 11 A/D converter modules (A014).
*
CP6430
Any latching digital output modules? [Y/N D:N]:
Because the IPll device driver determines the system configuration at
bootstrap or power-up time, it is not necessary to specify how many of
each type of module are present. You are asked whether you have
(or
will ever have)
each module type so that the code to support unused
modules will not be assembled.
*
CP6432
Any single-shot output modules? [Y/N D:N]:
See the description for Question CP6430.
3-54
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP6434
Direct output via QIO? [Y/N D:N]:
This option allows a task to output to digital or single-shot output
modules without overmapping the I/O page. The option simplifies task
code but increases overhead.
Note that direct output via QIO support is not required for Fortran
support to work. However, if present, direct output with QIO support
will not interfere with Fortran support.
This question appears only if you include a
module or a single-shot output module.
*
CP6436
latching
digital
output
Any non-interrupting digital sense modules? [Y/N D:N]:
See the description for Question CP6430.
*
CP6438
Any interrupting digital sense modules? [Y/N D:N]:
See the description for Question CP6430.
*
CP6440
Any change-of-state modules? [Y/N D:N]:
See the description for Question CP6430.
*
CP6442
Any counter modules? [Y/N D:N]:
See the description for Question CP6430.
*
CP6444
Direct input via QIO? [Y/N D:N]:
This option allows a task to perform digital
input with a QIO
directive rather than by overmapping the I/O page.
The option
simplifies task code but increases overhead.
Note that direct input via QIO support is not required for Fortran
support to work.
However, if present, direct input via QIO support
will not interfere with Fortran support.
This question appears only if you responded Yes to one or more of
previous "module" questions.
*
CP6446
the
Unsolicited interrupt support? [Y/N D:N]:
produce
The M5011, M5012, and M5013 interrupting modules
can
unsolicited interrupts when certain input bits change state. If you
select this option, a task can monitor the interrupts.
This question appears only if you included any
sense modules or any change-of-state modules.
3-55
interrupting
digital
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP6448
A task
event
driver
causes
*
Event flag linkage to interrupts? [Y/N D:N]:
can monitor digital interrupts by linking a contiguous group of
flags to interrupting bits.
If you select this option, the
sets the corresponding event flag whenever its associated bit
an interrupt.
CP6450
Any D/A converters? [Y/N D:N]:
See the description for Question CP6430.
*
CP6452
Any A014 A/D converters? [Y/N D:N]:
See the description for Question CP6430.
*
CP6454
Any A020 A/D converters? [Y/N D:N]:
See the description for Question CP6430.
*
*
CP6456
How many output bytes should be saved on
powerfail? [D R:0.-3048. D:O.]:
The answer to this query reserves table space in the IPll driver.
the answer to the query is n, 3*n bytes are reserved.
If
At powerfail time, if there is not enough space in the table to save
all outputs, the excess outputs will be lost and will not be restored.
This question appears only if the system includes one or more output
modules, which include the M6010, M6012, and M6013 latching digital
output modules, the M6011 single-shot output module, and the A630 D/A
converter module.
The acceptable range is 0 through 3048(decimal).
Enter O (or press RETURN) to disable output restoration.
*
CP6468
Enter the vector for IPll controller n [O R:60-774 D:234]:
Enter the interrupt vector address for each IPll controller.
The
standard vector address, and the default value, is 234(octal). If you
do not use the default assignment, the acceptable range is 60 through
77 4 (octal) •
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the IPll vector address is unknown.
Subsequent IPll controllers are assigned vector addresses
from
floating vector space and there is no default. Enter a value within
the acceptable range.
3-56
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP6472
Enter the base address [O R:l60000-177400 0:171000]:
The acceptable range for the
177400 (octal).
IPll
base
address
is
160000
through
Note that this question requests the IPll base address and not the CSR
address. The base address is the CSR address minus 377(octal).
Each IPll controller occupies 400{octal) bytes in the I/O page.
The
base address is the beginning of that 400-byte block. The base
address must be on a 400-byte address boundary {for example, 171000,
174000, and so on).
The base address is not the same as the CSR
address. The CSR address is offset 377{octal) from the base address.
For the first IPll controller, the
171000(octal);
for the second IPll
address is 171400 {octal).
default
base
address
is
controller, the default base
The third and subsequent IPll controllers are assigned base addresses
from floating address space and do not have default responses.
Enter
a value within the acceptable range.
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the IPll base address is unknown.
*
CP6804
Enter number of additional DLll/DLVll line interfaces (0 D:O]:
An RSX-llM-PLUS system requires a DLll/DLVll line interface for
operation.
SYSGEN automatically generates the data base for the
required DLll/DLVll.
Enter the number of additional DLll/DLVll line interfaces in the
target configuration.
Enter only the number of DLll/DLVll line
interfaces used as terminal interfaces. Do not include any DLll/DVLll
interfaces used as controllers for TU58 DECtape II drives.
If your system includes an additional DLll/DLVll, you must specify the
type of terminal and whether the line requires modem support as well
as the interrupt vector and CSR addresses.
*
CP6820
Do any of the DLll/DLVll lines require modem support? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes if any of the DLll/DLVll
lines.
*
CP6832
lines
will
be
used
as
dial-up
Enter terminal type for YLX [S R:4-6 o:•LA120•]:
Your answer to this question establishes
the YL controller. You can change the
time without performing a new SYSGEN, so
answer for this question if you do not
or will be connected. See Chapter 4 for
default terminal types.
3-57
the default terminal type for
default terminal types at any
you should choose the default
know which terminal types are
more information on changing
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
RSX-llM-PLUS SYSGEN supports the following types of terminals:
ASR33
ASR35
KSR33
*
CP6868
LA12
LA30P
LA30S
LA34
LA36
LA38
LASO
LAlOO
LA120
LA180S
VT05B
VT50
VT52
VT55
VT61
VTlOO
VT101
VT102
VT105
VT125
VT131
VT132
Enter vector address of YLx [O R:300-770]:
The standard interrupt vector address for the first DLll/DLVll line
(YLA, the required line) is 60(octal). Interrupt vector addresses for
additional DLll/DLVll lines are assigned from the floating vector
space starting at 300(octal). There are no default vector addresses
for any additional DLll/DLVll lines.
You must enter a value within the range 300 through 770(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the interrupt vector addresses of
additional lines are unknown.
*
CP6872
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700]:
The standard CSR address for the first DLll/DLVll line (YLA, the
required
line)
is 177560(octal).
CSR addresses for additional
DLll/DLVll lines are assigned from floating address space starting at
176000(octal).
There are no default CSR addresses for any additional
DLll/DLVll lines. You must enter a value within the range 176000
through 176770(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the CSR
addresses of additional lines are unknown.
*
*
CP7004
Enter number of DHll/DHVll asynchronous line
multiplexers [D R:O.-n. D:O.]:
Enter the number of DHll/DHVll asynchronous line multiplexers in the
target configuration.
If your target processor is a MICRO/PDP-11 or
PDP-11/23-PLUS, SYSGEN assumes that you have DHVll multiplexers.
In
all other cases, SYSGEN assumes that you have DHll multiplexers.
*
CP7020
Enter total number of DHll/DHVll dial-up lines [D R:O.-n. D:O.]:
One DHll with a DMll-BB interface can serve as many as 16(decimal)
remote lines that occupy consecutive line locations. One DHVll can
serve as many as 8 remote lines. The DHVll does not require a DMll-BB
interface.
3-58
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION {Cont.)
Enter the total number of dial-up lines. For the DHll, the acceptable
range is O through 16(decimal) times the number of DHll multiplexers
specified in your response to Question CP7004.
For the DHVll, the
acceptable range is O through 8(decimal) times the number of DHVll
multiplexers specified in your response to Question CP7004.
If you specify remote lines, you must
rate.
*
CP7028
enter
the
answer
speed
baud
At which baud rate do you want to answer? [S R:2-5 D:•Joo•]:
If your DHll/DHVll has remote lines, you must enter the default answer
speed for the remote lines.
The answer speed can be changed for
individual lines with the MCR or VMR SET /SPEED command.
Acceptable answer speed baud rates for the DHll are 50, 75, 110,
134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, or 9600. The
default answer speed is 300. In addition, there are two external
clock baud rates, EXTA and EXTB, that allow nonstandard baud rates.
You must connect your DHll to an external clock to use these. See the
DHll hardware documentation for more information.
Acceptable answer speed baud rates for the DHVll are 75, 110, 134.5,
150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200. The
default answer speed is 300.
*
CP7040
Enter total number of DHll/DHVll local lines [D R:n.-n. D:n.]:
locations
and
DHll/DHVll
Local lines occupy consecutive line
multiplexers.
Their assignment follows the assignment of any remote
lines specified.
The DHll can serve as many as 16 lines per controller.
serve as many as 8 lines per controller.
*
CP7068
Enter a vector address in the range
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if
unknown.
CP7072
can
Enter vector address of YHx (0 R:300-770]:
The interrupt vector address for the DHll/DHVll is
floating vector space starting at location 300(octal).
no default vector assignment for the DHll/DHVll.
*
The DHVll
assigned from
Thus, there is
300 (octal)
through 770 (octal).
the interrupt vector address is
What is its CSR address? [O R:160000-177700]:
The CSR address for the DHll/DHVll is assigned from floating address
space starting at 160010(octal).
Thus, there is no default CSR
assignment for the DHll/DHVll.
Enter a CSR address in the range 160010(octal) through 177700(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the CSR address is unknown.
3-59
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
*
CP7076
Enter vector address of the DMll-BB associated
with YBx [O R:300-774]:
If you have a DHll and you responded to Question CP7020 ("total number
of dial-up lines") with a number greater than zero, a DMll-BB is
required. One DMll-BB can service as many as 16(decimal) dial-up
lines.
The DMll-BB interrupt vector address is assigned from floating vector
space starting at 300(octal).
Thus, you must enter a value in the
range 300(octal) through 774(octal) to include DMll-BB modem support.
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the interrupt vector address is
unknown.
*
CP7080
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:170500]:
The standard CSR address for the DMll-BB is 170500(octal).
If you
include DMll-BB support, enter 170500(octal) or a value in the range
160000 through 177700(octal) for the CSR assignment.
*
CP7084
Enter terminal type for YHx [S R:4-6 o:•VTlOO•]:
Your answer to this question establishes
the YH controller. You can change the
time without performing a new SYSGEN, so
answer for this question if you do not
or will be connected. See Chapter 4 for
default terminal types.
the default terminal type for
default terminal types at any
you should choose the default
know which terminal types are
more information on changing
RSX-llM-PLUS SYSGEN supports the following types of terminals:
ASR33
ASR35
KSR33
*
*
CP7204
LA12
LA30P
LA30S
LA34
LA36
LA38
LASO
LAlOO
LA120
LA180S
VTOSB
VT50
VT52
VT55
VT61
VTlOO
VT101
VT102
VT105
VT125
VT131
VT132
Enter number of DJll asynchronous line
multiplexers [D R:O.-n. D:O.]:
Enter the number of DJll asynchronous line multiplexers in the
conf ig ur ation.
target
If you enter a value greater than zero, you must specify the interrupt
vector address, the CSR address, and the number of lines for each
DJll.
3-60
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP7268
Enter vector address of YJx [O R:300-770]:
The interrupt vector address for the DJll is assigned from floating
vector space starting at 300(octal). Thus, there is no default vector
assignment for the DJll.
Enter a vector address in the range 300 through 770{octal).
DIGITAL Field Service if the vector address is unknown.
*
CP7272
Consult
What is its CSR address? [O R:160000-177700]:
The CSR address for the DJll is assigned from floating address space
starting at 160010{octal). Thus, there is no default CSR assignment
for the DJll.
Enter a CSR address in the range 160010 through 177700 {octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the CSR address is unknown.
*
CP7280
How many lines does YJx have? [D R:l.-n. D:16.]:
Each DJll can serve as many as 16{decimal) asynchronous serial
Enter the total number of lines. The default is 16.
*
CP7284
lines.
Enter terminal type for YJx [S R:4-6 D:•VTlOO•]:
Your answer to this question establishes
the YJ controller. You can change the
time without performing a new SYSGEN, so
answer for this question if you do not
or will be connected. See Chapter 4 for
default terminal types.
the default terminal type for
default terminal types at any
you should choose the default
know which terminal types are
more information on changing
RSX-llM-PLUS SYSGEN supports the following types of terminals:
ASR33
ASR35
KSR33
*
*
CP7404
LA12
LA30P
LA30S
LA34
LA36
LA38
LASO
LAlOO
LA120
LA180S
VTOSB
VT50
VT52
VT55
VT61
VTlOO
VTlOl
VT102
VT105
VT125
VT131
VT132
Enter number of DZll/DZVll asynchronous line
multiplexers [D R:O.-n. D:O.]:
Enter the number of DZll/DZVll asynchronous line multiplexers
target configuration.
3-61
in
the
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP7420
Do any of the DZll/DZVll lines require modem support?
[Y/N D:N]:
The DZll/DZVll can maintain a full-duplex connection through a
full-duplex modem
(for example, a Bell 103A-type modem). However,
modem support requires additional code in the terminal data base as
well as in the driver and thus increases system overhead;
select
modem support only if needed.
If you wish to include modem support,
you must specify the answer speed baud rate.
Note that if you include modem support, you can dynamically set the
DZll/DZVll line type (local or remote)
by using the /[NO]REMOTE
keyword of the MCR SET command (see the RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations
Manual) •
*
CP7428
At which baud rate do you want to answer? [S R:2-5 0:•300•1:
Enter the default answer speed for the remote lines.
The answer speed
can be changed for individual lines with the MCR or VMR SET /SPEED
command. Acceptable answer speed baud rates are 50, 75, 110, 134.5,
150, 300, 600,
1200, 1800, 2000, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, and 9600.
The default is 300.
*
CP7468
Enter vector address of YZx [O R:300-770]:
The interrupt vector address for the DZll/DZVll is assigned from
floating vector space starting at 300(octal).
Thus, there is no
default vector assignment for the DZll/DZVll.
Enter a vector address
in the range 300(octal)
through 770(octal). Consult DIGITAL Field
Service if the vector address is unknown.
*
CP7472
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700]:
The CSR address for the DZll/DZVll is assigned from floating address
space starting at 160010 (octal) •
Thus, there is no default CSR
assignment for the DZll/DZVll.
Enter a CSR address in the range 160010(octal) through 177700(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the CSR address is unknown.
*
CP7480
How many lines does YZx have? [D R:l.-n. D:8.]:
Each DZll can serve as many as eight asynchronous lines.
can serve as many as four asynchronous lines.
Enter the total number of lines.
*
CP7484
Each
DZVll
The default is 8.
Enter terminal type for YZx [S R:4-6 D:•VTlOO•]:
Your answer to this question establishes
the YZ controller. You can change the
time without performing a new SYSGEN, so
answer for
this question if you do not
or will be connected. See Chapter 4 for
default terminal types.
3-62
the default terminal type for
default terminal types at any
you should choose the default
know which terminal types are
more information on changing
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
RSX-llM-PLUS SYSGEN supports the following types of terminals:
ASR33
ASR35
KSR33
*
CP7604
LA12
LA30P
LA30S
LA34
LA36
LA38
LASO
LAlOO
LA120
LA180S
VTOSB
VTSO
VT52
VTSS
VT61
VTlOO
VTlOl
VT102
VT105
VT125
VT131
VT132
Do you have any intercomputer communication devices? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes if the target configuration includes any
intercomputer communication devices:
of
the
following
PCLll
receiver/transmitter
DMCll/DMRll synchronous line interface
DUPll
synchronous line interface
Do not include any devices that will be used with
devices should be included when you do your NETGEN.
*
CP7804
CP7868
Those
Bow many PCLll receiver/transmitters do you have? [O D:O]:
Enter the number
configuration.
*
DECnet.
of
PCLll
receiver/transmitters
in
the
target
Enter vector address of the next PCLll receiver [O R:J00-774]:
The interrupt vector address for the PCLll receiver is assigned from
floating vector space starting at 300(octal).
Thus, there is no
default vector address for the PCLll receiver.
Enter a vector address in the range 300 (octal)
through 774 (octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the vector address is unknown.
*
CP7872
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700]:
The CSR address for the PCLll receiver is assigned from floating
address space starting at 160010(octal). Thus, there is no default
CSR assignment for the PCLll receiver.
Enter a CSR address in the range 160010(octal) through 177700(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the CSR address is unknown.
*
CP8068
Enter vector address of the next PCLll transmitter [O R:J00-774]:
The interrupt vector address for the PCLll transmitter is assigned
from floating vector space starting at 300(octal). Thus, there is no
default vector address for the PCLll transmitter.
3-63
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Enter a vector address in the range 300(octal)
through 774(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the vector address is unknown.
*
CP8072
What is its CSR address? (0 R:l60000-177700]:
The CSR address for the PCLll transmitter is assigned from floating
address space starting at 160010(octal). Thus, there is no default
CSR assignment for the PCLll transmitter.
Enter a CSR address in the range 160010(octal) through 177700(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the CSR address is unknown.
*
*
CP8204
How many DMCll/DMRll synchronous line interfaces do
you have? [O D:O]:
Enter the number of DMCll/DMRll
configuration.
*
CP8268
communication
links
in
the
target
Enter vector address of the next DMCll/DMRll (0 R:300-774]:
The vector address for the DMCll/DMRll interprocessor link is assigned
from floating vector space starting at 300(octal). Thus, there is no
default interrupt vector address for the DMCll/DMRll.
Enter a vector address in the range 300(octal)
through 774(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the vector address is unknown.
*
CP8272
What is its CSR address? (0 R:l60000-177700]:
The CSR address for the DMCll/DMRll interprocessor link is assigned
from the floating address space starting at 160010 (octal). Thus,
there is no default CSR assignment for the DMCll/DMRll.
Enter a CSR address in the range 160010(octal) through 177700(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the CSR address is unknown.
*
CP8280
Is it a half-duplex line? [Y/N D:N]:
Normally, the DMCll/DMRll is a full-duplex serial communications link.
When the DMCll/DMRll is used on a half-duplex line, one end of the
line must be the primary station and the other end must be the
secondary station.
If you enter Yes, you must specify whether the line is the primary
secondary station.
3-64
or
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
*
CP8284
Is it the primary station? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes to indicate that the line is a primary station.
indicate a secondary station.
*
CP8404
How many DUPll synchronous line interfaces do you have? [O D:O]:
Enter the number of DUPll synchronous line interfaces
configuration.
*
CP8468
Enter No to
in
the
target
Enter vector address of the next DUPll [O R:300-774]:
The vector address for the DUPll synchronous line interface is
assigned from the floating vector space starting at 300(octal). Thus,
there is no default interrupt vector address for the DUPll.
Enter a
vector address in the range 300(octal) through 774(octal). Consult
DIGITAL Field Service if the vector address is unknown.
*
CP8472
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700]:
The CSR address for the DUPll synchronous line interface is assigned
from the floating address space starting at 160010(octal). Thus,
there is no default CSR assignment for the DUPll.
Enter a CSR address in the range 160010(octal) through 177700(octal).
Consult DIGITAL Field Service if the CSR address is unknown.
*
CP8480
Is it a half-duplex line? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes if the line is a half-duplex line.
a full-duplex line.
*
*
CP8484
Enter No if the line
is
How many sync characters are required in a sync
leader? [D R:3.-14.]:
Enter a value in the range 3 through 14(decimal). A typical response
is 4 through 6(decimal).
If the line will run at high speeds or if
the expected system load is to be heavy, specify a greater number of
sync characters.
There is no default for this question.
*
CP9604
Enter device mnemonics for user-supplied drivers [S]:
If you do not wish to include any user-supplied drivers, press
in response to this question.
RETURN
If you wish to include user-supplied drivers, enter the driver
mnemonics in response to this question.
The device mnemonics you
enter must not include a colon (:).
Mnemonics for user-supplied drivers should start with the letters J or
Q to avoid conflict with DIGITAL-supplied drivers.
3-65
RUNNING SYSGEN
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
The driver source files must reside in UFO [11,10] and be named in the
format ddDRV.MAC and ddTAB.MAC, where dd is the device mnemonic
entered in this question. Any user-supplied drivers and their data
bases will be assembled, task-built, and loaded as part of the SYSGEN
procedure.
When you have listed all
response to the prompt.
*
CP9612
the
driver
mnemonics,
press
RETURN
in
Do you want the xx: driver to be loadable? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes to make the specified driver loadable.
specified driver resident.
Enter No to make the
It is easier to change the device configuration if the driver and data
base are both loadable.
Unless you have a specific reason not to, you
should answer Yes to this question.
If you answer No to this question, Question CP9616 does not appear,
because if a driver is resident, its data base must also be resident.
*
CP9616
Do you want the xx: driver's data base to be loadable? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes to make the data base for the specified
Enter No to make the specified data base resident.
driver
loadable.
It is easier to change the device configuration if the driver and data
base are both loadable. Unless you have a specific reason not to, you
should answer Yes to this question.
If you answered No to Question CP9612, this question does not appear,
because if a driver is resident, its data base must also be resident.
*
*
CP9632
What is the highest interrupt vector
address? (0 R:n-774 D:n]:
The highest interrupt vector address can range from 374(octal) through
774(octal).
SYSGEN uses the highest interrupt address you specified
in answering the previous peripheral questions as the default for this
question.
If you will be adding other devices after completing this system
generation, or if you have included user-supplied drivers, you should
set the highest interrupt vector address high enough to accommodate
the vectors for those devices.
3-66
RUNNING SYSGEN
ASSEMBLING EXECUTIVE
3.2.4
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
In this section, SYSGEN assembles the Executive, the drivers, and the
driver data bases. SYSGEN allows you to decide if you want assembly
listings and, if so, to direct them to a file or to the line printer.
After assembly is completed, SYSGEN creates the Executive object
library file.
Your answers to the questions in this section are
answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
put
in
the
saved
The following questions are asked before SYSGEN begins assembling the
Executive and drivers.
If you are not performing a PREPGEN, you will
have to wait until the assembly is completed before being asked the
questions in the next section.
*
*
AEOlO
Do you want assembly listings of the Executive and
drivers? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes if you wish to produce assembly
listings require considerable time to
needed, you should answer No.
listings.
Since assembly
produce and usually are not
If you enter Yes, you must specify the listing device.
*
AE020
What is to be the listing device [ddu:]? [S R:2-S D:•sy:•]:
Enter the device for the assembly listing files.
If you omit
colon from the device specification, SYSGEN appends a colon.
the
If the listing device is a disk, the listings are put in UFO
[11,34].
This UFD must exist already on the disk. If this UFD does not exist,
answer Yes to Question AE030 to pause, then create the UFO using the
following command line:
>UFD SY: [ 11, 34]
*
*
AE030
(BIT)
Do you wish to pause to edit any files before
assembling? [Y/N D:N]:
If you need to edit any of the assembly files,
enter Yes.
pauses and allows you to invoke an editor of your choice.
To continue with SYSGEN after pausing,
line:
enter
the
following
>UNS AT. (BIT)
SYSGEN then begins assembling the Executive and drivers.
3-67
SYSGEN
command
RUNNING SYSGEN
BUILDING EXECUTIVE
3.2.5
Building the Executive and Drivers
In this section, SYSGEN task builds the Executive and the drivers.
The Executive and driver task image files are put in UFD [1,54] on the
target system disk. If there is an old system from a previous system
generation in UFD [1,54], SYSGEN will transfer it to another UFD
before building the new system if you wish.
Your answers to the questions in this section are
answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
The following is a description of all the possible
Building the Executive and Drivers section.
*
*
BEOlO
put
in
the
questions
saved
in
the
Do you want to move the old system in [1,54] to
another UFD? [Y/N D:N]:
If there is an old system image file (RSXllM.SYS} in UFD [1,54] on
your target system disk, SYSGEN asks this question to allow you to
move that system and its associated files to another UFD before
building the new system in [1,54].
If you want to save files on the target disk from a previous SYSGEN,
answer Yes to this question.
SYSGEN asks you to enter the UFD to
which you wish to move the files, then copies the contents of UFD
(1,54] to the UFD you designate.
*
BE020
What UFD do you want to move it to ([g,m])? [S R:3.-9.]:
Enter the UFD to which you wish to move the system currently in
(1,54].
SYSGEN creates this UFD if it does not already exist and
moves the files in [1,54] to the specified UFD.
*
*
BEOJO
Do you want to pause to edit any files before
task-building? [Y/N D:N]:
In you are doing a complete SYSGEN, you may choose to
point and edit the following files:
pause
at
•
The Executive and driver task-build command files
•
The privileged task task-build command files
•
SYSVMR.CMD, the system image initialization command file
this
If you are doing a complete SYSGEN (that is, if you answered Yes to
Question SU120}, or if you are continuing a SYSGEN from some point
(that is, if you answered Yes to Question SU130) SYSGEN does not give
you any further opportunities to pause. After this question, SYSGEN
builds the Executive and drivers, then proceeds to the Building the
Privileged Tasks and Creating the System Image File sections. This
saves you time because you do not have to wait around for SYSGEN to
finish task building the Executive or the privileged tasks before you
can edit SYSVMR.CMD or other files.
3-68
RUNNING SYSGEN
BUILDING EXECUTIVE (Cont.)
If you are doing an individual section of SYSGEN, you may pause at
this point and edit the Executive and driver task-build command files
only.
If you want to edit any files before proceeding,
pauses and allows you to invoke an editor.
To continue with SYSGEN after pausing,
line:
>UNS AT. ~
3-69
enter
the
enter
Yes.
SYSGEN
following
command
RUNNING SYSGEN
BUILDING PRIVILEGED TASKS
3.2.6
Building the Privileged Tasks
In this section, SYSGEN task builds the privileged system tasks.
Your answers to the questions in this section are
answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
The following is a description of all the possible
Building the Privileged Tasks section.
*
*
BPOlO
put
in
the
questions
saved
in
the
Do you want maps for the microcode loader and
requestor tasks? [Y/N D:N] :
Enter Yes if you wish to produce
loader and requestor tasks.
task-build
maps
of
the
microcode
Since the maps require time to produce and usually are not needed, you
should answer No.
This question appears only if you included
subsystem in your system (Question CP6204) •
*
BP020
an
LPAll-K
laboratory
Enter the microcode version desired for LPA-11 unit n [O R:0-2 D:l]:
The LPAll-K may be loaded with one of three versions of the microcode:
0
1
2
Multi-request mode
Dedicated mode A/D input
Dedicated mode D/A output
See the LPAll-K documentation for information on the versions
microcode.
This question appears only if you included
subsystem in your system (Question CP6204).
*
BP030
an
LPAll-K
of
the
laboratory
Is the lab I/O on this LPA-11 an ARll? [Y/N D:N]:
The lab I/O on an LPAll-K can be handled either by K-Series/LPS-11 or
ARll. If you answer No to this question, K-Series/LPS-11 is assumed.
This question appears only if you included
subsystem in your system (Question CP6204).
*
BP040
an
LPAll-K
laboratory
Do you want the maps of the privileged tasks? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes if you wish to produce task-build maps of the privileged
tasks.
Since the maps require considerable time to produce and
usually are are not needed, you should answer No.
*
BPOSO
What is to be the map device [ddu:]? [S R:2-S
o:•sy•J:
Enter the device for the privileged task ~ap files.
If the map device
is a disk, the maps will be put in UFO [1,34].
This UFO must already
exist on the disk.
3-70
RUNNING SYSGEN
BUILDING PRIVILEGED TASKS (Cont.)
*
*
BP060
Do you want to pause to edit any files before
task-building? [Y/N D:N]:
This question is asked only if you are performing an individual
section of SYSGEN. If you are performing a complete SYSGEN, you must
edit the privileged task task-build command files in the Building the
Executive and Drivers section.
If you want to edit any of the task-build files for the privileged
tasks, enter Yes. SYSGEN pauses and allows you to invoke an editor.
The MCR INS command allows you to specify both the task name and the
task partition as keywords. In most cases, there is no need to edit
the task-build command files.
To continue with SYSGEN after pausing,
line:
enter
the
following
command
>UNS AT. ~
If you answer No, or after
privileged tasks.
you
finish
3-71
editing,
SYSGEN
builds
the
RUNNING SYSGEN
BUILDING NONPRIVILEGED TASKS
3.2.7
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
This section allows you to rebuild any nonprivileged system tasks that
you have patched.
You may have applied patches either manually or
through an Update. DIGITAL-supplied nonprivileged system tasks are
prebuilt and can be found
in the library UFO on the target system
disk.
If you have not patched any of the nonprivileged tasks listed
in Question BN020, you should skip over this section by answering No
to Question BNOlO.
The nonprivileged tasks are supplied in three forms:
Tasks built with the FCS routines contained in their
task images
xxxRES.TSK Tasks built to link to the FCSRES resident library
xxxFSL.TSL Tasks built to link to the FCSFSL supervisor-mode
library
xxx.TSK
Which versions of the nonprivileged tasks you use with your system
depend on your processor type and your answers to certain questions in
the Choosing the Executive Options section of SYSGEN.
You can use the xxxFSL.TSK tasks if you have a PDP-11/70 or PDP-11/44
processor and you included supervisor-mode library support (Question
CE080).
You can use the xxxRES.TSK tasks on any of the supported processors if
the FCSRES library is installed. SYSVMR.CMD automatically installs
the FCSRES library if you answered Yes to Question CE090. Even if you
answered No to CE090, you can install the FCSRES library yourself.
See Chapter 4 for more information.
Note that not all of the tasks listed in Question BN020 are
in xxxFSL.TSK and xxxRES.TSK versions.
furnished
You can install the appropriate tasks in your system in STARTUP.CMD or
SYSVMR. CMD.
The description accompanying Question BN020
system tasks.
lists
the
nonprivileged
NOTE
The term "nonprivileged" is used in this
section to describe those system tasks
which do not link to the Executive.
Some of the tasks that can be built in
this section are privileged, but do not
link to the Executive and therefore need
not be rebuilt each time the Executive
is rebuilt.
Usually you do not need to rebuild any of the nonprivileged tasks,
since the distribution kit contains prebuilt copies of all the tasks
listed in Question BN020.
3-72
RUNNING SYSGEN
BUILDING NONPRIVILEGED TASKS (Cont.)
You would need to rebuild one or more of these tasks if you applied
patches to the files, or if your only copy of a task image (.TSK file
type) was corrupted or accidentally deleted.
Answers to the questions asked in this section are placed in the saved
answer file
[200,200]SYSGENSA3.CMD. SYSGEN allows you to include an
identifying comment at the beginning of the file before asking the
questions in this section.
The following is a description of all the possible
Building the Nonprivileged Tasks section.
*
BNOlO
questions
in
the
Do you want to rebuild any nonprivileged tasks? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes if you have patched any of the nonprivileged system tasks
(see the list in the description accompanying Question BN020) or if
you have applied an Update to your target system disk.
Enter No if you have not patched any of the nonprivileged
tasks, either manually or by applying an Update.
system
NOTE
SYSGEN builds the nonprivileged tasks in
UFO
[1,54].
You
must
move
any
nonprivileged tasks that you rebuild in
this section from [1,54] to your library
UFO.
You can do this after SYSGEN has
finished.
See
Chapter 4 for more
information.
*
BN020
Enter task name ( s)
[S]:
Enter the names of the tasks you wish to rebuild,
following list:
BAD
BRU
CDA
CDARES
CDAFSL
CFL
CFLFSL
CMP
CM PRES
CMPFSL
CON
CRF
CRFRES
CRFFSL
DCL
OLD
DMP
DMPRES
DMPFSL
DSC
EDI
ED IRES
EDIFSL
EDT
EDTRES
EDTFSL
FLX
FLXRES
FLXFSL
FMT
FTB
FTBRES
FTBFSL
ICM
ICMRES
ICMFSL
choosing
from
the
RPTFSL
SLP
SLPRES
SLPFSL
STK
STKFSL
TDX
TKB
TKBRES
TKBFSL
VFY
VFYRES
VFYFSL
VMR
ZAP
ZAPRES
ZAPFSL
IOX
IOXRES
IOXFSL
LBR
LBRRES
LBRFSL
MAC
MAC RES
MACFSL
PAT
PATRES
PATFSL
PIP
PI PRES
PIPFSL
QMGCLI
QMGPRT
RPT
Enter "ALL" to build all the non-FCSRES and non-FCSFSL tasks.
Enter
"ALLRES" to build all the FCSRES tasks.
Enter "ALLFSL" to build all
the FCSFSL tasks.
3-73
RUNNING SYSGEN
BUILDING NONPRIVILEGED TASKS {Cont.)
You can enter the task names separated by commas and on more than one
line.
When you are done, finish the list with a period or press
RETURN in response to the prompt.
* BN030
Do you want the maps of the nonprivileged tasks? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes if you wish to produce task-build maps of the non pr iv i1 eged
tasks.
Since the maps require considerable time to produce and
usually are not needed, you should answer No.
*
BN040
What is to be the map device [ddu:]? [S R:2-5 o:•sy:•]:
Enter the device on which you want to put the nonprivileged task map
files.
If the map device is a disk, the maps are put in UFD [1,34].
This UFD must already exist on the disk. If this UFD does not exist,
answer Yes to Question BNOSO to pause, then create the UFD using the
following command line:
>UFD SY: [1,34] IBIT)
*
*
BNOSO
Do you want to pause to edit any files before
task-building? [Y/N D:N]:
Enter Yes to pause. Enter No
tasks you specified.
to
begin
To continue with SYSGEN after pausing,
line:
>UNS AT. IBIT)
3-74
building
enter
the
the
nonprivileged
following
command
RUNNING SYSGEN
CREATING SYSTEM IMAGE FILE
3.2.8
Creating the System Image File
In this section, SYSGEN creates and initializes the system image file.
A VMR indirect command file named SYSVMR.CMD creates the partitions,
loads the drivers, and installs the privileged tasks in the system
image file.
Your answers to the questions in this section are
answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
The following is a description of all the possible
Creating the System Image File section.
*
*
CSOlO
put
in
the
questions
saved
in
the
Do you want to pause to edit SYSVMR before creating
the system image file? [Y/N D:N]:
This question is only asked if you are performing an individual
section of SYSGEN. If you are performing a complete SYSGEN, you must
edit SYSVMR in the Building the Executive and Drivers section.
SYSGEN creates a VMR indirect command file, [l,54]SYSVMR.CMD, that is
used with VMR to initialize your system image file. The commands in
the command file set up primary and secondary pool, create partitions,
load the loadable drivers, set the size of the terminal driver's
buffer space, install all the privileged tasks, set the system tuning
parameters, and set the default terminal characteristics.
For
You may want to tailor this command file for your system.
example, SYSGEN creates secondary pool with 16K words. If you have a
number
of
large number of terminals or plan a
very
large
simultaneously open files, this may be too small. If you have a
smaller system with few terminals and open files, this may be too
large.
Usually, you would want to edit SYSVMR to do the following:
•
Change which tasks are installed
•
Change the size of secondary pool
•
•
Adjust the size of the terminal driver's buffer space
Change the terminal characteristics
If you answer Yes to this question, SYSGEN pauses and allows you to
invoke an editor and edit SYSVMR.CMD. To continue with SYSGEN after
pausing, enter the following command line:
>UNS AT.
~
If you answer No to this question, SYSGEN immediately continues.
3-75
RUNNING SYSGEN
CREATING SYSTEM IMAGE FILE {Cont.)
When SYSGEN continues, it creates the system image
file
and
initializes it using the SYSVMR command file. SYSGEN accomplishes
these tasks using the following command sequence:
>SET
>PIP
>ASN
>VMR
/UIC=[l,54]
OU:RSX11M.SYS/CO/NV/BL:l026.=RSX11M.TSK
SY:=LB:
@SYSVMR
VMR always prints the following diagnostic messages as it
the system image file using SYSVMR:
VMR
SET
VMR
LOA
VMR
SET
initializes
-- *DIAG*-Installed tasks or commons may no longer fit in partition
/TOP=SYSPAR:-*
-- *DIAG*-Loadable driver larger than 4K
TT:
-- *DIAG*-Installed tasks or commons may no longer fit in partition
/TOP=DRVPAR:-*
These messages do not indicate errors in your system.
When this section completes, SYSGEN is finished, and exits.
If you
are performing a PREPGEN, invoke SYSGEN again and specify the saved
answer files that the PREPGEN just created as input.
If you were
performing
a
SYSGEN, you now have a system image ready for
bootstrapping.
Proceed to Chapter 4 for information on bootstrapping
and saving the new system.
3-76
CHAPTER 4
AFTER SYSGEN
After SYSGEN exits, there are several steps remaining that must be
performed before you have a working system. This chapter describes
those steps and provides other information that will be helpful to you
in setting up and running your system.
4.1
BOOTSTRAPPING AND SAVING THE VIRGIN SYSTEM
If you have completed performing SYSGEN as detailed in Chapter 3, your
target system disk contains a bootstrappable virgin RSX-llM-PLUS
system image.
To bootstrap the virgin system and to save the system
following:
1.
do
the
If the target system disk is not already spinning in a drive,
load the disk and mount it.
For example, if your target
system disk is DBO:, use the following command line:
>MOU DBO:RSX11MPBL15
2.
image,
~
Assign logical device SY:
to your target system disk and
software bootstrap the virgin system. Note that this step
should not be performed on an on-line system unless you are
the only user logged on, since software bootstrapping the
target system stops the host system.
For example, if your target
following command sequence:
system
disk
is
DBO:,
use
the
>ASN DBO:=SY: ~
>BOO [1,54] IBm
The BOO command brings the virgin system into memory, where
the initialization module INITL initializes it.
If INITL
encounters an error condition, it prints an error message.
For more information on system initialization errors and error
messages, see Section 4.10.
3.
If you have included XDT in your system, a prompt from XDT
appears on your terminal.
In response to the prompt, type "G"
(without pressing RETURN). The system begins executing and
prints an identification message.
For example:
XDT: 15
XDT>G
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l
BL15
4-1
AFTER SYSGEN
If you did not include XDT in your system, the system begins
running immediately and prints the version and base level
identification message.
4.
Enter the current time and date.
For example:
>TIM 09:42 13-MAR-82 lBm
5.
To verify that your system is working, enter a TIM command.
If the system responds, it is an indication that the system
works properly. For example:
>TIM lBm
09:42:03 13-MAR-82
6.
Save the system image, using
switches.
For example:
the
SAV
command
without
any
>SAV lBm
CAUTION
Do not use the /WB switch with the SAV command before
you have determined that the system can be saved
properly.
If you use the /WB switch to rewrite the
bootblock and saving the system causes the system
image to be corrupted, you will not be able to
hardware bootstrap either the baseline system or your
system. You will be able to recover access to your
generated system only by using a running RSX-llM-PLUS
system to software bootstrap your generated system.
The SAV command writes the system image back to the target
disk,
reads the saved image back into memory, and brings up
the system using the start-up command file, [l,2]STARTUP.CMD.
7.
When STARTUP.CMD prompts you for the time and
CTRL/Z to exit from the start-up command file.
8.
If the system appears to be working correctly and there were
no error messages printed after you used the SAV command, save
the system again, this time rewriting the bootblock with the
/WB switch.
The system begins executing and prints an
identification message.
For example:
>SAV /WB ffiITl
OMO -- SYSTEM dismounted from DBO:
>
RSX-llM-PLUS
V2.l
BL15
***
date,
type
Final dismount initiated
***
576.K System:"JCFROG"
The /WB switch causes the SAV command to alter the bootblock
pointer on your target disk. The next time the target disk is
hardware bootstrapped, your new system will come up instead of
the baseline system.
For information on the SAV command that may
help
in
determining the source of difficulties encountered in saving
your system, see the description of the SAV command in the
RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual.
For more information on
the DIGITAL-supplied start-up command file, see Section 4.5.1
in this chapter.
4-2
AFTER SYSGEN
4.2
BACKING UP THE SAVED SYSTEM
As soon as you have saved your system, you should make a backup copy
to guard against accidental corruption of the target disk contents.
You can use the Backup and Restore
Utility
(BRU)
to
make
hardware-bootstrappable copies of your system disk.
If you have more
than one disk drive available, you can use BRU on line to copy
disk-to-disk.
If you have only one disk drive available, you can use
the BRUSYS system to copy disk-to-tape and then tape-to-disk.
(For
information on backing up RC25 or RL02 pregenerated systems, see
Chapter 5.) If you do not want to use a disk pack, you should back up
your new system to magnetic tape; you can later restore the system to
disk should the need arise.
For more information on copying system images using BRU, see Chapter 7
of the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Utilities Manual.
For information on valid
bootstrappable devices under RSX-llM-PLUS, see Chapter 3 of the
RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual.
4.3
RECOVERING DISK SPACE AFTER A SYSTEM GENERATION
Most of the files on the RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit are used only
for the system generation process or for user reference. Once you
have completed a SYSGEN, you can delete these files from your system
disk. This results in a considerable saving of disk space.
The only files that must be present on the running system disk are the
following:
•
•
•
•
All files in the Master File Directory (the UFO [O,O])
All [l,*]
files
All files in the library UFD (normally [3,54])
All files in the system UFO {normally [1,54])
Copying your target disk to another disk using BRU reorganizes
system files and provides the largest possible contiguous space.
4.4
the
TESTING THE SYSTEM
The User Environment Test Package (UETP) may be used to verify the
integrity and operation of newly generated systems. The package
consists of several Indirect command files that verify the presence
and operation of devices,
test the basic Executive features, and
verify the presence of system utilities.
See Chapter 9 of the RSX-llM/M-PLUS
information on using UETP.
4.5
System
Management
Guide
~~-
for
OTHER SYSTEM SETUP INFORMATION
The following sections describe various tasks the system manager
should perform to prepare a newly generated system for general use.
4-3
AFTER SYSGEN
4.5.l
The Start-Up Command File
Each time the system is bootstrapped, the file named [l,2]STARTUP.CMD
is invoked.
The prototype start-up file provided on your system
performs various functions that may or may not be appropriate for your
system, depending on the Executive options you chose during SYSGEN.
You should tailor this file to your particular system needs.
The following are functions commonly performed at system start-up:
•
Allocate system-controlled checkpoint space
•
Bring on line all devices configured into the system
•
Start the Console Logger
•
Start system Error Logging
•
Initialize the DIGITAL
user-supplied CLis
•
Start Resource Accounting
•
Start the Queue Manager and batch processor
•
Set the speed and type of terminals
•
Install resident libraries, utilities, system and user tasks
Command
Language
(DCL)
and
any
Certain system privileged and nonprivileged tasks are installed by
[l,54]SYSVMR.CMD when you create the system image file using SYSGEN.
You will probably want to install additional system and user tasks in
your system, or alter terminal characteristics if they have changed
since you performed SYSGEN. You may do this in two different ways.
First, you can install tasks or change terminal characteristics in the
system image using VMR.
In this way, the tasks will be installed as
soon as the system is bootstrapped. You can do this by using VMR
commands directly, or you can run the Creating the System Image
section of SYSGEN again and edit SYSVMR.CMD to install tasks or change
certain system characteristics to suit your needs. You should choose
this way if it is most important that the system is ready for use as
soon as it is bootstrapped.
Second, you can
install
tasks
or
change
certain
terminal
characteristics using MCR commands in STARTUP.CMD. You can use the
features of the Indirect Command Processor to conditionally install
tasks or perform other system initialization duties.
If you have not
edited SYSVMR.CMD, STARTUP.CMD can serve as a record of the changes
and additions you have made to the "standard" system.
4.5.2
Installing the RMS-11 Tasks, Utilities, and Libraries
RMS-11 is included on the RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kit and is
therefore already on your target system disk. To use RMS-11, you need
only install the resident libraries and RMS-11 utilities.
To make installation easier, the prototype STARTUP.CMD file supplied
on the distribution kit contains all the necessary installation
commands. If you wish to use RMS-11, activate these commands by
editing LB: [l,2]STARTUP.CMD to remove the periods and semicolons from
the beginning of each command line yoc wish to use.
4-4
AFTER SYSGEN
For more information on installing RMS-11, see the RSX-llM-PLUS/RMS-11
Release Notes. See RMS-11: An Introduction for information on using
RMS-11.
4.5.3
Login and Batch Job Message Files
When you log
in, the system prints the login information file
[l,2]LOGIN.TXT on your terminal. You should edit this file to provide
installation news and notices to system users.
See the description of
the BEL/LOG command in the RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual for
details on LOGIN.TXT.
If you have included batch processor support in your system, you
should edit [l,2]BATCH.TXT, which is included at the beginning of each
batch job log.
4.5.4
The Account File
If you have a previously created account file, copy the
to the new system disk.
account
file
If you do not already have an account file,
run the Account
Maintenance Program {ACNT)
to create an account file and
accounts.
See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management
Guide
information on using ACNT.
File
user
for
The account file supplied on the distribution
accounts, one privileged and one nonprivileged:
UIC:
Account name:
Password:
[1,1]
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
UIC:
Account name:
Password:
[200,1]
USER
USER
kit
contains
two.
You should change the passwords to these accounts as the first step in
setting up an account file, to preserve the security of your system.
The [200,1] account is supplied for use in conjunction with
warm-up
session
presented in the Introduction to RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS. See also Section 4.5.5 in this manual.
4.5.5
the
and
Help Files
Short-form information on the use of many RSX-llM-PLUS commands,
utilities, and features is available on line through the HELP command.
You can add help files to provide users with installation-specific
information.
The HELP files supplied with your system are located in UFD [1,2]
on
your target system disk. See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual
for a description of the HELP command and the help file format.
In UFD [200,1] on your target system disk are introductory files used
with the warm-up session for new users presented in the Introduction
to RSX-llM and RSX-llM-PLUS manual. New users coming onto the system
4-5
AFTER SYSGEN
can use the account with the UIC [200,1] that has been provided in the
account file supplied with your distribution kit to follow along with
the warm-up session.
UFD [200,1]
also contains two sample device drivers and their
associated data bases that you or system programmers may find
interesting (XXDRV.MAC, XXTAB.MAC, BMDRV.MAC, BMTAB.MAC).
4.5.6
Installing and Using System Tasks
Many privileged and nonprivileged system tasks are installed in your
system image by [l,54]SYSVMR.CMD when you create the system image file
using SYSGEN. You can install other system tasks that you may wish to
use through STARTUP.CMD, SYSVMR.CMD, or by hand.
See Section 4.5.1.
If you built any of the nonprivileged system tasks in the Building the
Nonprivileged Tasks section of SYSGEN, there will be new task images
for those tasks in UFO [1,54]. You should move these tasks to your
system's library UFO, which is normally [3,54].
Many of the nonprivileged system tasks are supplied in xxxFSL.TSK and
xxxRES.TSK versions.
If you have chosen supervisor-mode library
support in Question CEOSO, you should use the xxxFSL.TSK tasks that
are supplied.
If you have not chosen supervisor-mode library support, you can use
the xxxRES.TSK tasks.
If you chose to build the privileged system
tasks to link to FCSRES by answering Yes to Question CE090, you can
use the xxxRES.TSK tasks simply by installing those you need.
You can use the xxxRES.TSK tasks even if you answered No to Question
CE090.
You need only install the FCSRES library, using the following
MCR command line:
>INS [l,l]FCSRES.TSK/PAR=GEN/RON=YES (BIT)
You can then install and
system tasks.
4.6
use
any
of
the
xxxRES.TSK
nonprivileged
INSTALLING LAYERED PRODUCTS
If you intend to include any DIGITAL layered products in your system,
see the appropriate layered product installation documentation for
specific instructions.
4.7
FINDING OUT MORE ABOUT THE SYSTEM
The purpose of this manual is to enable you to generate a working
RSX-llM-PLUS operating system for your hardware configuration. There
is other information, though, that you will need to operate and adjust
your system.
If you are not already familiar with RSX-llM-PLUS, you should read the
Introduction to RSX-llM and RSX-llM-PLUS and perform the on-line
terminal session.
If you are to be the manager of an RSX-llM-PLUS system, you should
read the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide to become familiar
with the system management utilities you will need to use.
4-6
AFTER SYSGEN
The quickest way to find information on a specific subject is to use
the Master Index contained in the RSX-llM-PLUS Information Directort
and Master Index. The Master Index consists of all the indiv1dua
manual indexes merged into a comprehensive reference to the entire
documentation set.
Figure 4-1 groups the manuals in the RSX-llM-PLUS documentation set in
two ways to help you learn where to find the information you need:
By subject area
Introduction to RSX-llM-PLUS
Command Interfaces
System Structure and Operation
Applications and System Programming
By user area
User Level Interfacing With the System
Applications Programming
System Programming
Managing System Resources
~
INTRODUCTION
~
Software Product Description
Introduction to RSX-11 M and RSX-11 M-PLUS
Information Directory and Master Index
RMS-11: An Introduction
RMS-11 User's Guide
~
COMMANDS
r--i
Command Language Manual (DCL)
MCA Operations Manual
SYSTEM
PROGRAMMER
USER
r----1
SYSTEM
~
Utilities Manual
~
Batch and Queue Operations Manual
~
EDT Editor Manual
....--1-4---
System Generation and Installation Guide
System Management Gwde
Error Logging Manual
Crash Dump Analyzer Reference Manual
~
APPLICATIONS
PROGRAMMER
~
RMS-11 Ut1llt1es
PROGRAMMING
---~
~
--~
Guide to Program Development
~
MACR0-11 Language Reference Manual
r--
ODT Reference Manual
~
Task Swider Manual
~
~
SYSTEM
MANAGER
RMS-11 MACRO Programmer's Guide
System Library Routines Reference Manual
Executive Reference Manual
Guide to Writing an 1/0 Driver
1/0 Operations Reference Manual
110 Drivers Reference Manual
~
--.
~
~
ZK-1189-82
Figure 4-1
Subjective and Functional Organization
of the Documentation
4-7
AFTER SYSGEN
4.8
CHANGING THE SYSTEM WITHOUT REPEATING SYSGEN
You must perform a new system generation if you wish to choose
different Executive options or alter the peripheral configuration for
devices that have resident data bases. You can use saved answer files
for those sections you do not wish to alter, thus reducing the number
of questions you must answer.
Many system parameters and characteristics, however, can be changed
without performing a complete system generation. The following is a
list of some of the changes you can make:
•
Alter system
SYSVMR.CMD
parameters
and
terminal
•
Change device CSR and vector addresses using the
CON SET command
•
Change the device configuration
generated with loadable data bases
•
Add loadable drivers for devices not
generation
•
Rebuild any of the nonprivileged tasks
for
characteristics
devices
included
VMR
in
or
MCR
that
during
were
system
Altering System Parameters Using VMR
4.8.1
The following system parameters are set and functions performed in the
SYSVMR.CMD file:
•
Set secondary pool size
•
Create partitions
•
Set the size of the terminal data space buffers (TTCOM)
•
Load drivers
•
Install directive commons
•
Install privileged and nonprivileged tasks
•
Set the round-robin scheduling interval and priority range
•
Set the Executive-level disk swapping
range
•
Set pool limit parameters for the Pool Monitoring Task (PMT)
•
Set terminal line speed, buffer size, terminal type, and other
characteristics
interval
and
priority
To alter system parameters using VMR, edit [l,54]SYSVMR.CMD
necessary, then recreate the system image file.
For example:
>SET
>PIP
>ASN
>VMR
where
/UIC=[l,54] tBTIJ
RSX11M.SYS/NV/CO/BL:l026.=RSX11M.TSK tBTIJ
SY:=LB:
tBTIJ
@SYSVMR tBTIJ
When VMR exits, bootstrap and save the system, as described in Section
4.1.
4-8
AFTER SYSGEN
Adding Devices
4.8.2
If you change your hardware configuration or obtain new devices, you
may be able to make the corresponding changes to your RSX-llM-PLUS
system without repeating SYSGEN.
If you are adding a device type that does not exist in your current
system,
invoke SYSGEN and choose the Adding a Device section.
This
section creates a loadable data base and assembles and builds the
driver for
the new device. You must recreate your system image file
and load the new driver and data base.
If you are changing the configuration for a device type that already
exists in your current system (for example, you have three DB-type
devices generated into your system and want to have five, or you want
to change which devices are on which controller) , and the device
driver was originally generated with a loadable data base, perform the
Adding a Device section of SYSGEN to create a new loadable data base
and reassemble and rebuild the driver. You must then recreate your
system image file and load the driver and the new data base.
There are some restrictions on adding devices
complete SYSGEN.
See Section 4.8.2.1.
without
To add a device or change a device's configuration,
answer No to the following questions:
performing
i~voke
SYSGEN
*
SU120
Do you want to do a complete SYSGEN?
*
SU130
Do you want to continue a previous SYSGEN from
some point?
*
a
and
When SYSGEN asks which individual section of SYSGEN you wish to
perform, choose the Adding a Device section.
(You cannot use a saved
answer file when you are performing this section of SYSGEN.)
SYSGEN
then
asks
you
all the questions in the Choosing Peripheral
Configuration section.
Specify the number of controllers or devices only for the device type
that you are adding or changing;
specify zero controllers or devices
for all the others.
For MASSBUS devices (device mnemonics DB, DR, DS,
EM, and MM), specify the full number of RH controllers that you have,
but do not specify any MASSBUS devices that you are not adding or
changing.
When all the questions in the Choosing Peripheral Configuration
section have been asked, SYSGEN assembles and task-builds the driver
and data base for the device you specified.
When SYSGEN exits, edit [l,54]SYSVMR.CMD to add the LOA command to
load the new driver and data base in your system. If you are adding
or changing a MASSBUS device (device mnemonics DB, DR, DS, EM, or MM)
or an RK06 or RK07 (device mnemonic DM), you must use the /CTB switch
with the LOA command:
LOA dd:/CTB=cca
where
dd:
cc
a
is the device mnemonic (for example, DB:, DM:)
is the controller mnemonic (RH for MASSBUS devices,
DM
for RK06 or RK07 disks)
is the controller letter
(or letters separated by
commas)
of the controllers to which the device is
connected
4-9
AFTER SYSGEN
Create a new system image file containing
base. For example:
>SET
>PIP
>ASN
>VMR
the
new
driver
and
data
/UIC=[l,54] (Bill
RSX11M.SYS/NV/CO/BL:l026.=RSX11M.TSK (Bill
SY:=LB: fill)
@SYSVMR (Bill
When VMR exits, bootstrap and save the system, as described in Section
4.1.
4.8.2.1 Restrictions on Adding Devices after SYSGEN - There are some
restrictions on which devices you may add after SYSGEN. Choices you
made during SYSGEN may also affect your ability to add new devices.
If a device has a resident data base, it cannot be
after SYSGEN.
added
The following devices always have resident data bases and
added or changed without performing a complete SYSGEN:
TT:
LA:
IP:
or
changed
cannot
be
All terminals
LPAll-K laboratory peripheral accelerator
IPll industrial control subsystem
If you have generated a mixed MASSBUS configuration, all the MASSBUS
devices (device mnemonics DB, DR, OS, EM, and MM) have resident data
bases and additions or changes cannot be made without performing a
complete SYSGEN.
If you did not generate any MASSBUS devices (device mnemonics DB, DR,
OS, EM, or MM) into your system, you cannot add any MASSBUS devices
after SYSGEN. If you generated at least one MASSBUS device into your
system, you can change that device or add any of the other MASSBUS
devices after SYSGEN.
If you did not generate any RK06s or RK07s (device mnemonic
your system, you cannot add that device type after SYSGEN.
DM)
into
Another restriction on adding new devices after SYSGEN is the highest
interrupt vector address generated into your system. During SYSGEN,
at the end of the Choosing Peripheral Configuration section, SYSGEN
asks for the highest interrupt vector address in your system. You
cannot add any device with a vector address that is higher than the
highest interrupt vector address that you specified.
For· that reason,
you should always specify a highest interrupt vector address of
774(octal) during SYSGEN, if you intend to add devices later.
4.8.3
Rebuilding Honprivileged Tasks
You can rebuild nonprivileged tasks at any time by invoking SYSGEN and
selecting the Building the Nonprivileged Tasks section. See Chapter 3
for a description of the questions asked in this section.
4.9
PUTTING MORE THAN ONE SYSTEM ON THE SAME VOLUME
There may be instances in
RSX-llM-PLUS systems on a
contain different hardware
components and features.
which you wish to put two or more
single disk volume. Each system might
configurations or different
software
4-10
AFTER SYSGEN
If you wish to place two or more RSX-llM-PLUS systems on a single disk
volume, you must take certain precautions to avoid possible conflicts
or confusion.
Each system must have in its system UFO separate copies of the system
image file and all privileged task files.
The nonprivileged task
files in the library UFO can be shared by both systems, as can the
system libraries in UFO [1,1].
NOTE
The following procedure for putting two
RSX-llM-PLUS systems on a single disk
volume assumes that both of the systems
are RSX-llM-PLUS Version 2.1 systems.
You may encounter
various
software
incompatibilities if you attempt to put
RSX-llM-PLUS
systems
of
dissimilar
versions on the same disk volume.
To add an RSX-llM-PLUS system to a volume that already contains an
RSX-llM-PLUS system, use the following procedure.
The system already
on the volume is referred to as the first system, and the system you
are adding is referred to as the second system.
In the example, the
volume designated SY:
contains the first system and will later
contain the second one as well.
The volume designated OBl: contains
the second system. The example assumes that both SY: and OBl:
are
already mounted.
1.
Create a separate directory on the volume, such as [4,54], for
the second system.
Set your default UIC to this directory.
For example:
>UFO SY: [4,54] ~
>SET /UIC= [ 4 I 54] (8D)
2.
Copy all files from directory [1,54] of the disk that contains
the second system to the directory you created in step 1.
For
example:
>PIP SY: [4,54]/CO=DBl: [l,54]*.*
3.
Delete the second system's RSXllM.SYS file.
>PIP RSXllM.SYS;*/DE
4.
~
For example:
~
Create a
file named RSXllM.SYS
RSXllM.TSK file.
For example:
from
the
second
system's
>PIP RSX11M.SYS/CO/NV/BL:l026.=RSX11M.TSK (Bill
5.
Use the second system's SYSVMR file and
partitions, install tasks, and load drivers.
VMR to set
For example:
>ASN SY:=LB: IBm
> VMR @SYSVMR (Bill
6.
Software bootstrap the second system, using the BOO command.
>BOO~
4-11
up
AFTER SYSGEN
7.
For the install-run-remove option of the RUN command to work
properly, you must set the proper default system UIC. Use the
SET /SYSUIC command to set the system UIC to the UIC to which
you copied the second system.
For example:
>SET /SYSUIC=[4,54]
8.
fill)
Set the library UIC to the library UIC of
For example:
the
first
system.
>SET /LIBUIC=[3,54] fill)
9.
Save the second system with the SAV command.
Use the /WB
switch only if you wish to have the second system be the one
that comes up when you hardware bootstrap the volume.
Note
that
only
one
system
on
a
volume
can
be
hardware-bootstrappable.
>SAV (@TI
The volume now contains two systems.
The following is an example of adding a second system (on DBl:) to
existing system (on the system device):
>UFD
>SET
>PIP
>PIP
>PIP
>ASN
>VMR
an
SY: [ 4, 54] fill)
/UIC=[4,54] (@TI
SY: [4,54]/CD=DBl: [1,54]*.* (@TI
RSXllM.SYS;*/DE fill)
RSXllM.SYS/CO/NV/BL:l026.=RSXllM.TSK fill)
SY:=LB: fill)
@SYSVMR (@TI
[Messages from VMR appear here]
>BOO~
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>SET /SYSUIC=[4,54] (@TI
>SET /LIBUIC=[3,54] ~
>SAV ~
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l
BL15
576.K System:"NANCY"
If you install a task in a system other than the current system, and
then run the task in the current system, the task aborts with the
following message:
Task installed in more than one system
When you install a task, system-specific information is written into
its header in the task image file. When you run an installed task,
the loader checks the header information to verify that it matches the
system from which the RUN command was issued. If this information
does not match, the load operation fails and the task is aborted.
You can avoid this problem by removing the task from the current
system and reinstalling it in the current system, thereby making the
current system the system in which the task has been installed most
recently.
4-12
AFTER SYSGEN
4.10
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ERRORS
When a virgin system is bootstrapped, the system initialization module
INITL establishes data structures and performs sanity checks on the
system. If INITL encounters an error condition, it prints an error
message on the system console terminal.
The state of the system
depends on whether XDT is present and whether the error condition is
classified as WARNING or FATAL.
If your system does not have XDT,
possibilities exist:
INITL
halts
the
processor.
Two
•
If the message is labeled "Warning," you can
system initialization by pressing the CONT
processor console panel.
•
If the message is labeled "Fatal," you cannot continue system
initialization but must fix the problem and rebootstrap the
disk.
proceed with
switch on the
If the system includes XDT, INITL executes a BPT
(breakpoint trap)
instruction, which causes control to pass to XDT. XDT prints a
breakpoint error {BE:) message and prompts you for input.
•
If the message is labeled "Warning," you can use XDT commands
to examine locations and correct the problem. Type the P
command to continue system initialization.
•
If the message is labeled "Fatal," you cannot continue with
system
initialization;
therefore, you must correct the
problem and rebootstrap the system.
4.10.1
System Initialization warning Messages
The following are the possible INITL warning messages:
warning -- Crash device not found in system tables:
RO=device type (ASCII)
Rl=logical unit number
Enter CSR address in R2, physical unit number in Rl
type P
and
hit continue
Explanation: The device that you specified for crash dumps does
not have an associated Device Control Block {DCB) in the system
device tables.
User Action: INITL allows you to enter the CSR of the crash dump
device so that you can continue system operation without having
to rebuild the Executive.
Warning -- Device xx vector address above V$$CTR
Explanation: In examining the vector assignments, INITL finds
that the vector address for this device is higher than the
highest possible address for vectors on this system.
User Action: You can use the VMR CON SET command to change
value
S.VCT/K.VCT
in
the
device
data
base.
See
RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide for a description of
VMR CON SET command.
4-13
the
the
the
AFTER SYSGEN
Warning -- Device xx Vector in use
Explanation: INITL finds that the vector for device xx points to
other than an Executive nonsense interrupt entry point.
User Action: Either the vector itself has been corrupted
(use
XDT or ZAP to correct this) or the vector has been incorrectly
specified (use the VMR CON SET command to correct this).
4.10.2
System Initialization FATAL Messages
The following are the possible INITL fatal error messages:
Fatal error -- Boot device not found in system tables:
RO=device type (ASCII)
Rl=Physical unit number
R2=CSR address
Explanation: You have bootstrapped your system from a device for
which there is no data base in your generated system.
For
example, you might have a hardware configuration that contains
four DB-type devices but the RSX-llM-PLUS system you are running
has only two DB-type devices generated into it.
User Action: Bootstrap your system from a device that is present
in your running system.
cc a a
l
unit ddnn:
j
Fatal error
error code in
didn't come online
Explanation: If a controller mnemonic appears in the message,
the driver database contains the wrong CSR address, or there is
an error in the driver. If a device unit mnemonic appears, there
is an error in the driver.
User Action:
If the problem is an incorrect CSR address, you can
change the faulty CSR address using the VMR CON SET command.
If
there is an error in a DIGITAL-supplied driver, submit a Software
Performance Report
(SPR) to DIGITAL. If there is an error in a
user-supplied driver, you must diagnose and correct the error.
Fatal error -- Device xx Driver does not support controller type
Explanation: There is either an error in the
driver was assembled with the wrong RSXMC file.
driver
or
the
User Action: If there is an error in the driver and it is
DIGITAL-supplied, submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
If the driver is not
the problem, reassemble the driver using the proper RSXMC file.
Fatal error -- Device xx Driver not loaded
Explanation:
You have not loaded the driver.
User Action:
Load the driver using VMR and reboot your system.
4-14
AFTER SYSGEN
Fatal error -- Directive partition not fixed in memory
Explanation:
memory.
You have not
fixed
User Action: Use VMR to load and
into your system image.
your
fix
directive
the
Fatal error -- Driver didn't return control after
partition
directive
con.troller}
{ unit
in
partition
online call
Driver error -- If the driver is a DIGITAL-supplied driver, submit
SPR to DIGITAL.
Explanation: The system image is corrupted or there is an
in the driver.
an
error
User Action: If the system image is corrupted, perform
again, using the saved answer files previously produced.
driver is the problem, please submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
SYSGEN
If the
Fatal error -- Executive data space not loaded
Explanation:
file.
You have not used VMR to create
the
system
User Action: Perform the Creating the System Image File
of SYSGEN to create the system image file.
image
section
Fatal error -- Secondary pool not created with VMR
Explanation: You have not created a secondary pool partition
your system image file.
User Action:
partition.
Use the VMR SET command to create a secondary
4-15
in
pool
CHAPTER 5
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
The pregenerated RSX-llM-PLUS kit provides the quickest and easiest
way to begin running an RSX-llM-PLUS system on your PDP-11 hardware.
The other RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kits require that you spend
considerable time generating an RSX-llM-PLUS system that suits your
hardware and programming needs.
The pregenerated kit, however,
contains a ready-to-run RSX-llM-PLUS system that is suitable for many
hardware configurations, especially
those
that
do
not
have
large-capacity disk drives and many peripheral devices.
You need perform only a few simple operations before you are ready to
begin using your pregenerated system. The sections in this chapter
guide you, step-by-step, through those operations.
Section 5.1 briefly describes the pregenerated
they contain.
Section 5.2 then explains
install the pregenerated kit on your hardware
tells you how to tailor various system files
describes other tasks related to preparing the
kits and the systems
the steps necessary to
system.
Section 5.4
to suit your needs, and
system for use.
Section 5.5 provides detailed descriptions of the features and
restrictions
of the pregenerated system.
Finally, Section 5.6
describes various methods of changing certain aspects of your system,
such as adding device drivers, supporting laboratory I/O peripherals,
or including DECnet.
You should read through this chapter and familiarize yourself with the
pregenerated kit and the operations you must perform before you
attempt to do anything with your kit disk.
5.1
SHORT DESCRIPTIONS OF THE KIT AND THE SYSTEM
The following sections describe briefly the
contents
of
the
pregenerated kit and the features of the RSX-llM-PLUS systems the kit
contains. A detailed description of the features,
characteristics,
and limitations of the pregenerated systems is in Section 5.5.2.
5.1.1
Description of the Pregenerated Distribution Kits
The pregenerated distribution kit consists of one RL02 disk. The kit
disk
contains all the necessary RSX-llM-PLUS system files and
utilities, and RMS-11 V2.0 files and utilities, as well as some
special-purpose files.
The disk also contains two ready-to-run system
images.
5-1
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
5.1.2
Description of the Pregenerated RSX-llM-PLUS System
The pregenerated system is an RSX-llM-PLUS image that incorporates
most RSX-llM-PLUS features. When you bootstrap the disk, an automatic
system start-up procedure identifies the peripheral devices connected
to your processor and performs various other housekeeping tasks. Once
the start-up procedure is finished,
you can begin using
your
RSX-llM-PLUS system immediately.
In order for the automatic system start-up procedure to be able to
properly identify the peripheral devices connected to your processor,
those devices must be at DIGITAL standard CSR and vector addresses.
If you have a PDP-11/23-PLUS or PDP-11/24 packaged system, your
devices are probably at the standard CSR and vector addresses.
If you
are not sure about whether your system is configured properly, consult
DIGITAL Field Service.
Two pregenerated system images are provided on the kit disk, one for
use on PDP-11/70 and PDP-11/44 processors, the other for use on
PDP-11/24, PDP-11/23-PLUS, and MICRO/PDP-11 processors.
See Section 5.5.2 for detailed descriptions of the Executive
and devices supported.
5.2
features
INSTALLING THE PREGENERATED SYSTEM
Before you do anything else with your pregenerated system, you need to
perform the following operations:
•
Copy the DIGITAL-supplied distribution kit
disk.
•
Delete unnecessary files to provide more
system disk.
disk
free
to
space
a
blank
on
the
The following sections help you decide how to perform the operations,
and guide you step-by-step through the process of installing your
system.
5.2.1
Copying the DIGITAL-Supplied Kit Disk
You must make a copy of the kit disk that you received from DIGITAL.
You should do this before you alter the kit disk in any way. You will
then be able to save the DIGITAL-supplied disk as a backup, in case
something goes wrong and your system disk is damaged or corrupted, or
in case your needs later change and you need to set up your system
differently.
The procedures described in the following sections
require that you delete files from the system disk;
if you use the
DIGITAL-supplied disk as your system disk, you will destroy your only
master copy of the RSX-llM-PLUS software.
The copying procedure you use depends on your hardware configuration:
•
If you have a small system with two RL02 drives, you can
the kit to a blank RL02 disk.
copy
•
If you have a MICRO/PDP-11 processor, you might wish
the kit to the RD51 fixed disk.
copy
5-2
to
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
If you you wish to copy the DIGITAL-supplied RL02 kit disk to
RL02 disk, turn to Section 5.2.2.
If you wish to copy the RL02 kit disk to an RD51 or other
to Section 5.2.3.
5.2.2
another
disk,
turn
Copying the RL02 Kit Disk to a Blank RL02 Disk
This section describes how to copy an RL02 kit disk to another RL02
disk, using the BRUSYS system supplied on the kit disk.
It also
describes the procedure for deleting unused system files to increase
available space on the system disk.
You need one blank RL02 disk to make a copy of the RL02 kit disk.
Section 5.3 contains an example of the copying
and
deleting
procedures.
You might find it helpful to remove those pages from the
binder and refer to the example as you read through the following
instructions.
Use the following procedure to copy the kit disk.
(The output disk
referred to in this section is the blank RL02 disk to which you are
copying the kit disk.)
1.
Physically mount the kit disk and the output disk on their
respective drives.
If you are not familiar with the procedure
for physically mounting RL02 disks, consult the hardware
documentation for the RL02 drive.
2.
Hardware bootstrap the kit disk.
(Consult DIGITAL Field
Service or your processor documentation for information on
hardware bootstrapping devices.)
This brings the pregenerated
system
into
memory.
The system start-up procedure is
automatically invoked and prompts you for the date and time.
Type CTRL/Z in response to the prompt to exit from the
start-up procedure.
The following is an example of bootstrapping a kit
mounted in drive DLO:, on a PDP/11-23-PLUS processor:
disk
TESTING MEMORY
0512.KW
START? DL filD
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DL:=SY:
>RED DL:=LB:
>RED DL:=SP:
>MOU DL:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DL: [l,2]STARTUP
512.KW
Startup -
System:"PREGEN"
Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter the time and date (hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : CTRL/zJ
5-3
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
If you cannot bootstrap your system, check your system's site
configuration documentation or consult DIGITAL Field Service
to see if your hardware has the standard CSR and vector
addresses for the RL02 drive controller. The CSR address must
be 174400(octal) and the vector 160(octal).
3.
Write-protect the kit disk, using the write-protect switch on
the drive.
Software bootstrap the BRUSYS stand-alone system,
using the following command line:
>BOO [6,54]BRUSYS (Bf!)
This brings the BRUSYS system into memory. The BRUSYS system
prints an identification line on the console terminal, then
runs the Stand-Alone Configuration and Disk Sizing Program
(CNF) •
4.
Enter the device specifications in response to the prompts
from CNF.
The "first device" is the drive containing the kit
disk;
the "second device" is the drive containing the output
disk.
For example:
Enter first device: DLO:
(Bf!)
Enter second device: DLl: (Bf!)
5.
Press the RETURN key, then enter the date and time using the
TIM command.
Use the TIM command again to verify that you
entered the correct date and time. For example:
Hit RETURN and enter date and time as 'TIM HH:MM MM/DD/YY' (Bf!)
>TIM 11:45 02/01/83 (Bf!)
>TIM (Bf!)
11:45:01 l-FEB-83
>
6.
Run the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) on your output disk.
For example, if your output device is DLl:, use the following
command sequence:
>RUN BAD
>
BAD> DLl:/LIST IBfil)
BAD -- DLl: Total bad blocks= O.
BAD> (CTRL/Z)
If BAD finds that your output disk has bad blocks on it, the
blocks will be marked on the disk and will not be used again
by RSX-llM-PLUS.
If your output disk has a large number of
bad blocks (for example, more than ten), or if block 0 is bad,
you should use another disk.
7.
Run the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU) to copy the kit disk
to the output disk.
For example, if the kit disk is mounted
on DLO: and the output disk is mounted on DLl:,
use the
following command sequence:
5-4
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
>RUN BRU (Bill
>
BRU>/VERIFY (Bill
From:
DLO: (Bill
To:
DLl: ~
BRU - Starting verify pass
BRU - Completed
BRU>
~RL/Z)
If BRU prints messages indicating that the verify operation
failed,
repeat this entire step.
If the verify operation
fails again, use a new RL02 output disk.
If the verify
operation fails once again, it is likely that your kit disk is
defective and should be replaced.
When BRU finishes, the output disk contains a complete copy of
the DIGITAL-supplied kit disk.
Remove the kit disk from its
drive, and safely store it for later use in making fresh
copies, should the need arise.
The output disk is now referred to as the system disk.
You must now decide which of the two system images on the system
you wish to use.
Read Section 5.2.2.1 next.
disk
5.2.2.1 Deleting the Unused System from the System Disk - There are
two RSX-llM-PLUS system images supplied on the pregenerated kit disk.
In UFD [1,54] is an RSX-llM-PLUS system task file that does not take
advantage of instruction- and data-space hardware.
(For clarity, this
chapter refers to this system as "the [1,54] system.")
This system is
intended primarily for the MICRO/PDP-11, PDP-11/23-PLUS, and PDP-11/24
processors, none of which incorporate instruction- and data-space
(abbreviated I- and D-space) mapping hardware.
The [1,54] system does not support user- or kernel-mode I- and D-space
tasks or supervisor-mode libraries.
Support for shadow recording,
console logging, the Software Performance Monitor (SPM-11), and parity
memory has also been omitted from this system.
The [1,54]
system can also run on the PDP-11/44 and
processors.
Note, though, that when you run the [1,54]
PDP-11/44 and PDP-11/70 processors, the system does not take
of
the I- and D-space mapping hardware incorporated
processors.
When you hardware bootstrapped your kit disk for copying,
system was the system that began running.
PDP-11/70
system on
advantage
in those
the
[1,54]
In UFD [2,54] is an RSX-llM-PLUS system image that does take advantage
of instruction- and data-space hardware.
(This chapter refers to this
system as "the [2,54] system.") This system can be run only on the
PDP-11/70 and PDP-11/44 processors, both of which incorporate I- and
D-space mapping hardware. If you are running the pregenerated system
on either of these processors, you should use the [2,54] system.
The [2,54] system supports user- and kernel-mode I- and D-space tasks
and supervisor-mode libraries.
It includes all RSX-llM-PLUS Executive
features.
5-5
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
Both the [1,54] and [2,54]
systems support
Section 5.5.2.2 for a complete list).
the
same
devices
Once you have decided which system you wish to use, use the
procedure to delete the unused system:
(See
following
1.
If it is not still mounted, physically mount the system disk
in a drive on your system.
If you are not familiar with ~he
procedure for physically mounting RL02 disks, consult the
hardware documentation for the RL02 drive.
2.
Hardware bootstrap the system disk.
(Consult DIGITAL Field
Service or your processor documentation for information on
hardware bootstrapping devices.) This brings the [1,54] system
into memory.
The system start-up procedure is automatically
invoked and prompts you for the date and time. Type CTRL/Z in
response to the prompt to exit from the start-up procedure.
The following is an example of bootstrapping a system
mounted in drive DLl:, on a PDP/11-23-PLUS processor:
disk
TESTING MEMORY
0512.KW
START? DLl (8IT)
512.KW
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DLl:=SY:
>RED DLl:=LB:
>RED DLl:=SP:
>MOU DLl:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DL1:[1,2]STARTUP
System:"PREGEN"
Startup - Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter the time and date (hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : mRL/Z)
3.
If you intend to use the [1,54] system, skip to Step 5.
If you intend to use the [2,54]
system, software
that system, using the following MCR command line:
bootstrap
>BOO [2,54]RSX11M (8li)
This brings the [2,54] system into memory, and the system
prints
an
identification message.
The system start-up
procedure is automatically invoked again, and prompts you for
the date and time.
Type CTRL/Z to exit from the start-up
procedure.
5-6
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
The following is an
[2,54] system:
example
of
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DLl:=SY:
>RED DLl:=LB:
>RED DLl:=SP:
>MOU DLl:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DL1:[1,2]STARTUP
software
384.KW
bootstrapping
the
System:"PREGEN"
Startup - Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter the time and date {hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : gRL/zl
Remember that the [2,54] system only runs on the PDP-11/44 and
PDP-11/70 processors.
If you software bootstrap the [2,54]
system on a processor that does not have instruction- and
data-space hardware, the system will not run.
4.
Make the
[2,54]
system hardware-bootstrappable.
following MCR command line:
>SAVE /WB
Use
the
~
This makes the [2,54]
system hardware-bootstrappable.
The
[2,54] system begins running again, and the start-up procedure
is automatically invoked once again. Type CTRL/Z in response
to the prompt to exit from the start-up procedure.
The following is an example
hardware-bootstrappable:
of
making
the
[2,54]
system
>SAV /WB ~
OMO -- System disk being dismounted
OMO -- SYSTEM dismounted from DLl:
*** Final dismount initiated
12:10:17 *** DLl: -- Dismount complete
>
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DLl:=SY:
>RED DLl:=LB:
>RED DLl:=SP:
>MOU DLl:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DL1:[1,2]STARTUP
512.KW
Startup -
System:"PREGEN"
Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter the time and date (hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : ~
5-7
***
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
5.
Delete the files that belong to the system that you chose not
to use.
Note that if you should later change your mind and
decide to use the system you delete in this step, you can make
a new system disk copy from the DIGITAL-supplied kit disk.
The system disk contains an automated procedure, called
DELETESYS.CMD, that makes deleting the unused system easy.
Invoke this procedure using the following MCR command line:
>@[l,2]DELETESYS
~
This procedure deletes only the files that belong to the
system you are not presently running. The procedure asks you
to confirm that you have made a copy of your kit disk and that
you are sure that you want to delete the unused system.
6.
When the DELETESYS.CMD procedure finishes, the installation of
your pregenerated system is complete. Turn next to Section
5.4 for information on other system set-up operations.
The following is an example of invoking the DELETESYS.CMD procedure to
delete the (2,54] system:
>@[l,2]DELETESYS IBru
This procedure deletes those files specific to the currently non-active
system. This procedure assumes that you are now running the system that
you have made hardware bootstrappable.
Have you made a copy of your distribution kit? Y
IBrri
This procedure will delete the I- and D-space system in
[2,54], the FCS supervisor-mode library, and the tasks
linked to that library.
Are you sure that you want to continue? Y IBITJ
The following display shows the number of blocks used and the number
of blocks free before deleting anything.
DLl: has 2229. blocks free, 18251. blocks used out of 20480.
Largest contiguous space = 2229. blocks
719. file headers are free, 540. headers used out of 1259.
Deleting •••
The following display shows the number of blocks used and the number
now free for use on the system disk.
DLl: has 6720. blocks free, 13760. blocks used out of 20480.
Largest contiguous space = 3022. blocks
825. file headers are free, 434. headers used out of 1259.
End of DELETESYS.CMD
>
Turn next to Section 5.4 for information on other changes you may wish
to make to the system.
5-8
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
5.2.3
Copying the RL02 Kit Disk to an RDSl or Other Disk
This section describes how to copy the RL02 kit disk to an RD51 or
other DU-type disk.
(The DU-type disks include the RA60, RASO, RA81,
and RD51).
It also describes the procedure for deleting unused system
files to increase available space on the system disk.
There are three major steps in the process of
disk for use on a DU-type system disk.
copying
the
RL02
kit
appropriate
VMR
1.
Copy the RL02 kit disk to the DU-type system disk.
2.
Create a new system
command file.
3.
Bootstrap the system, save
hardware-bootstrappable.
image
file
using
the
the
system,
and
make
it
You need one blank DU-type disk to make a copy of the RL02 kit disk.
Use the procedure described in the following sections to copy the kit
disk.
(The output disk referred to in this section is the blank
DU-type disk to which you are copying the kit disk.)
5.2.3.1 Copying the Kit Disk - Use the following
the RL02 kit disk to the DU-type output disk:
procedure
to
copy
1.
Physically mount the kit disk and the output disk on their
respective drives.
If you are not familiar with the procedure
for physically mounting either of the disks, consult the
hardware documentation for the appropriate disk drives.
2.
Hardware bootstrap the kit disk.
(Consult DIGITAL Field
Service or your processor documentation for information on
hardware bootstrapping devices.)
This brings the pregenerated
system
into
memory.
The system start-up procedure is
automatically invoked and prompts you for the date and time.
Type CTRL/Z in response to the prompt to exit from the
start-up procedure. This procedure will be invoked again
after you copy your kit.
The following is an example of
bootstrapping a kit disk mounted in
drive
DLO: on
a
PDP/11-23-PLUS processor:
TESTING MEMORY
0256.KW
START? DL ~
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DL:=SY:
>RED DL:=LB:
>RED DL:=SP:
>MOU DL:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DL:[l,2]STARTUP
256.KW
Startup -
System:"PREGEN"
Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter the time and date (hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : mRL/Z)
5-9
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
If you cannot bootstrap your system, check your system's site
configuration documentation or consult DIGITAL Field Service
to see if your hardware has the standard CSR and vector
addresses for the RL02 drive controller. The CSR address must
be 174400(octal) and the vector 160(octal).
3.
Write-protect the kit disk, using the write-protect switch on
the drive. Software bootstrap the BRUSYS stand-alone system,
using the following command line:
>BOO [6,54]BRUSYS
~
This brings the BRUSYS system into memory. The BRUSYS system
prints an identification line on the console terminal, then
runs the Stand-Alone Configuration and Disk Sizing Program
(CNF) •
4.
Enter the device specifications in response to the CNF
prompts.
The "first device" is the drive containing the kit
disk; the "second device" is the drive containing the output
disk. For example:
Enter first device: DLO:
Enter second device: DUO:
5.
~
~
Press the RETURN key, then enter the date and time using the
TIM command.
Use the TIM command again to verify that you
entered the correct date and time. For example:
Hit RETURN and enter date and time as 'TIM HH:MM MM/DD/YY'
>TIM 10:17 04/01/83
>TIM ~
10:17:01 l-APR-83
!Bfil)
>
6.
Run the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) on your output disk.
For example, if your output device is DUO:, use the following
command sequence:
>RUN BAD
>
BAD> DUO:/LIST IBrn
BAD -- DUO: Total bad blocks= 0.
BAD> CTRL/Zl
If BAD finds that your output disk has bad blocks on it, the
blocks will be marked on the disk and will not be used again
by RSX-llM-PLUS. If your output disk has a large number of
bad blocks (for example, more than ten), or if block 0 is bad,
you should use another disk.
7.
Run the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU) to copy the kit disk
to the output disk. For example, if the kit disk is mounted
on DLO: and the output disk is an RDS! drive designated DUO:,
use the following command sequence:
5-10
~
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
>RUN BRU
(fill)
>
BRU>/VERIFY/MAX:9633/HEADERS:l204
From:
DLO: ~
To:
DUO: ~
BRU - Starting verify pass
~
BRU - Completed
BRU>
PRL/Zl
You should alter the values specified in the /MAX and /HEADERS
switches to suit the output disk volume. Use the appropriate
values from Table 5-1 for the arguments of the /MAX and
/HEADERS switches.
If BRU prints messages indicating that the verify operation
failed,
repeat this entire step.
If the verify operation
fails again, use a new output disk pack (or, if the output
disk is a fixed-medium device, have the drive serviced). If
the verify operation fails once again, it is likely that your
kit disk is defective and should be replaced.
When BRU finishes, the output disk contains a complete copy of
the DIGITAL-supplied kit disk.
Leave both disks spinning in
their respective drives, as they are both needed in the next
step.
Table 5-1
Disk Initialization Qualifier Values
Device
RA60
RASO
RA81
RD51
Value for /MAX
Switch
24617
14629
54815
9633
Value for /HEADERS
Switch
12308
7314
51699
1204
At this point, the system image on your output disk is neither
hardware- nor software-bootstrappable, since the DU: driver is not
loaded in the pregenerated system.
From this point onward, we will refer to the output disk
in this section as the system disk.
you
created
5.2.3.2 Creating the New System Image File Using VMR - The system
disk contains two unsaved system task files ([l,54]RSX11M.TSK and
[2,54]RSX11M.TSK). You will use one of these system task files to
create the new system image file.
In UFO [1,54] is an RSX-llM-PLUS system task file that does not take
advantage of instruction- and data-space hardware.
(For clarity, this
chapter refers to this system as "the [l,54] system.") This system is
intended primarily for the MICRO/PDP-11, PDP-11/23-PLUS, and PDP-11/24
processors, none of which incorporate instruction- and data-space
(abbreviated I- and D-space) mapping hardware.
5-11
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
The [1,54] system does not support user- or kernel-mode I- and D-space
tasks or supervisor-mode libraries.
Support for shadow recording,
console logging, the Software Performance Monitor (SPM-11), and parity
memory has also been omitted from this system.
The [1,54]
system can also run on the PDP-11/44 and
processors.
Note, though, that when you run the [1,54]
PDP-11/44 and PDP-11/70 processors, the system does not take
of
the I- and D-space mapping hardware incorporated
processors.
When you hardware bootstrapped your kit disk for copying,
system was the system that began running.
PDP-11/70
system on
advantage
in those
the
[1,54]
In UFD [2,54] is an RSX-llM-PLUS system image that does take advantage
of instruction- and data-space hardware.
(This chapter refers to this
system as "the [2,54] system.") This system can be run only on the
PDP-11/70 and PDP-11/44 processors, both of which incorporate I- and
D-space mapping hardware.
If you are running the pregenerated system
on either of these processors, you should use the [2,54] system.
The [2,54] system supports user- and kernel-mode I- and D-space tasks
and supervisor-mode libraries.
It includes all RSX-llM-PLUS Executive
features.
Both the [1,54] and [2,54]
systems support
Section 5.5.2.2 for a complete list).
the
same
devices
(see
Decide which of the systems is appropriate for your
hardware
installation. Then use the following procedure to create a new system
image file (RSXllM.SYS):
1.
Hardware bootstrap the kit disk.
This brings the [1,54]
system into memory. The start-up procedure is automatically
invoked and prompts you for the date and time.
Enter CTRL/Z
in response to the prompt to exit from the start-up procedure.
2.
Write-protect the kit disk, using the write-protect switch
the drive.
3.
If the system disk is any DU-type disk, install the
using the following MCR command line:
>INS $RCT
4.
Load the DU:
driver, using the following MCR command line:
~
Bring the DU-type disk drive on line, using the following
command line:
>CON ONL ALL
6.
task
~
>LOA DU:/PAR=GEN
5.
RCT
on
CON
~
Mount the target system disk.
For example, if the system disk
is device DUO:, use the following MCR command line:
>MOU DUO:PREGENNEDSYS (Bfl)
5-12
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
7.
Set your default UFD to [l,54] if you intend to use the [l,54]
system.
Set your default UFD to [2,54] if you intend to use
the [2,54] system.
For example, if you intend to use the
[2,54] system, use the following MCR command line:
filD
>SET /UIC=[2,54]
8.
Assign logical devices SY: and LB: to the system disk.
For
example, if your system disk is DUO:, use the following MCR
command sequence:
>ASN DU 0: =SY: (5D)
>ASN DUO: =LB: filD
9.
Delete the RSXllM.SYS file and create a new, unsaved one from
the RSXllM.TSK file.
Use the following MCR command sequence:
>DEL RSXllM.SYS;* filD
>PIP RSXllM.SYS/CO/NV/BL:l026.=RSXllM.TSK filD
10.
Run VMR using the DUVMR.CMD command
messages that are printed by VMR.
command sequence:
file.
Disregard any
Use the following MCR
>VMR @DUVMR filD
[Messages from VMR appear here]
When
VMR
finishes,
your
system
disk
software-bootstrappable, unsaved system image.
contains
5.2.3.3 Bootstrap and Save the New System Image - Use the
procedure
to
save
the
new
system
image
and
hardware-bootstrappable:
l.
a
following
make
it
Software bootstrap the new system image. For example, if your
system disk is DUO: and you just recreated the system image
in UFD [2,54], use the following MCR command line:
>BOO DUO: [2,54]
filD
This brings the [2,54]
system into memory and prints an
identification message on the console terminal.
For example:
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l
2.
BL15
Save the system and make it hardware-bootstrappable, using the
following MCR commmand line:
>SAV /WB filD
The system prints an identification message, and the system
start-up procedure is invoked and prompts you for the date and
time. Enter the current date and time.
5-13
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
The following is an example
hardware-bootstrappable:
of
making
the
[1,54]
system
>SAV /WB !Bfil)
OMO -- System disk being dismounted
OMO -- SYSTEM dismounted from DUO:
*** Final dismount initiated
10:50:12 *** DUO: -- Dismount complete
>
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.1 BL15
>RED DUO:=SY:
>RED DUO:=LB:
>RED DUO:=SP:
>MOU DUO:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DUO:[l,2]STARTUP
512.KW
System:"PREGEN"
Startup - Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter time and date (hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : 10:50:50 1-APR-83
3.
When the start-up procedure finishes, your
contains a hardware-bootstrappable system.
system
You must now delete the system image and files of the system that
do not intend to use.
disk
you
5.2.3.4 Deleting the Unused System from the System Disk - Use the
following
procedure
to
delete
the system you did not make
hardware-bootstrappable in the previous section:
1.
If you are not already running the hardware-bootstrappable
system, mount the system disk and hardware bootstrap it as you
did before.
This brings the hardware-bootstrappable system into memory.
The start-up command file is automatically invoked and prompts
you for the date and time. Type CTRL/Z in response to the
prompt to exit from the start-up command file.
2.
Delete the files that belong to the system that you chose not
to use.
Note that if you should later change your mind and
decide to use the system you delete in this step, you can make
a new system disk copy from the DIGITAL-supplied kit disk, and
perform the procedure detailed in the previous sections again.
5-14
***
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
The system disk contains an automated procedure
called
DELETESYS.CMD that makes deleting the unused system easy.
Invoke this procedure using the following MCR command line:
>@[l,2]DELETESYS
~
This procedure deletes only the files that belong
to
the
system you are not presently running.
The procedure asks you
to confirm that you are sure that you want to delete the
files.
3.
When the DELETESYS.CMD procedure finishes, the installation of
your pregenerated system is complete.
Turn next to Section
5.4 for information on other system set-up operations.
The following is a sample of a
terminal
trace produced by a
user
invoking the DELETESYS.CMD procedure to delete the [1,54] system:
>@[l,2]DELETESYS (Bfil)
This procedure deletes those files specific to the currently non-active
system. This procedure assumes that you are now running the system that
you have made hardware bootstrappable.
Have you made a copy of your distribution kit? Y (Bff)
This procedure will delete the non-I- and D-space system
in [1,54], the FCS resident library, and the tasks linked
to that library.
Are you sure that you want to continue? y
~
The following display shows the number of blocks used and the number
of blocks free before deleting anything.
DUO: has 949. blocks free, 18251. blocks used out of 19200.
Largest contiguous space = 949. blocks
664. file headers are free, 540. headers used out of 1204.
Deleting •••
The following display shows the number of blocks used and the number
now free for use on the system disk.
DUO: has 5450. blocks free, 13760. blocks used out of 19200.
Largest contiguous space = 4335. blocks
770. file headers are free, 434. headers used out of xxxx.
End of DELETESYS.CMD
>
Your system disk now contains a
single, hardware-bootstrappable
system.
Turn next to Section 5.4 for information on other changes you
may wish to make to the system.
5-15
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
5.3
AN EXAMPLE OF COPYING THE SYSTEM
The following
is an example terminal trace produced by a
user
bootstrapping the RL02 kit disk on a PDP-11/23-PLUS system, copying
the kit disk to another RL02 disk, deleting the unused [2,54]
system,
and determining the current system crash device:
@
TESTING MEMORY
0512.KW
START? Y
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DL:=SY:
>RED DL:=LB:
>RED DL:=SP:
>MOU DL:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DL: [l,2]STARTUP
512.K
System:"PREGEN"
Startup - Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter time and date (hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : AZ
>BOO [6,54]BRUSYS
RSX-llM/RSX-llM-PLUS Standalone Copy System V02
RSX-llM/RSX-llM-PLUS Standalone Configuration and Disk Sizing Program
Valid switches are:
/CSR=nnnnnn to change the default device CSR
/VEC=nnn to change the default device vector
/FOR=n to change the default magtape formatter number
/DEV to list all default device CSR and vectors
Enter first device: DLO:
Enter second device: DLl:
Hit RETURN and enter date and time as 'TIM HH:MM MM/DD/YY'
>TIM 13:34 06/06/83
>TIM
13:34:01 6-JUN-83
>RUN BAD
>
BAD>DLl:/LIST
BAD -- DLl: Total bad blocks= O.
BAD> AZ
5-16
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
>RUN BRU
>
BRU>/VERIFY
From:
DLO:
To:
DLl:
BRU
Starting verify pass
BRU
Completed
BRU> AZ
>
[Here system is halted, then system disk is hardware bootstrapped again]
@
TESTING MEMORY
0512.KW
START? DLl
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BLlS
>RED DLl:=SY:
>RED DLl:=LB:
>RED DLl:=SP:
>MOU DLl:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DL1:[1,2]STARTUP
512.K
System:"PREGEN"
Startup - Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter time and date (hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : AZ
>@[l,2]DELETESYS
This procedure deletes those files specific to the currently non-active
system.
This procedure assumes that you are now running the system that
you have made hardware bootstrappable.
Have you made a copy of your distribution kit? Y
This procedure will delete the I- and D-space system in
[2,54], the FCS supervisor-mode library, and the tasks
linked to that library.
Are you sure that you want to continue? Y
The following display shows the number of blocks used and the number
of blocks free before deleting anything.
DLl: has 2229. blocks free, 18251. blocks used out of 20480.
Largest contiguous space = 2229. blocks
719. file headers are free, 540. headers used out of 1259.
5-17
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
Deleting •••
The following display shows the number of blocks used and the number
now free for use on the system disk.
DLl: has 6720. blocks free, 13760. blocks used out of 20480.
Largest contiguous space = 3022. blocks
825. file headers are free, 434. headers used out of 1259.
End of DELETESYS.CMD
>
[System is halted again; system disk is mounted and bootstrapped on DLO:]
@
TESTING MEMORY
0512.KW
START? DLO
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DL:=SY:
>RED DL:=LB:
>RED DL:=SP:
>MOU DL:"PREGENNEDSYS"
>@DL:[l,2]STARTUP
512.K
System:"PREGEN"
Startup - Initializing
RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN system startup procedure
Step
1 - Setting system time and date
Please enter time and date (hh:mm dd-mmm-yy)
Time and date : 13:30 6-JUN-83
Step
2 - Deallocating DECnet communications executive
System configuration does not include DECnet
Step
3 - Installation of DAPRES
System configuration does not include RMS DECnet (DAPRES)
Step
4 - Allocating checkpoint space
System checkpoint file size is 1024. blocks
Step
5 - Loading auxiliary device drivers
No auxiliary driver will be loaded
Step
6 - Establishing device configuration
All available devices will be configured on-line
(Note: Depending upon system configuration,
this may take up to a,minute to complete)
5-18
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
Step
7 - Starting error logging
Error logging will be started
Step
8 - Setting terminal characteristics
Terminal:TTO: Type:LA120 Speed:Fixed Case:NOLOWER
Step
9 - Creating command interpreters
Step 10 - Starting Resource Accounting
Step 11 - Starting Queue Manager
The Queue Manager (QMG) will be started
Step 12 - Starting batch processors
1 batch processor will be started
Step 13 - Starting Print processors
No print processors will be started
Step 14 - Installing applications
No applications will be installed
Step 15 - Invoked auxiliary startup file
There is no auxiliary startup file
Step 16 - Finished
*************************************************************************
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
S y s
t
e m C u s t o m i z a t i o n
After installing your system, you will probably wish to
perform the following customizations:
1) Add user accounts - See Chapter 2 of the RSX-llM/M-PLUS
System Management Guide.
2) Modify the system startup parameter file, which is the
data file which controls the startup procedure. This
file ([l,2]SYSPARAM.DAT) should be modified to reflect
your particular hardware/software configuration. See
Chapter 5 of the RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and
Installation Guide.
3) You may wish to modify the following text and command
files to suit your installation
File
Purpose
[l,2]SHUTUP.CMD
Invoked by SHUTUP when taking down
the system to perform system
dependent shutdown tasks
[l,2]QMGSTOP.CMD
Invoked by SHUTUP to stop the Queue
Manager and spooling subsystem
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[l,2]LOGIN.TXT
Displayed on user's terminal when
*
logging in
*
Displayed at the beginning of each
[l,2]BATCH.TXT
*
batch log file
*
**************************************************************************
5-19
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
*************************************************************************
*
*
Installation of the RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN
*
*
*
*
distribution media has completed successfully
*
*
***************************************************************************
>
>SET /CRASH DEVICE
CRASH DEVICE=DLl:
5.4
SYSTEM SETUP INFORMATION
You now have a running RSX-llM-PLUS system.
without further customization or tailoring.
You can
use
the
system
More likely, though, you will want to perform some further tailoring
of the system to adjust system parameters, edit system files, make use
of peripheral devices, or install layered products
and
other
applications.
The following sections describe various tasks that you probably will
want to perform to prepare the system for general use or for your
application.
5.4.1
Changing the Start-Up Procedure to Suit Your System
Whenever you bootstrap your system disk, the system start-up procedure
is automatically invoked.
This procedure, controlled by a command
file named STARTUP.CMD,
performs
various
housekeeping
tasks,
determines ~he peripheral configuration, and brings all available
peripheral devices on-line. After the start-up procedure finishes,
you can begin to use your system.
In order for the automatic system start-up procedure to be able to
properly identify the peripheral devices connected to your processor,
those devices must be at DIGITAL-standard CSR and vector addresses.
If you have a PDP-11/23-PLUS or PDP-11/24 packaged system, your
devices are probably at the standard CSR and vector addresses. If you
are not sure about whether your system is configured properly, consult
DIGITAL Field Service.
If, after the start-up procedure has finished, you are unable to use a
particular peripheral device connected to your system, you should
check to see if that device appears at the standard CSR and vector
addresses.
If it does not, you must connect the device to the
standard CSR and vector addresses if you wish to use it with the
pregenerated system.
You may wish to make changes to the start-up procedure to suit your
hardware and your requirements.
For example, if you install DECnet,
you can change the start-up procedure so that DECnet will be started
up automatically each time you bootstrap the system. You might also
wish to change the start-up procedure to set the characteristics of
the terminals connected to your system, or to install applications.
This section explains how the start-up procedure works, and shows
how to edit the procedure to suit your needs.
5-20
you
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
5.4.1.1 How the Start-Up Procedure Works - The start-up procedure is
controlled by [l,2]STARTUP.CMD. This file invokes [l,2]READCON.CMD,
which then reads statements in
the
configuration
data
file
{[l,2]SYSPARAM.DAT).
STARTUP.CMD uses the data obtained to generate
the correct set of commands to perform
various
tasks.
The
configuration
file
contains easy-to-read, functionally oriented
statements so that you can make changes easily, without searching
through the documentation for the proper MCR commands.
For example,
the following is an example of a statement in the configuration file:
DECNET RMS=YES
This statement instructs the start-up file to install the RMS Data
Access Package, which is used with DECnet for remote file access. The
start-up procedure issues the following MCR command:
INS [l,l]DAPRES
5.4.1.2 Description of the Configuration File
Statements - This
section describes the syntax and function of each of the statements
contained in the configuration file
{[l,2]SYSPARAM.DAT).
Using the
descriptions in this section, you can edit the configuration file to
suit your needs.
If any of the statements are omitted from the configuration file,
start-up procedure uses a default value for that statement.
default is indicated following the description of each statement.
the
The
The following are descriptions of
configuration file:
in
the
This statement defines part of the text string printed by
start-up
procedure.
The
start-up
procedure
prints
identification message in the following format:
the
an
the
statements
contained
SYSTEM=string
'string' startup procedure
In the preceding format example, 'string' is the
the equal sign in the statement.
Default:
text
following
SYSTEM=RSX-llM-PLUS Pregenerated system
DECNET= yes/no
This statement controls whether memory space normally reserved
for the DECnet Communications Executive {CEX) is deallocated, and
whether
[l,2]NETSTART.CMD is invoked
during
the
start-up
procedure.
If you are installing DECnet on your system, you
should specify DECNET=YES.
If you are not installing DECnet on
your system, you should specify DECNET=NO so that the memory
space will be deallocated and the size of the dynamic storage
region (pool) will be increased.
If you specify DECNET=YES, the Communications Executive is not
deallocated
and [l,2]NETSTART is invoked.
See the DECnet
documentation for more information on CEX and DECnet.
See
Section 5.6.5 for more information on the memory space reserved
for CEX.
Default:
DECNET=NO
5-21
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
DECNET_RMS=yes/no
This statement controls whether the DECnet RMS Data Access
Package
is
installed.
If
you
specify
DECNET_RMS=YES,
[l,l]DAPRES.TSK is installed when the start-up procedure is
invoked. DAPRES.TSK is the resident library necessary to support
transparent network file access via RMS. See the DECnet and the
RMS documentation for more information on DAPRES.TSK.
Default:
DECNET RMS=NO
DAPRES=yes/no
This statement is equivalent to DECNET RMS.
Default:
DAPRES=NO
CONFIGURE=filename
This statement specifies a command file to be invoked before all
peripheral devices are brought on line with the CON ONLINE ALL
command.
If you include this statement, the command file
specified is invoked before the start-up procedure issues the CON
ONLINE ALL command. You can use this command file to include
peripheral
configuration commands to dynamically alter the
hardware configuration.
If you do not need to include any
additional configuration command, you may omit this statement, or
specify CONFIGURE=NONE.
See Chapter 15 of the RSX-llM/M-PLUS
System Management Guide for more information on conf 1gurat1on
commands.
Default:
CONFIGURE=NONE
CON_ONLINE_ALL=yes/no
This statement controls whether the start-up procedure issues a
CON ONLINE ALL command to attempt to bring all configured devices
on line.
If you specify CON ONLINE ALL=NO, the CON ONLINE ALL
command normally issued by the start-up procedure is suppressed.
See Chapter 15 of the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide for
more information on the CON command.
Default:
CON ONLINE ALL=YES
QUEUE_MANAGER=YES/NO
This statement controls whether the Queue Manager
(QMG)
is
installed.
If you specify QUEUE MANAGER=YES, the start-up
procedure installs the Queue Manager tasks and starts QMG.
This
statement does not control batch processors or spooled printers;
see the BATCH PROCESSORS and PRINTER statements, respectively.
See Chapter -7 of the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide for
more information on setting up QMG. See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Batch
and Queue Manual for information on using queues and QMG.
Default:
QUEUE_MANAGER=YES
5-22
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
CHECKPOINT SPACE=n
This statement specifies, in decimal disk blocks, the size of the
system checkpoint file that is allocated using the MCR ACS
command.
Default:
CHECKPOINT SPACE=l024.
BATCH PROCESSORS=n
This statement specifies the number of batch processor tasks to
be initialized.
If you specify BATCH PROCESSORS=2, two batch
processor tasks, named BAPO and BAPl, are-initialized during the
start-up procedure.
See Chapter 7 of the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System
Management Guide for more information on setting up batch
processors.
See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Batch and Queue Manual for
information on using batch processors. ~~- -~ ~~Default:
BATCH PROCESSORS=!.
LONG_TEXT=yes/no
This statement, along with
the
COMMANDS
and
PARAMETERS
statements,
controls the messages printed by the start-up
procedure.
For each major step it performs, the start-up
procedure
prints
some or all of the following types of
information:
Step
n - description of step
explanatory text
parameters from configuration file
the actual command used to perform the step
For example:
Step
4 - Allocating checkpoint space
Allocating system controlled checkpoint space
System checkpoint file size is 256. blocks
ACS SY:/BLKS=l024.
In the example, the "Allocating system controlled checkpoint
space" line is displayed only if the configuration file contains
the LONG TEXT=YES statement.
Default:
LONG TEXT=YES
COMMANDS=yes/no
This statement controls whether the actual command issued by the
start-up procedure to perform a step is printed on the terminal.
In the example given with the LONG TEXT statement, the line
reading "ACS SY:/BLKS=l024." is printed only if the configuration
file contains the COMMANDS=YES statement.
Default:
COMMANDS=NO
5-23
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
PARAMETERS= yes/no
This statement controls whether a line indicating the values
specified along with each statement are printed on the terminal.
In the example given with the LONG TEXT statement, the line
reading "System checkpoint file siz~ is 256. blocks" is printed
only if the configuration file contains the PARAMETERS=YES
statement.
Default:
PARAMETERS=YES
QUIET=yes/no
This statement is a combination of the LONG TEXT, COMMANDS, and
PARAMETERS statements.
If you specify QUIET=NO, the start-up
procedure acts as if you had specified YES to the LONG_TEXT,
COMMANDS, and PARAMETERS statements.
If you specify QUIET=YES,
the start-up procedure acts as if you had specified NO to all
three
statements.
The QUIET statement is provided as an
equivalent of the .ENABLE QUIET directive in the Indirect Command
Procedure.
To avoid possible confusion, you should not include the QUIET
statement in the configuration file if that file contains any or
all of the LONG TEXT, COMMANDS, or PARAMETERS
statements.
Specify QUIET=YES- or QUIET=NO only if you wish all three
statements to be set to YES or to NO.
Use the individual
statements if you wish to pick and choose.
Default:
There is no default for this statement.
START FILE=f ilename
This statement specifies a command file to be used as a secondary
start-up command file.
If you include this statement, the
command file specified is invoked as a nested indirect command
file, after the start-up procedure has completed its normal
steps. You can use this secondary command file to perform
additional start-up functions.
If you do not wish to perform any
additional start-up functions, you may omit this statement, or
specify START_FILE=NONE.
See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations
Manual for more information on using the Indirect Command
Procedure.
Default:
START FILE=NONE
DRIVER=dd:
This statement is used to load auxiliary I/O drivers.
For
example, if you specify DRIVER=DU:
in the configuration file,
the DU: device driver is loaded before the start-up procedure
brings all devices online with the CON ONLINE ALL command. You
may include this statement in the configuration file as many
times as necessary to load the drivers you desire.
Each
statement causes the start-up procedure to load a
single
auxiliary driver.
See Section 5.5.2.2 for a list of the
DIGITAL-supplied device drivers on the pregenerated kit. You may
also use this statement to load a user-supplied device driver.
Default:
No auxiliary drivers are loaded.
5-24
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
TERMINAL=ddnn,type,speed,upper/lower
This statement is used to set terminal characteristics.
One
TERMINAL statement must be included in the configuration file for
each terminal in your system. For each terminal, several options
must be specified.
The first option {ddnn:} is the terminal number {for example,
TT3}.
The second option {type}
is the terminal type {for
example, VTlOO}. You may specify any terminal type that is
accepted by the MCR SET /TERMINAL command.
{See the SET command
in RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual for a complete list of
supported
terminals.}
The
third
option
(speed}
is the
transmit/receive speed {for example, 9600} for the terminal if it
is interfaced through a variable-speed multiplexer
{DZll or
DZVll), or FIXED if it is not. The fourth option (upper/lower)
is LOWER for terminals that support lowercase characters, or
NOLOWER for terminals that do not support lowercase characters.
There may be any number of TERMINAL
configuration
file.
Each
TERMINAL
characteristics for one terminal.
Default:
statements
in
statement
sets
the
the
TERMINAL=TTO,LA120,FIXED,LOWER
SET_OPTIONS=ddnn,/switchl/switch2 ••• /switchn
This statement is used to set terminal characteristics not
included in the TERMINAL statement {for example, whether the
terminal supports form feeds} •
One corresponding
TERMINAL
statement must be included in the configuration file for each
SET OPTIONS statement. You may specify any number of switches
for-each SET OPTIONS statement.
The first option {ddnn} is a terminal number corresponding to a
TERMINAL statement already included in the configuration file.
The second and subsequent options {/switchl/switch2 ••• /switchn}
may be any switch that may be used with the MCR SET command.
For
the second and each subsequent option, the start-up procedure
issues an MCR SET command.
For example:
SET=TT5,/FORMFEED/SLAVE
Including the above statement in the configuration file causes
the start-up procedure to issue the following MCR commands:
SET /FORMFEED=TT5:
SET /SLAVE=TT5:
You may include any number of SET statements in the configuration
file.
Each SET OPTIONS statement sets additional characteristics
for one terminal. See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual
for a complete list of switches for the MCR SET command.
Default:
No SET statements are provided.
PRINTER=ddnn,form,fla9
This statement specifies spooled printer characteristics.
For
each printer in your system, one PRINTER statement must be
included in the configuration file.
You must specify several
options for each PRINTER statement.
5-25
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
The first option (ddnn) is the device name of the printer
(for
example, TTS or LPO). The second option (form) is' the form type,
specified in the format FORM:n. The third option (flag)
is the
number of flag pages, specified in the format FLAG:n.
The
start-up procedure issues commands to initialize a spooled
printer
for
each
PRINTER
statement you include in the
configuration file.
You may include any number of PRINTER
statements in the configuration file.
Each PRINTER statement
sets the characteristics for one printer.
The following is an example of a typical PRINTER statement:
PRINTER=LPO,FORM:O,FLAG:l
Default:
No spooled printers are established.
APPLICATION=description,f ilename
This statement specifies a command file to be invoked to install
an application program or package.
It also allows you to specify
descriptive text that is printed on the terminal by the start-up
procedure as this statement is processed.
If you include this statement, the start-up procedure invokes the
command file specified as a nested indirect command file.
You
can use this command file to install languages or
other
application packages.
The first option (description) is a text string that describes
the application that is to be installed. This text string is
printed on the console terminal if the PARAMETERS=YES statement
is included in·the start-up configuration file.
The text string
is printed in the following format:
Installing 'description' application
The second option (filename) is the file specification of the
command
file
that
contains the commands to install the
application. If you do not specify a file type, the start-up
procedure defaults to a file type of .INS for the command file.
The following is an example of using the APPLICATION statement:
APPLICATION=Fortran-77,LB:[l,2]F77.INS
The start-up procedure would process the statement in the example
by invoking the F77.INS as a nested indirect command file.
If you do not wish to install any applications, you may omit this
statement, or specify APPLICATION=NONE. See the documentation
that accompanies the application program
or
package
for
information on the commands necessary to install that particular
application.
Default:
No applications are installed.
CLI=cliname
This statement specifies which Command Language Interpreter (CLI)
is to be used when the start-up procedure nests to another
command file for the START FILE and APPLICATION statements.
You
5-26
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
may specify only MCR or DCL as options for this statement.
Note
that all of the commands in the start-up procedure (STARTUP.CMD
and subsidiary files) are sent to MCR, regardless of the option
you specify for this statement.
Default:
CLI=MCR
LOGOUT=yes/no
This statement specifies whether the start-up procedure logs
the console terminal after it finishes.
Default:
off
LOGOUT=NO
ERROR_LOG=yes/no
This statement specifies whether the start-up procedure starts
the Error Logger.
Note that if you specify COMMANDS=NO, no
messages are displayed when error logging is started, regardless
of whether the Error Logger has been successfully started.
See
the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Error Logging Manual for information on using
the Error Logger.
Default:
ERROR LOG=YES
in
the
The following is a list of the statements contained
([l,2]SYSPARAM.DAT)
that is supplied on your kit
configuration file
disk:
SYSTEM=RSX-llM-PLUS PREGEN
DECNET=NO
DAPRES=NO
CONFIGURE=NONE
CON ONLINE ALL=YES
CHECKPOINT-SPACE=l024.
QUEUE MANAGER=YES
BATCH-PROCESSORS=!.
LONG TEXT=NO
COMMANDS=NO
PARAMETERS=YES
ERROR LOG=YES
STARTFILE=NONE
TERMINAL=TTO,LA120,Fixed,NOLOWER
;DRIVER=LP:
;PRINTER=LPO,FORM:O,FLAG:l
;TERMINAL=TT1,LA50,Fixed,NOLOWER
;SET=TTl,/FORMFEED
;PRINTER=TTl,FORM:O,FLAG:l
CLI=MCR
LOGOUT=NO
The statements preceded by a semicolon (;) are ignored by the system
start-up procedure. You can edit the configuration file to remove the
semicolons and activate these statements.
~.4.1.2.1
Start-Up Procedure Error Messages - If while it is reading
the configuration file READCON.CMD encounters an error in a statement
included in the configuration file, the start-up procedure prints a
5-27
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
message on the console terminal
identifying the statement that
contains the error. The message appears in the following format:
READCON
[filespec] contains an invalid configuration option.
The illegal option was:
[text of the erroneous statement]
This option specification was ignored.
In the preceding format example, 'filespec' is the file
of the configuration data file.
specification
If for some reason the configuration data file cannot be accessed, the
default values are assumed.
5.4.2
The Account File
An account file is supplied on the kit disk.
It
accounts, one privileged and one nonprivileged:
UIC:
Account name:
Password:
[1,1]
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
UIC:
Account name:
Password:
[200,1]
USER
USER
contains
two
user
You should change the passwords to these accounts as the first step in
setting up an account file, to preserve the security of your system.
The [200,l] account is supplied for use in conjunction with
warm-up
session
presented in the Introduction to RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS.
See that manual for more information.
See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System
using ACNT.
5.4.3
Management
Guide
for
information
the
and
on
Login and Batch Job Message Files
When you log in, the system prints the login information file
[l,2]LOGIN.TXT on your terminal. You should edit this file to provide
installation news and notices to system users.
See the description of
the HEL/LOG command in the RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual for
information on the use of the LOGIN.TXT file.~If you intend to use the batch processor in your system, you should
edit [l,2]BATCH.TXT, which is included at the beginning of each batch
job log.
5.4.4
Help Files
Short-form information on the use of many RSX-llM-PLUS commands,
utilities, and features is available on line through the HELP command.
You can add help files to provide users with installation-specific
information.
5-28
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
The HELP files supplied with your system are located in UFO [1,2]
on
your system disk. See the RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual for a
description of the HELP command and the help file format.
In UFO [200,l] on your system disk are introductory files used with
the warm-up session for new users presented in the Introduction to
RSX-llM and RSX-llM-PLUS manual. New users coming onto the system can
use the~-account with the UIC [200,1] that has been provided in the
account file supplied with your distribution kit to follow along with
the warm-up session.
UFO [200,1]
also contains two sample device drivers and their
associated data bases that you or system programmers may find
interesting (XXDRV.MAC, XXTAB.MAC, BMDRV.MAC, BMTAB.MAC).
5.4.5
Installing the RMS-11 Tasks, Utilities, and Libraries
RMS-11 V2.0 is included on the pregenerated kit disk.
The RMS
segmented library (RMSRES, and RMSLBA through RMSLBF) and all of the
RMS utilities are already installed in the system image.
No further
installation is needed, unless you install DECnet on your system and
you want to use the RMS remote access facilities.
See Section 5.4.1
for information on installing the RMS remote access package (DAPRES),
For more information on RMS-11, see
Notes and RMS-11: An Introduction.
5.4.6
the
RSX-llM-PLUS/RMS-11
Release
Installing and Using System Tasks
The system disk contains the standard complement of privileged
tasks.
Many of the system tasks are already installed
pregenerated system image.
The file [l,2]SYSVMR.CMD contains the commands
install tasks in the pregenerated system.
that
were
system
in the
used
to
Many of the nonprivileged system tasks are supplied in "xxxFSL.TSK"
and "xxxRES.TSK" versions.
These tasks reside in UFO [3,54] on the
kit disk.
When you use the DELETESYS.CMD procedure to delete an unused system,
the system tasks associated with the unused system are also deleted.
When you delete the [1,54] system, the tasks of the form "xxxFSL.TSK"
are deleted; when you delete the [2,54] system, the tasks of the form
"xxxRES.TSK" are deleted.
Tasks with names of the form "xxxFSL.TSK" are built to link to FCSFSL,
the FCS supervisor-mode library.
If you are using the [2,54] system,
you should use these tasks.
Tasks with names of the form "xxxRES.TSK" are built to link to FCSRES,
the FCS resident library.
If you are using the [1,54] system, you
should use these tasks.
The system library [l,l]SYSLIB.OLB also contains ANSI-compatible FCS
routines.
Tasks that cannot link to FCSRES can be built with these
FCS routines in their task images.
A library of non-ANSI FCS routines,
[l,l]NOANSLIB.OLB, is also
provided for building tasks that do not require ANSI support. A task
built to link to this library is smaller than the same task built to
link to the system library, yet retains full FCS functionality.
5-29
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
5.4.7
Installing Layered Products
If you intend to include any DIGITAL layered products in your system,
see the appropriate layered product installation documentation for
specific instructions.
5.4.8
Installing Other Device Drivers
If you wish to use devices for which a device driver
is not already
loaded in the system, you must load the appropriate device driver.
Since the Executive is pregenerated,
thus making
it impossible to
incorporate resident drivers, all drivers and data bases in this
system are loadable. This saves pool space and makes it possible for
you to load only the drivers you need into the system image.
Note,
however, that once they are loaded, data bases cannot be unloaded
without rebootstrapping the system (or, if the data base was loaded
using VMR, without recreating the system image with VMR).
All the device drivers supplied have been built to load in the DRVPAR
partition.
The size of DRVPAR, however, is sufficient only for the
drivers that are supplied loaded into the system (see Section 5.5.2.2
for a list of these drivers) • If you use the MCR LOA command to load
additional drivers, the system returns the "Partition DRVPAR too
small" error message.
When you use the DRIVER statement in the configuration file to load an
auxilary driver, the system start-up procedure loads the driver in the
GEN partition.
If you wish to load a driver by hand, you can load the driver into the
GEN partition using the following command line:
LOA xx:/PAR=GEN
5.5
USING THE SYSTEM
Your RSX-llM-PLUS system is now ready for use.
You should consider making a backup copy of the system disk so that
you will be able to recover quickly from any accidental corruption of
your system disk, without having
to make a new copy from the
DIGITAL-supplied kit disk and repeating the setup procedures detailed
in the previous sections. You can make a hardware-bootstrappable copy
of your system disk quickly and easily using the Backup and Restore
Utility (BRU).
Chapter 7 of the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Utilities Manual
provides a description of BRU, along with examples of making backup
copies of system disks.
5.5.1
Finding Out More About the System
This chapter tells you how to prepare your pregenerated system for
use.
Once you have done that, you will need other information on
operating and adjusting your system.
If you are not already familiar with RSX-llM-PLUS, you should read the
Introduction to RSX-llM and RSX-llM-PLUS and perform the on-line
terminal session.
5-30
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
If you are to be the manager of this system, you should read the
RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management Guide to become familiar with the
system management utilities you will need to use.
The quickest way to find information on a specific subject is to use
the Master Index contained in the RSX-llM-PLUS Information Directorl
and Master Index. The Master Index consists of all the individua
manual indexes merged into a comprehensive reference to the entire
documentation set.
5.5.2
Detailed Description of Pregenerated Executive Features
This section contains detailed descriptions
limitations of the pregenerated systems.
of
the
features
and
5.5.2.1 Features of the Pregenerated Systems - The
pregenerated
systems provide many of the Executive and system featu~e~ available on
the full RSX-llM-PLUS distribution kits, without requ1r1ng that you
perform a system generation before using your system.
The following is a list of the Executive options, support, and system
parameter values included in both the [1,54] and the [2,54] systems:
•
Task headers out-of-pool
•
ICB pool size= 128(decimal) words
•
DECnet
•
Resource Accounting
•
QMG and batch processor
•
FCP = FCPLRG
•
File windows in secondary pool
•
Default virtual terminal unit buffer size= 120(decimal)
•
Maximum virtual terminal unit buffer size= 184(decimal)
•
Unsolicted input time-out= 30(decimal) seconds
•
Crash notification device CSR address = 177564
•
Crash device and unit number = DLl:
•
Memory size= 256(decimal) K words
•
Floating point processor
•
System clock is not programmable
Note that the crash device can be changed dynamically in
pregenerated system using the MCR SET /CRASH_DEVICE command.
Section 5.6.2.
5-31
the
See
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
The following is a list of Executive features included in
system but not included in the [1,54] system:
•
Executive data space support
•
User data space support
•
Software Performance Monitor (SPM-11)
•
Shadow recording
•
Console logging
•
Executive Debugging Tool (XDT)
the
[2,54]
The [2,54] system has system tasks built to link to
supervisor-mode library.
FCSFSL,
the
FCS
The [1,54] system has system tasks built to link to
resident library.
FCSRES,
the
FCS
5.5.2.2 Hardware Supported - The following loadable drivers
are
already loaded in the pregenerated systems provided on the kit disk:
DL
TT
CO
VT
RD
NL
RL02 driver
Terminal driver
Console driver
Virtual terminal driver
Reconfiguration driver
Null device driver
The following loadable drivers are included on the pregenerated system
kit disk, but they are not loaded in the pregenerated systems:
DD
DY
DU
IP
MS
LP
LA
TU58 driver
RX02 driver
RA60, RASO, RA81, RX50/RD51 driver
IP-11 driver
TSV05, TSll, TU80 driver
Line printer driver
LPAll-K driver
If you wish to use any of the drivers that are not already loaded into
your system, you must load them yourself. You can do this easily
using the DRIVER statement in the system start-up procedure.
See
Section 5.4.1 for information on using the start-up procedure to load
drivers. See also Section 5.4.8 for restrictions on adding drivers.
NOTE
If the DU driver is loaded, the RCT task
must be installed. See the RSX-llM-PLUS
System
Management
Guide
for
more
information on the RCT task.
Because source code of the drivers or their data bases is not included
in
the pregenerated system kit, you cannot change the device
configuration by any of the standard methods. To provide support for
a wide variety of terminal configurations, the pregenerated system kit
5-32
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
contains an autoconfiguration task that determines what kinds of
terminal interfaces are connected to the UNIBUS or LSI-11 bus and then
generates data bases for them. The autoconfiguration task is invoked
by the system start-up procedure.
The autoconfiguration task finds all the terminal interfaces connected
to your processor (OLll/OLVll and OZll/OZVll interfaces). To add a
user-supplied driver for any of these interfaces, load the driver and
its data base using VMR, or use the CONFIGURE statement in the system
start-up procedure to invoke a command file
that
loads
the
user-supplied driver and its data base before the autoconfiguration
task is run. The autoconfiguration task ignores any interfaces it
finds that are already represented by a data base.
The autoconfiguration task matches terminal interfaces it finds
against data bases by checking whether the CSR address contained in
offset K.CSR is the same as the CSR of the respective interface.
Thus, you must establish the proper value for K.CSR in the driver data
base source code for user-supplied device drivers.
The autoconfiguration task also determines the line frequency
50 Hz) and sets the proper number of clock ticks/second.
5.5.2.3 Tasks Supplied - The system
complement of privileged system tasks.
disk
contains
the
(60
or
standard
Many of the nonprivileged system tasks are supplied in "xxxFSL.TSK"
and "xxxRES.TSK" versions.
These tasks reside in UFO [3,54] on the
kit disk.
When you use the OELETESYS.CMO procedure to delete an unused system,
the system tasks associated with the unused system are also deleted.
When you delete the [1,54] system, the tasks of the form "xxxFSL.TSK"
are deleted; when you delete the [2,54] system, the tasks of the form
"xxxRES.TSK" are deleted.
Tasks with names of the form "xxxFSL.TSK" are built to link to FCSFSL,
the FCS supervisor-mode library. If you are using the [2,54] system,
you should use these tasks.
Tasks with names of the form "xxxRES.TSK" are built to link to FCSRES,
the FCS resident library.
If you are using the [1,54] system, you
should use these tasks.
The system library [l,l]SYSLIB.OLB also contains ANSI-compatible FCS
routines.
Tasks that cannot link to FCSRES can be built with these
FCS routines in their task images.
A library of non-ANSI FCS routines, [l,l]NOANSLIB.OLB, is also
provided for building tasks that do not require ANSI support. A task
built to link to this library is smaller than the same task built to
link to the system library, yet retains full FCS functionality.
5.5.2.4 Restrictions - Certain restrictions and limitations apply
the pregenerated RSX-llM-PLUS system.
•
to
The pregenerated system includes two RSX-llM-PLUS operating
systems.
The first runs on processors that support Executive
data space, user data space, and supervisor-mode libraries
(POP-11/70 and POP-11/44). This system resides in UFO [2,54]
5-33
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
on the kit disk, and is referred to in this chapter as "the
[2,54]
system." The second system runs on processors that do
not
include
instructionand
data-space
hardware
{MICRO/PDP-11,
PDP-11/23-PLUS,
PDP-11/24).
This syst7m
resides in UFO [1,54] on the kit disk, and is referred to in
this chapter as "the [1,54] system." The [1,54] system as
supplied on the kit disk is hardware-bootstrappable.
After copying the kit disk and bootstrapping the system
appropriate for your processor, you can delete the files for
the system that you are not using to gain more disk space for
your own applications.
•
On the [1,54] system, pool space is more limited than
[ 2, 54] sys tern.
•
The [1,54] system does not include supervisor-mode library
support, and so the "xxxFSL.TSK" versions of tasks, which link
to supervisor-mode FCS libraries, cannot be run.
•
The [1,54]
system does not include support for
shadow
recording, console logging, software correction or logging of
memory parity errors, or XDT.
•
The User Environment Test Package {UETP) is not included on
the kit disk. The start-up procedure verifies that the system
is working properly and prints a confirmation message each
time the system is bootstrapped.
•
Executive source files and object libraries are not included,
nor are assembly and task-build command files used for
reassembling or retaskbuilding any of the system components.
•
Since Executive source files are not provided, patching is not
possible, nor can the normal Update procedure be used to apply
the latest corrections to the pregenerated system
kit.
Updates issued for the pregenerated system kit consist of
entirely new RSX-llM-PLUS systems, which have been updated and
rebuilt.
•
The device configuration is limited to the following
types, number of controllers, and number of units:
Device
Type
Number of
Controllers
DD
DL
DU
DY
IP
LA
LP
MS
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
on
the
device
Number
of Units
2
4
4
2
1
1
1
1
Many of the nonprivileged system tasks are supplied in
xxxFSL.TSK and xxxRES.TSK versions. These tasks reside in UFO
[ 3 , 5 4 ] on the k i t di s k •
If you are using
xxxFSL.TSK tasks.
the
[2,54]
system,
you
should
use
the
If you are using
xxxRES.TSK tasks.
the
[1,54]
system,
you
should
use
the
5-34
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
5.6
•
The Error Logging universal libraries provided on the kit disk
([l,6]ERRLOG.ULB and ERRLOGETC.ULB) have been "tuned" to suit
the complement of devices configured into the pregenerated
systems.
•
The SYSGEN procedure is not included or necessary.
CHANGING YOUR SYSTEM
While you cannot modify the features of your RSX-llM-PLUS Executive,
you can alter certain aspects of your system.
This section provides
information on the changes you can make and what you must know to make
them.
5.6.1
Recovering Additional Disk Space
As you use the pregenerated system, you may find that there are
several files on the disk that you never use. These unused files may
be deleted from the system disk in order to make more disk space
available for your tasks and applications. Should you at some point
in the future have a need for tasks you have deleted, you can copy
them from the original kit disk.
5.6.2
Changing the Crash Dump Device
You can change the system crash device
/CRASH_DEVICE commands.
using
the
MCR
and
VMR
SET
Both the [1,54] and [2,54] systems are supplied with the crash device
set to DLl:.
If you copy the RL02 kit disk to a DU-type system disk,
though, when you create a new system image file using DUVMR.CMD,
the
crash device is set to DUO:.
If the current system crash device is not included in your system, or
if the crash device is the device on which you are running the
pregenerated system, you should change the system crash device.
The following is an example of using the MCR SET /CRASH DEVICE command
to check the current crash device in a running system:
>SET /CRASH DEVICE
CRASH DEVICE=DUO:
~
In the example, the response printed by the system indicates that
current crash device is DUO:.
the
You can use the MCR SET /CRASH DEVICE command to change the crash
device in the presently running system.
For example, to change the
crash device to DLl:
in the running system, use the following MCR
command line:
>SET /CRASH_DEVICE=DLl:
~
You can put this command in an auxiliary start-up command file so that
it will be issued each time the system is started.
5-35
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
If you wish to change the crash device permanently, you must use the
VMR SET /CRASH DEVICE command to change the system image file.
The
following is an example of using VMR to change the system crash device
to DUl: in the [1,54] system image file:
>SET /UIC=[l,54] ~
> ASN LB: =SY: ~
> VMR 00)
Enter filename: RSXllM. SYS 00)
VMR>SET /CRASH DEVICE=DUl: 00)
VMR>SET /CRASH-DEVICE 00)
VMR> CRASH DEVICE=DU 1:
VM R> (CTRL/Z) NOTE
Both the VMR and MCR SET /CRASH DEVICE
commands allow you to specify only DLand DU-type devices as the system crash
device.
Both commands will not allow
you to make the current system device
the crash device.
5.6.3
Loading Drivers
If you wish to use devices for which a device driver is not already
loaded in the system, you must load the appropriate device driver.
Since the Executive is pregenerated, thus making it impossible to
incorporate resident drivers, all drivers and data bases in this
system are loadable. This saves pool space and makes it possible for
you to load only the drivers you need into the system image. Note,
however, that once they are loaded, data bases cannot be unloaded
without rebootstrapping the system (or, if the data base was loaded
using VMR, without recreating the system image with VMR).
All the device drivers supplied have been built to load in the DRVPAR
partition.
The size of DRVPAR, however, is sufficient only for the
drivers that are supplied loaded into the system (see Section 5.5.2.2
for a list of these drivers) • If you use the MCR LOA command to load
additional drivers, the system returns the "Partition DRVPAR too
small" error message.
When you use the DRIVERS statement in the configuration file to load
an auxilary driver, the system start-up procedure loads the driver in
the GEN partition.
If you wish to load a driver by hand, you can load the driver into the
GEN partition using the following command line:
LOA xx:/PAR=GEN
For more information on
incorporating
loadable
drivers
into
RSX-llM-PLUS, see the RSX-llM-PLUS Guide to Writing an I/0 Driver.
5-36
PREGENERATED RSX-llM-PLUS KITS
5.6.4
K-Series Laboratory Peripherals and LPAll-K Controller
To enable you to generate K-Series support routines, UFO [200,200]
on
the kit disk contains the indirect command file SGNKLAB.CMD.
For
information on invoking and using this file,
see the RSX-llM/M-PLUS
I/O Drivers Reference Manual.
Also included in [200,200] is the indirect command file BLDLAINIT.CMD.
This file is used to generate support routines for the LPAll-K
Laboratory Peripheral Accelerator. To generate the routines, invoke
the command file using the following command line:
@[200,200]BLDLAINIT
If your system does not have K-Series peripherals or
controller, you may delete the contents of UFD[200,200].
an
LPAll-K
For additional information on K-Series devices and the LPAll-K
controller, see the RSX-llM/M-PLUS I/O Drivers Reference Manual.
5.6.5
DECnet Pool use
The pregenerated system image includes memory space reserved for
installing the DECnet Communications Executive (CEX).
If you do not
intend to install DECnet on your system, the portion of memory that is
reserved for installing CEX is not needed and can be deallocated,
thereby increasing the size of pool. The start-up configuration file
supplied with the kit disk includes the statement DECNET=NO, which
deallocates the memory space that would have been used by CEX.
If you intend to install DECnet on your system, you must edit the
start-up configuration file and change the DECNET statement to read
DECNET=YES. See Section 5.4.1 for more information on the system
start-up procedure and the DECNET statement.
5.6.6
DECnet Interface Modification
The [l,54]RSXMC.MAC symbol definition file supplied on the kit disk
defines the processor type as a PDP-11/23-PLUS.
The [2,54]RSXMC.MAC
file supplied on the kit disk defines the processor type as a
PDP-11/44.
The DECnet NETGEN procedure uses RSXMC.MAC
to
obtain
system
configuration parameters. Therefore, if the processor type listed in
RSXMC.MAC is a PDP-11/23-PLUS, only LSI-11 bus-compatible devices are
allowed for the DECnet interface.
If you are performing a DECnet NETGEN and you intend to use the [1,54]
system on a processor other than the PDP-11/23-PLUS, you must alter
the value of the symbol R$$TPR in [l,54]RSXMC.MAC before you start the
NETGEN, so that UNIBUS compatible devices may be used for the DECnet
interface.
For example, if you are running the [1,54]
system on a PDP-11/24
processor, you must alter the following line in [l,54]RSXMC.MAC:
R$$TPR="ll/23-PLUS
Use an editor to change the line to read:
R$$TPR="ll/24
5-37
APPENDIX A
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
During the Choosing Executive Options and
Choosing
Peripheral
Configuration sections, SYSGEN asks a series of questions about the
target system's Executive options and peripheral devices. You should
gather the data SYSGEN requires before you begin the system generation
procedure. This appendix contains a series of worksheets that aid in
collecting and organizing the necessary information.
You should make copies of the worksheets and fill them out as you read
through Chapter 3 of this manual.
Files containing copies of the
worksheets are located in UFD [200,200] on the distribution kit.
The worksheets and their file names are as follows:
WRKEXECOP.TXT
Executive and processor options worksheet,
which
describes
the various RSX-llM-PLUS
Executive and processor options about which
SYSGEN asks questions
WRKMASSCO.TXT
MASSBUS controller configuration worksheet,
which
describes the configuration of the
MASSBUS controllers
WRKMASSDR.TXT
MASSBUS drive configuration worksheet, which
describes the MASSBUS disk and magnetic tape
drives
WRKUNIBCO.TXT
UNIBUS controller configuration
worksheet,
which
describes the configuration of the
controllers attached to the UNIBUS
WRKUNIBDR.TXT
UNIBUS drive configuration worksheet, which
describes the configuration of the UNIBUS
devices
Each worksheet contains a title, spaces for the name of the target
system,
the name of the person filling out the sheet, and the date.
Because you may require more than one copy of some of the worksheets,
spaces are provided for numbering those sheets.
At the bottom of each worksheet is a sample line that illustrates
to fill in each space.
how
Be sure to have the completed worksheets on
system generation procedure.
the
A-1
hand
as
you
begin
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
E X E C U T I V E
A N D
P R 0 C E S S 0 R
0 P T I 0 N S
System:
Author:
Date:
Page:
1
Always print long explanation:
Yes
No
Saved answer file for Executive:
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Autoconfigure host system:
Yes
No
Override Autoconfigure results:
Yes
No
Yes
No
Executive data space support:
Yes
No
User data space support:
Yes
No
Task headers out-of-pool support:
Yes
No
Executive saved answer file name:
Saved answer file for peripherals:
PeripQerals saved answer file name:
Saved answer file for
nonprivileged task builds:
Nonprivileged task-build
saved answer file name:
Is this a PREPGEN:
Disk drive containing
target system disk:
Processor type:
Full-functionality Executive:
(Worksheet continues on Page 2)
A-2
of
3
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
E X E C U T I V E
AN D
P R 0 C E S S 0 R
0 P T I 0 N S
System:
Author:
Date:
Page:
2
Supervisor-mode library support:
Yes
No
FCS resident library support:
Yes
No
Loadable drivers/data bases:
Yes
No
!CB pool size:
of
3
(dee imal words)
Communications products support:
Yes
No
SPM-11 support:
Yes
No
(up to 6 chars)
System name:
Shadow recording support:
Yes
No
Console driver support:
Yes
No
Accounting support:
Yes
No
Batch processor:
Yes
No
Queue Manager:
Yes
No
DCL/alternate CL! support:
Yes
No
FCP type:
FCPLRG
FCPMDL
File windows in secondary pool:
Yes
No
Virtual terminal support:
Yes
No
Default virtual terminal
unit buffer size:
Maximum virtual terminal
unit buffer size:
{Worksheet continues on Page 3)
A-3
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
E X E C U T I V E
A N D
P R 0 C E S S 0 R
0 P T I 0 N S
System:
Author:
Date:
Page:
3
Yes
No
of
3
Unsolicited terminal input time-out:
Executive Debugging Tool (XDT) support:
Crash notification device CSR address:
Crash device mnemonic:
Crash device physical unit number:
Total system memory:
(in K words)
Floating point processor support:
Yes
No
Programmable system clock:
Yes
No
Yes
No
Interrupts per second:
50 Hz power:
A-4
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
MA S S B U S
C 0 N T R 0 L L E R
C 0 N F I G U R A T I 0 N
System:
Author:
Date:
Mixed MASSBUS:
Name
RHA
RHB
RHC
RHD
Device
Type
No
Yes
---Configuration--vector
CSR
------- ------ ------------------ ------ ------------------ ------ ------------------ ------ ------------
Example:
RHC
DB
254
176700
A-5
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
MA S S B US
D R I V E
C 0 N F I G U R A T I 0 N
System:
List devices in this order:
Author:
DB:
DR:
DS:
EM:
MM:
Drive
Name
RP04/05/06 disk
RM02/03/05/80/RP07 disk
RSOJ/04 disk
MLll disk
TU16/45/77/TE16 magtape
Drive
Type
Physical
Unit No.
RP06
2
Date:
Sheet:
---controller Connections--Port B
Port A
Example:
DB3:
of
RHO
A-6
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
U N I B U S
C 0 N T R 0 L L E R
C 0 N F I G U R A T I 0 N
System:
Author:
Date:
Sheet:
---Controller Information--Log ical
Type
Drives
Name
( 1 ines)
-------------------------
---------------------
--------
RKll
3
----------------------
--Configuration Information-Vector
CSR
------ --------------- --------------- --------------- ----------
Example:
OKA
-------
------ --------
of
220
177404
------ ----------
A-7
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS
U N I B U S
D R I V E
C 0 N F I G U R A T I 0 N
System:
Author:
List drive units for multiple
drive UNIBUS devices.
Date:
Sheet:
Drive
Name
---------------------------------
Drive
Type
Physical
Unit No.
-------- --------
-------- --------------- --------------- --------
--Controller Connections-Port A
Port B
-------- --------------- --------------- --------------- --------
Example:
DKO:
RKOS
of
DKB
0
A-8
APPENDIX B
RSX-llM-PLUS DEVICES
This appendi~ contains tables of RSX-llM-PLUS devices.
Table B-1
lists for each device the device mnemonic, the respective device
controller mnemonic, the controller and device names, and the generic
description of each device. Pseudo devices are listed in Table B-2.
The manner in which the controller and device names are listed
indicates which controllers can be used with which devices.
For
example:
RH11/RH70
RH70
RM02
RM03
RM05
RM80
RP07
The above entries indicate that the RM02 can be used with either an
RHll or RH70 controller, but the RM03, RM05, RM80, and RP07 can be
used only with an RH70 controller.
Table B-1
RSX-llM-PLUS Devices
Device
Mnemonic
Controller
Mnemonic
Controller
Name
CR
CR
CMll
CRll
CT
CT
TAll
TU60
Cassette tape
DB
RH
RH11/RH70
RP04
RPOS
RP06
Disk
DD
DD
DLll
TU58
DECtape I I
DK
DK
RKll
RKOS
RKOSF
Disk
DL
DL
RLll/RLVll
RLOl
RL02
Disk
DM
DM
RK 611/RK7 ll
RK06
RK07
Disk
Device
Type
Device Description
Card reader
(continued on next page)
B-1
RSX-UM-PLUS DEVICES
Table B-1 (Cont.)
RSX-llM-PLUS Devices
Device
Mnemonic
I
Controller
Mnemonic
Device
Type
Controller
Name
Device Description
DP
DP
RPll
RP02
RPR02
RP03
Disk
DR
RH
RH11/RH70
RH70
RM02
RM03
RM05
RM80
RP07
Disk
DS
RH
RH11/RH70
RS03
RS04
Disk
DT
DT
TCll
TU56
DECtape
DU
DU
RQDXl
RX50
RD51
Floppy disk
Disk
UDA50
RC25
RA60
RASO
RA81
Disk
DX
DX
RXll
RXOl
Floppy disk
DY
DY
RX211
RX02
Floppy disk
EM
RH
RH11/RH70
MLll
Semi co nd uc tor disk
emulator
IP
IP
IPll
Industrial control
system
LA
LA
LPAll
Lab peripheral
accelerator
LP
LP
LA180
LNOl
LPll
LA180
LNOl
LPOl
LP02
LP04
LP05
LP06
LP07
LP14
LP25
LP26
LP27
LSll
LVOl
LSll
LVll
Printer
LR
LR
PCLll
Parallel communications
link (receiver)
LT
LT
PCLll
Parallel communications
link (transmitter)
(continued on next page)
B-2
RSX-llM-PLUS DEVICES
Table B-1 (Cont.)
RSX-UM-PLUS Devices
Device
Mnemonic
Controller
Mnemonic
MM
RH
MS
MS
MT
MT
Controller
Name
Device
Type
RH11/RH70
(with
TM02/TM03
formatter)
Device Description
TU16
TE16
TU45
TU77
Magnetic tape
TSll
TU80
TSV05
Magnetic tape
TMll/TMAll/TMBll
Magnetic tape
TElO
TUlO
TUlOW
TS03
PP
PP
PCll
Paper tape reader
and punch
PR
PR
PRll
Paper tape reader
TT
YL
YH
YJ
YZ
DLll/DLVll
DHll/DHVll
DJll
DZll/DZVll
Terminal
XM
XM
DMCll
DMRll
Synchronous interface
xw
xw
DUPll
Synchronous interface
Table B-2
RSX-llM-PLUS Pseudo Devices
Device Description
Pseudo Devices
CL
co
LB
NL
RD
SP
SY
TI
VT
Console listing device
Console output device
Library device
Null device
Reconfiguration driver
Spooling device
Default system device
Terminal input device
Virtual terminal
B-3
APPENDIX C
GENERAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM TUNING
This appendix provides you with some basic information on the
RSX-llM-PLUS system.
This information is not necessary to perform a
system generation but is useful in helping you to make better
decisions regarding the system features you choose.
The topics
covered here will help you understand the interaction of various
system components and help you to optimize your system's operation
following a system generation.
C.l
GENERAL SYSTEM FEATURES
C.1.1
Memory Partitions
Partitions are contiguous areas of physical memory that are managed
and dynamically allocated to tasks by the Executive. All partitions
in RSX-llM-PLUS are system controlled. As many tasks as will fit are
allowed to run simultaneously in a partition. Tasks are allocated a
contiguous area in the partition.
Each time a task is activated, it is merged into a priority-ordered
queue of tasks waiting to be loaded into the partition. To allocate
the partition (disregarding checkpointing), the Executive examines the
current state of the partition to determine whether there is enough
contiguous space to load the highest priority task currently in the
partition wait queue.
To do this, the Executive examines a list of
allocated areas in the partition and calculates the size of the gaps
that exist between allocated areas. The list of allocated areas is
ordered by physical memory address, which allows a simple computation
of gap size.
The first gap that is big enough is allocated to the
task, and its Partition Control Block (PCB) is merged into the list of
allocated areas.
If a big enough gap cannot be found, the Executive attempts to fit the
task into the partition by checkpointing neighboring stopped tasks and
tasks of lower priority.
If the task cannot be brought in by
checkpointing,
then
the Executive requests the shuffler task.
Checkpointing and shuffling in system-controlled
partitions
is
discussed later
in this appendix. Each time a task exits and frees
memory in the partition, the Executive examines the partition wait
queue and tries to allocate memory to the highest-priority waiting
task.
C.1.2
Checkpointing
RSX-llM-PLUS supports checkpointing. Its objective is to preempt a
lower-priority task when a higher-priority task can be brought in to
make use of the freed memory. This optimizes the use of computer
system resources while maintaining a priority scheduling discipline.
C-1
GENERAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM TUNING
Checkpointing in a partition occurs as the result of a memory
allocation failure.
That is, the Executive tries to allocate a
contiguous area of a partition to a task and it cannot find an
unoccupied memory area of sufficient size.
In this case, the
Executive reexamines the list of allocated areas in the partition to
determine whether it can form a free space of sufficient size by
checkpointing one or more neighboring tasks. Each task considered for
checkpointing must be of a lower priority, it must be checkpointable,
and it must have checkpointing enabled.
The Executive scans the list from the beginning, looking for a series
of neighboring tasks {possibly separated by gaps of free space) , where
each task satisfies the checkpoint criteria.
If the aggregate sum of
the memory occupied by such a series of tasks and free space satisfies
the memory requirement for the higher-priority task, the tasks are
checkpointed and the higher-priority task is allocated the released
memory.
If such a series of neighboring tasks cannot be found,
the
Executive
calls
the
shuffler
task to try to bring in the
highest-priority waiting task.
The shuffler task does this by
compacting
memory
and
checkpointing
a
sufficient number of
lower-priority tasks that are not necessarily neighbors in the
partition.
C.1.3
Memory Compaction
The shuffler is a privileged task designed to compact space in a
partition when a memory allocation failure occurs.
For a complete
description and discussion of the shuffler, see the RSX-llM/M-PLUS
System Management Guide.
C.1.4
Disk Swapping
Disk swapping allows tasks of equal {or close)
priority to share a
portion of memory, when such tasks cannot be loaded simultaneously.
Swapping is accomplished by varying task priorities so that tasks of
equal {or close) priority checkpoint each other periodically.
Swapping does not affect the checkpointing algorithm. For example, a
task can only checkpoint another task of lower priority, never one of
equal or higher priority. When swapping is enabled, however, the
priority of tasks resident in memory, with respect only to the
allocation of memory, varies with time.
The task's priority with
respect to all of the other system resources does not change.
There are two parameters that control the swapping algorithm:
Swapping interval
This parameter determines how often the
Executive
scans the partition lists to
modify the memory priority of
resident
tasks. A typical swapping interval might be
about one-half second.
Swapping priority
range
This is the absolute value of the range
through which a task's priority varies from
its installed priority. A typical value is
5. This value would cause a task's memory
priority to vary from P+S to P-5, where P is
the priority set for the task when it was
installed.
C-2
GENERAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM TUNING
NOTE
These parameters are set by commands in
the SYSVMR command file and can be
changed by using the MCR SET or VMR SET
command.
The key element of the swapping algorithm is a byte in the task's
header in which the swapping priority of the task is maintained. In a
system employing swapping, the Executive determines
whether
a
nonresident task should checkpoint a resident task by comparing the
running priority of the nonresident task with the sum of the running
and swapping priorities of the resident task. Each time a task is
read into memory as the result of an initial task load or checkpoint
read, the swapping priority byte in the task header is initialized.
At each swapping interval, the swapping priority of each resident task
is reduced by one until it reaches its lowest priority. If there is a
possibility that checkpointing within a main partition might occur
based on the new priorities, the Executive executes its partition
allocation algorithm for that partition.
When specifying the swapping parameters, consider the following:
C.1.5
1.
From the time a task is loaded into memory, the average time
for the task to be checkpointed by another task of the same
running priority is roughly equal to the sum of the two
swapping parameters.
2.
Tasks of the same running priority tend to ~et the same
amount of time in memory. Tasks whose running priorities
differ by less than the swapping priority range tend to
receive different amounts of time in memory, with the higher
priority tasks getting more time.
3.
Input is a factor in determining when checkpointing will
occur.
Editors and other interactive tasks normally should
run at a higher priority than more compute-bound tasks.
However, when an editor is waiting for terminal input, it can
be checkpointed by any lower-priority task. As soon as its
input is complete, the editor can come back into memory by
checkpointing the lower-priority task. It is possible in a
highly interactive system that the naturally high checkpoint
rate reduces the need for the Executive swapping algorithm to
service many tasks of equal priority.
Round-Robin Scheduler
The round-robin scheduler ensures that all tasks of equal priority
share the CPU.
Round-robin scheduling does not affect the standard
processor competition among tasks of different priorities.
It also
does not affect tasks that are not in the specified priority range.
The round-robin scheduler affects only those tasks in memory (tasks
that are in the Active Task List) • Tasks that are checkpointed or in
the partition wait queue are not affected.
C-3
GENERAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM TUNING
C.1.6
Dynamic Memory (Pool)
During the course of its execution, the
varying needs for dynamic memory.
Rather
of memory for each requirement, the
dynamically allocated memory space called
demands are made, the Executive allocates
pool using a first-fit algorithm. When
needed, the Executive releases it back
memory.
RSX-llM-PLUS Executive has
than allocate a fixed amount
Executive makes use of a
dynamic storage or pool. As
the necessary memory from
allocated space is no longer
to the pool of available
Pool requirements for a system are dependent on the configuration,
application, and degree of system loading.
Enough pool must be
available to satisfy peak demands; otherwise, a degradation in system
performance will occur.
Since nearly all Executive functions require pool, a system can
exhaust pool when system activity is very heavy.
This can happen if
too large a number of tasks are installed, if too many volumes are
mounted, or if a number of other conditions are present. When this
happens, the system does not appear to have crashed, but is not
functioning
normally (for example, if there are data lights on the
front of the processor, they will be flickering, but the system will
not accept input).
Under these conditions, the system cannot output
error messages because the Executive requires pool space to perform
I/O.
Once a system exhausts pool, it may have to be rebootstrapped.
You can avoid this condition in two ways. First, you should take the
maximum amount of pool compatible with your system configuration
during system generation. The command file SYSVMR does this for you
automatically during system generation.
You can then monitor pool
with the Resource Monitoring Display (RMD) and take appropriate action
before pool gets too low.
Second, you can write tasks to monitor
potential pool problems.
Information on the support provided in
RSX-llM-PLUS for such tasks, and information on a task called PMT that
monitors pool is located in the RSX-llM/M-PLUS System Management
Guide.
C.1.7
Parity Support
RSX-llM-PLUS supports parity memory.
If the Executive detects a main
memory parity error within a task's area, the Executive attempts to
declare a parity error AST to that task.
If the parity error occurs
within a common region, the Executive attempts to declare a parity
error AST to each task mapped to the shared region.
In either case,
if a task to which a parity error AST is declared does not have an AST
recovery routine, the Executive aborts the task.
The Executive locks into memory the region in which the error
found.
This is done to prevent that space from being reused.
Executive then invokes the FIXER task, which probes the region
reduces it to only the segment containing the error.
was
The
and
When the Executive aborts a task, it issues a message noting that
fact. When a parity error is detected within the Executive, or if the
Executive detects a parity error when looking into a task, the system
attempts to print the following message before halting:
***EXEC PARITY ERROR STOP***
For cache parity errors, the half of the cache in which the parity
error was detected is disabled if two errors in the same half are
detected within the same minute.
If less than one error per minute is
detected and the system recovers by reading through to main memory,
C-4
,
GENERAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM TUNING
the cache is not disabled. With either one or both halves of the
cache disabled, the system still operates, but in a degraded state and
errors will be logged.
C.2
INCREASING FILE SYSTEM THROUGHPUT
C.2.1
Multiple File Systems
For systems with several high-performance disks, you can increase file
system throughput by mounting each volume with a separate FllACP.
See
the RSX-llM/M-PLUS Command Language Manual for
information on the
commands used to mount volumes with separate FllACPs.
C.2.2
File System Options
Many options of the IN! and MOU commands
The more important options are:
performance.
•
can
change
system
MOU /EXT or IN! /EXT (default extension block count}
When a disk file is created or extended, the file system
allocates a default number of additional disk blocks to the
file.
This default is ordinarily five blocks.
For example,
if a
task writes 12 blocks of data in a file, three 5-block
allocations are made,
and the remaining three blocks are
unused.
You can use the /EXT switch to change the default
number of disk blocks allocated.
Each allocation of disk blocks requires a number of disk
accesses to find the free space on the disk, allocate the
space, and mark the space used in the file header. Therefore,
increasing this default above five blocks decreases the number
of file-system overhead disk accesses when writing files and
increases the number of wasted disk blocks (blocks allocated
but not used}. On the other hand, decreasing this default
below five blocks decreases the number of wasted disk blocks
and increases the number of file-system overhead disk accesses
performed when extending files.
A task can override this default extension block count when
creating or extending a file.
In addition, you can use the
PIP /TR switch to free unused space at the end of a
file.
Application tasks can override the files system defaults and
perform more optimal file extensions for the processing they
perform. You can use these techniques, possibly with the /EXT
switch, to provide more optimal disk allocation.
•
!NI /INDX (index file position)
The position of the index file in large volumes is important
because of seek time.
Rather than having the index file at
the beginning or end of a volume, position it (either by block
number or the MID key word) at the midpoint of the volume.
In
the case of small volumes, such as a floppy disk, putting the
index file at the midpoint limits the maximum size of the work
files on the disk. In this case, put the index file at the
beginning or end of the volume.
C-5
GENERAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM TUNING
•
MOU /LRU or
searches)
INI /LRU
(memory
buffers
to
speed
directory
/LRU specifies the number of buffers to be maintained in
memory.
The buffers contain only the most recently accessed
directories.
The default is three
buffers.
If
your
application is working with a small number of directories, the
defaults may be sufficient. However, if many directories are
being scanned frequently, access time will improve if you
specify a higher number than three. However, more buffers use
more pool.
•
MOU /WIN or IN! /WIN (mapping pointer count)
WIN specifies the number of mapping pointers to be allocated
for file windows.
The default is seven pointers.
The
pointers point to contiguous blocks of the file on the disk.
You can optimize access to fragmented files by increasing the
number of pointers. However, additional pool may be freed by
reducing the number of pointers (when you initialize the disk)
for files with little or no fragmentation.
Note that the MCR SAV command has a MOU keyword that allows
you to use the MOU options on the system disk. For more
information on these keywords, refer to the RSX-llM/M-PLUS MCR
Operations Manual.
C.3
DYNAMIC CHECKPOINT SPACE ALLOCATION AND TASK EXTENSION
You can improve memory usage in large systems by making all or most of
the tasks in the system checkpointable. In doing so, you can greatly
reduce the system disk requirements.
Dynamic checkpoint
space
allocation allows all task checkpointing operations to use common
system checkpoint files.
Thus,
you
can
install
tasks
as
checkpointable without having to allocate checkpoint space in the task
image file.
Furthermore, you can run multiple
copies
of
a
checkpointable task. Coupled with task checkpointing during terminal
input and output, the number of tasks that absolutely require memory
residency can be reduced.
The MCR ACS command establishes and eliminates system checkpoint
files.
One checkpoint file may be established for each mounted
Files-11 volume. When the Executive requires checkpoint space, it
favors the devices in the allocation order of the checkpoint files.
Therefore, if you issue multiple ACS commands, you should specify the
fastest devices first.
For example, a system may have both an RS04 fixed-head disk and an
RP06 movable-head disk. The system manager may determine that limited
checkpoint space (400 blocks) can be allocated on the RS04. To ensure
that checkpoint allocation failures never occur, you should allocate
additional space (2000 blocks) on the RP06.
As the Executive allocates and deallocates checkpoint space, the
checkpoint files can fill up and become fragmented. When possible,
freed-up checkpoint space is reused. However, depending on the sizes
of the checkpoint files and the amount of fragmentation, the Executive
may fail to find space to fulfill a checkpoint request. In this case,
a task that is intended to get into memory does not get in until
additional memory or checkpoint space becomes available.
If a critical task must get into memory, it may be unacceptable for a
checkpoint operation to fail.
To ensure that any given task can
always be checkpointed, allocate checkpoint space in the task image
C-6
GENERAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM TUNING
file. There can be no checkpoint allocation failures in partitions in
which all active tasks have preallocated checkpoint space.
A task
that has checkpoint space preallocated in its task image file is
checkpointed to this space only if the Executive fails to find space
for the task in the checkpoint files.
The Extend Task directive allows tasks to increase or decrease their
memory allocation during execution. The system utilities, MACRO and
Task Builder, use the Extend Task
directive
to
maintain
a
memory-resident symbol table until the table reaches the maximum size
specified by the system manager. These utilities can be installed
with an increment as low as 2048 {decimal) to reduce their initial
memory requirements. For large assemblies and task-builds, these
utilities
increase their size to the operator-set maximum for
increased speed and return to their original size before processing
the next command.
C.4
'
OVERLAPPED I/O COMPLETION
Overlapped I/O completion support causes the execution of
I/O
completion code for each I/O request to be postponed until the next
request has been initiated. If I/O requests are in the driver's
queue, this action causes the Executive to complete the I/O processing
while the physical device services the next request.
A minor side
effect of this feature is that multiple I/O requests to the same
device may complete in an order other than the issued order.
C-7
APPENDIX D
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
This appendix contains examples of terminal output from two different
system generations. You can use these examples as guides to what you
should see on your terminal as you proceed through a
system
generation.
In both of the examples, the SYSGEN command file is invoked, the
PREPGEN option selected, and saved answer files are created. Then
SYSGEN is invoked again, using the saved answer files created during
the PREPGEN.
Section D.l contains a terminal trace from a simple, stand-alone
system generation.
The user chose the Full-functionality Executive
and used Autoconfigure to determine his hardware configuration.
If
you are generating an RSX-llM-PLUS system for the first time, you
should choose these options also, and your terminal trace should be
similar to Example 1.
Section D.2 contains a terminal trace from a more complex system
generation, performed on line.
This user chose the User-tailored
Executive and entered device information manually.
(Autoconfigure
cannot
be
used
if
you
are
performing
an on-line system
generation.) She did not choose to have the full explanation printed
before each question, but pressed the ESC key to print the full
explanation for questions on which she needed additional information.
In these cases, the SYSGEN procedure printed the full explanation,
then reprinted the question.
D-1
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
D.l
A SAMPLE STAND-ALONE SYSTEM GENERATION
»>B MS
RSX-llM/RSX-llM-PLUS Standalone Copy System V02
RSX-llM/RSX-llM-PLUS Standalone Configuration and Disk Sizing Program
Valid switches are:
/CSR=nnnnnn to change the default device CSR
/VEC=nnn to change the default device vector
/FOR=n to change the default magtape formatte~ number
/DEV to list all default device CSR and vectors
Enter first device: /DEV
Device
------
DB
DK
DL
DM
DP
DR
DU
MF FOR=O
MM FOR=O
MS
MT
CSR
------
176700
177404
174400
177440
176714
176300
172150
175400
172440
172522
172522
vector
-----254
220
160
210
300
150
154
260
224
330
320
CSR Status
---------Present
Not Present
Present
Present
Present
Not Present
Not Present
Not Present
Not Present
Present
Present
Enter first device: MSO:/VEC=224
Enter second device: DMO:
Hit RETURN and enter date and time as 'TIM HH:MM MM/DD/YY'
>TIM 11:20 4/19/83
>TIM
11:20:05 19-APR-83
>
>RUN BAD
>
BAD>DMO:/LIST
BAD -- DMO: Total bad blocks= O.
BAD>"Z
>
>RUN BRU
>
BRU>/DENSITY:l600/VERIFY/MAX:l0567/HEADERS:l654
From:
MSO:
To:
DMO:
BRU - Starting Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MSO:
D-2
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
BRU - Starting verify pass Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - Completed
AP
CONSOLE
>>>H
17777707 001340
>>>B DM
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BLlS
>RED DM:=SY:
>RED DM:=LB:
>RED DM:=SP:
>MOU DM:"RSXllMPBLlS"
>@[2,54]BASTART
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
384.KW
System:"Baseline"
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l Distribution Kit
This is the baseline system of the RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l
distribution kit. This system contains an assortment of
devices and may in fact be of some use on your target
system. The main purpose of the baseline system, however,
is to provide a working system environment which may be
used to generate a custom-tailored operating system for
your target hardware. We will now provide instructions
to guide you through the startup procedure.
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
It is important to specify the correct date and time.
Use the format "DD-MMM-YY HH:MM".
>* Please enter the date and time [S]: 19-APR-83 11:40
>TIME 19-APR-83 11:40
>;
>;
Now allocate checkpoint space for use by system utilities.
>;
>ACS SY:/BLKS=l024.
>;
>;
>;
>;
The following information is necessary for this command file
to correctly access the remainder of the distribution kit.
>* Did you receive your M-PLUS distribution kit on magnetic tape? [Y/N]: Y
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
Please enter the name of the magnetic tape drive, which should
still contain the distribution tape. The name is of the form:
MMl: or
MSO: etc •••
>* Which tape drive contains the distribution tape [S]: MSO:
>;
D-3
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>CON
>CON
>CON
>CON
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
We will now set the CSR of the controller that will be
used to bring in the remainder of the distribution kit to
the standard value. If your controller is not at this address
it will be necessary for you to manually configure the system
by issuing the appropriate CON commands. Answer Yes to the
manual configuration question to do this. If your controller
is at the standard address, you do not have to do a manual
configuration.
SET
SET
SET
SET
RHC
MTA
MSA
MSA
CSR=l60000
CSR=l60000
CSR=l72522
VEC=224
We will now bring online all devices which were generated intv
this baseline image and which exist in your hardware system.
If there is hardware in your system occupying a control
register address which conflicts with a standard DIGITAL
register assignment, it is possible that the "CON ONLINE
ALL" command might cause a system crash. This is because
a DIGITAL device driver is attempting to manipulate foreign
hardware or the CSR address assignments in your system are
different from those assumed in this baseline configuration.
On the first pass through this file please answer No to the
following question. If such a mismatch exists and a crash
does occur, rebootstrap the baseline system and answer Yes
to this question. Instructions will then be provided to help
circumvent the problem.
>;
>* Do you need to do manual configuration? [Y/N] :
>;
>CON ONLINE ALL
>;
>;
>;
Prepare to bring in the remainder of the distribution kit
>* Is your target system disk an RK07? [Y/N]: Y
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
The RK07 pack onto which you have just loaded your RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l
system now contains all the files that will be needed by the SYSGEN
procedure. There is another backup set on the distribution tape
that contains all of the other sources shipped as part of the normal
distribution. This backup set will be restored to another RK07 pack
which you must provide. This pack can also be used during SYSGEN to
hold the Executive listing and maps since they will not fit on the
target system disk.
Please supply the name of an RK07 drive that contains an empty
pack to receive the source files.
NOTE: All current data on this pack will be lost.
>* Enter the name of RK07 to receive the sources [S]: DMl:
>;
>;
>;
We will now mount the RK07 pack that will receive the sources.
>MOU DMl:/FOR
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
The
bad
the
bad
pack in DMl: can now be formatted and/or checked for
blocks if necessary.
It is generally not necessary to format
pack unless you know that it is not properly formatted. The
block check is highly recommended.
>*Do you wish to format the disk in DMl:? [Y/N]:
>;
D-4
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>*Do you wish to run the Bad Block Locator on DMl:? [Y/N]: Y
>;
>INS $BAD
>BAD DMl:/LIST
BAD
DMl: Bad block
BAD
DMl: Bad block
BAD
DMl: Bad block
BAD
DMl: Bad block
BAD
DMl: Bad block
BAD
DMl: Total bad
found found found found found blocks=
>;
>;
LBN=
LBN=
LBN=
LBN=
LBN=
5.
19669.
32170.
47796.
52353.
52634.
We will now mount the tape in MSO: for access by BRU.
>;
>MOU MSO:/FOR/DENS=l600
>;
>;
Ensure that the BRU task is installed.
>;
>INS $BRU
>.
'
>;
We will now load the remainder of the distribution kit.
>;
>TIME
11:46:46 19-APR-83
>;
>BRU /BAC:MPLUSBL15SRC/NOPRES/INI/HEADER:l654/DENS:l600 MSO: DMl:
BRU - Starting Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - This disk will not contain a hardware bootable system
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MSO:
BRU - Completed
>;
>DMO MSO:/LOCK=H
11:55:40 *** MSO: -- Dismount complete
DMO -- TTO:
dismounted from MSO:
*** Final dismount initiated ***
>;
>TIME
11:55:41 19-APR-83
>DMO DMl:/LOCK=S
11:55:41 *** DMl: -- Dismount complete
DMO -- TTO:
dismounted from DMl:
*** Final dismount initiated ***
>MOU DMl :/OVR
>;
>;
>;
>·
We will now copy the help files from the second RK07 to the target
system disk.
'
>SET
/UIC=[l,2]
>PIP SY:[l,2]/CD=DMl:[l,2]
>;
>;
>;
We will now create any UFDs that must be created on your disk(s).
You will not see the UFD commands.
>;
>TIME
11:58:10 19-APR-83
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
The preparation of the RSX-llM-PLUS kit is now complete. The next
time this disk is bootstrapped, this dialog will only be repeated
on request. We will now record the successful installation in the
log file on the new system disk, and either exit if the installation
was done online, or proceed with the normal startup sequence if the
baseline system was used.
>;
D-5
'IWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>SET /UIC=[2,54]
>PIP LB:[l,l]KITIDENT.DAT/AP=LB:[2,54]INSTALOG.DAT
>;
>;
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
PLEASE NOTE
If you have not yet read the system release notes do so now
before attempting to perform an Update, a SYSGEN, or to
utilize the new features of this system.
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
Generally, an Update kit will have to be installed before a
system should be generated from this kit.
See the
documentation supplied with the Update kit.
If the Update has already been installed, does not contain
any RSX-llM-PLUS patches, or is not to be installed for some
reason, the SYSGEN process can be started directly.
In order to start the SYSGEN process, type:
>@SYSGEN
When SYSGEN has completed and your generated system is
running, you may wish to edit several DIGITAL-supplied
prototype command and text files to suit your system
and application:
File
Purpose
[O,O]RSXll.SYS
An account/password file
This file does contain privileged accounts.
(This file) Invoked at bootstrap
time to control bringing up the
system
Invoked by STARTUP to start up the
Queue Management and spooling system
Invoked by SHUTUP when taking down
the system to perform system dependent
shutdown tasks
Invoked by SHUTUP to stop the Queue
Management and spooling system
Displayed on user's terminal when
logging in
Displayed at the beginning of each
BATCH log file
[l,2]STARTUP.CMD
[l,2]QMGSTART.CMD
[l,2]SHUTUP.CMD
[l,2]QMGSTOP.CMD
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
[l ,2]LOGIN.TXT
[l,2]BATCH.TXT
>ELI /LOG/LIM
11:58:39 ERRLOG -- Error Logging initialized
>CLI /INIT=DCL
>INS LB:[3,54]RMSRES.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBA.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBB.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBC.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBD.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBE.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBF.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS $QMGCLI
>INS $QMGCLI/TASK= ••• PRI
>INS $QMGCLI/TASK= ••• SUB
>QUE /START:QMG
>INS $QMGPRT/TASK=PRT ••• /SLV=NO
>QUE LPO:/CR/NM
>START/ACCOUNTING
D-6
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>CON ESTAT LPO:
>QUE LPO:/SP/FL:2/LOWER/FO:O
>QUE BAPO:/BATCH
>QUE LPO:/AS:PRINT
>QUE BAPO:/AS:BATCH
>@
>
>
>@SYSGEN
>;
>; RSX-llM-PLUS
>;
SYSGEN
BL15
>; COPYRIGHT (C) 1983
>; DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP., MAYNARD MA., 01754
>;
>TIM
12:00:12 19-APR-83
>;
>; To exit from the SYSGEN procedure at any time, type CTRL/Z.
>;
>; If you are unsure of the answer to a question for which a de>; fault answer exists, use the default answer.
>;
>; Every question is preceded by a question number (for example SUOlO)
>; which you can use to find the explanation of the question in the
>; RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide.
>;
>; An explanation of every question is also available by pressing
>; the ESC key (or the ALTMODE key) in response to the question.
>;
>; If you are unfamiliar with the SYSGEN procedure, the explanation of
>; each question can be printed automatically before the question.
>;
>* SUOlO
Do you always want the explanation printed? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>; SYSGEN always creates saved answer files containing your responses
>; to the SYSGEN questions:
>;
>;
>;
>;
SYSGENSAl.CMD
SYSGENSA2.CMD
SYSGENSA3.CMD
Setup questions, Executive options
Peripheral configuration
Nonprivileged task builds
>;
>; You should perform a PREPGEN first to create saved answer files, and
>; then perform a SYSGEN, specifying those saved answer files as input
>; to the Executive, peripheral, and nonprivileged task build sections.
>;
>* SU020
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the Executive options? [Y/N D:N]:
>* SU040
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the peripheral configuration? [Y/N D:N]:
>* SU060
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the non privileged task builds? [Y/N D:N]:
>* SU080
Do you want to do a PREPGEN? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>;
>;
>;
>!INS
>!INS
>!INS
>!INS
>;
LB:[3,54]MAC/INC=20000
LB: [3,54]LBR/INC=20000
LB:[3,54]TKB/INC=20000
LB:[3,54]VMR
D-7
y
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
Enter the name of the disk drive containing your
target system disk [ddnn:] [S R:2-5]: DMO:
>* SU090
>*
>;
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
DMO:=IN:
DMO:=OU:
DMO:=SY:
DMO:=LB:
DMO:=WK:
DMO:=TK:
DMO:=BC:
DMO:=LI:
DMO:=OB:
DMO:=EX:
DMO:=MP:
>;
>* SU!OO
>*
Do you want to run Autoconf igure on the host system
hardware? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>;
>; Running Autoconfigure:
>;
>INS $ACF
>ACF
>INS $ACO
>ACO SHOW
Processor Type:
11/44
Memory Size:
384. Kw
Options:
Floating Point Processor ( FPll)
Commercial Instruction Set (CIS)
Extended Instruction Set (EIS)
Extended (22-Bi t) Addressing
Switch Register (SWR)
Display Register
Cache Memory
Name
RHA
Vector
254
DMA
210
DLA
160
CSR
176700
Unit
0
RM02
0
1
RK07
RK07
0
RL02
RL02
224
300
310
200
060
330
Remark
177440
174400
1
MSA
DDA
DDB
LPA
YLA
YZA
Type
172522
176500
176510
177514
177560
160110
>ACO SYSGEN
>;
>* SUllO
Do you want to override the Autoconfigure results? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>; You can:
>;
>;
o
do a complete SYSGEN
o
continue a previous SYSGEN from where you left off
o
do an individual section of SYSGEN
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
D-8
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>* SU120
Do you want to do a complete SYSGEN? [Y/N D:Y] :
>;
>;
>;
>;======================================================
>; Choosing Executive Options
19-APR-83 at 12:01
>;======================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
Enter a comment for inclusion in the SYSGENSAl saved answer file.
The comment may contain more than one line. The "V" in the right
margin below marks the maximum line length. When you are done,
press RETURN in response to the prompt.
>*Comment [S R:0.-55.]: Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generatic
>*Comment [S R:0.-55.]: and Installation Guide
>* Comment [S R:0.-55.]:
>;
>* CE020
Do you want the Full-functionality Executive? [Y/N D:Y]:
>;
>* CE120
>*
Do you want support for communications products
(such as DECnet)? [Y/N D:N]:
>* CE124
Do you want SPM-11 support? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>;
>* CE130
What is the system name? [S R:0-6 D:"RSXMPL"]: EXMPLl
>;
>* CE270
Do you want to include XDT? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>;
>* CE280
>*
Enter the crash notification device CSR
address [O R:l60000-177700 0:177564]:
>* CE290
On what device do you wish crash dumps to be written? [S R:2-3]: DL
>* CE300
What is the physical unit number of the crash unit? [O R:0-7 D:O]:
>;
>;
>;
>* CE330
>;
>* CE350
Is your system clock programmable (KWll-P)? [Y/N D:N]:
Is your line frequency 50 Hz? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>;
>;
>;=============================================================
>;
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
19-APR-83 at 12:02
>;=============================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA2.CMD.
>;
>; Enter a comment for inclusion in the SYSGENSA2 saved answer file.
>; The comment may contain more than one line.
The "V" in the right
>; margin below marks the maximum line length. When you are done,
>; press RETURN in response to the prompt.
>;
>*Comment [S R:0.-55.]: Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generatic
>* Comment [S R:0.-55.]: and Installation Guide
>* Comment [S R:0.-55.]:
>;
>;
D-9
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
devices: RM02
controllers: RHll, RH70
>;
DR:
RH70
RM03, RM05, RM80, RP07
>;
>;
RH Configuration
>;
>;
Physical Unit Number
>;
>;
6
4
7
2
5
>;
0
l
3
>;
>; RHA ORO:
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
DM:
controllers: RK611, RK711
>;
>;
DM Configuration
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
Physical Unit Number
>; DMA
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
0
l
OMO:
DMl:
DL:
3
2
controllers: RLll, RLV12
4
6
5
7
devices: RLOl, RL02
DL Configuration
Physical Unit Number
>; DLA
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
devices: RK06, RK07
0
1
DLO:
DLl:
CR:
2
3
4
5
6
7
controllers: CMll, CRll
>;
>* CP4004
>;
>;
>;
MS:
>;
How many CM/CRll card readers do you have? [O D:O]:
controllers: TSll, TU80, TSV05
>;
>;
DD:
>;
>;
>;
LP:
>;
>;
>;
>* CP5408
>*
>;
>* CP5480
>;
>* CP5484
>
>
>
>
LA:
controller:
DLll
device:
TU58
controllers: LA180, LNOl, LPll, LSll, LVll
devices:
LA180, LNOl, LPOl, LP02, LP04, LP05, LP06,
LP07, LP14, LP25, LP26, LP27, LSll, LVOl
Enter the number of seconds between
line printer-not-ready messages [D R:0.-255. 0:15.]:
Enter line printer type for LPA [S R:4-5 D:"LP25"]:
Does LPA have lowercase characters? [Y/N D:N] : Y
controller:
LPAll
D-10
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>* CP6204
How many LPAll lab subsystems do you have? [D R:0.-16. D:O.]:
>;
>;
>;
IP:
controller:
IPll
>;
>* CP6404
>;
>;
>;
>;
TT:
>* CP6832
>;
>;
>;
>;
TT:
>* CP7204
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
TT:
>* CP7420
How many IPll industrial control subsystems do you have? [O D:O]:
controllers: DLll, DLVll
controller mnemonic: YL
Enter terminal type for YLA [S R:4-6 D:"LA120"]:
controller:
DJll
controller mnemonic: YJ
Enter number of DJll asynchronous line
multiplexers [D R:0.-16. D:O.]:
controllers: DZll, DZVll
controller mnemonic: YZ
Do any of the DZll/DZVll lines require modem support? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>* CP7484
Enter terminal type for YZA [S R:4-6 D:"VTlOO"]:
>;
>;
>* CP7604
Do you have any intercomputer communication devices? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>;
>; Enter device mnemonics for any user-supplied drivers. The driver
>; source files must reside in [11,10) and be named ddDRV.MAC and
>; ddTAB.MAC where dd is the device mnemonic.
>;
>; You may enter the mnemonics on more than one line. When you have
>; listed all the drivers, press RETURN when asked for the device
>; mnemonic.
>;
>; The device mnemonic must not include a colon.
>;
>* CP9604
Enter device mnemonics for user-supplied drivers [S]:
>;
>;
>; The highest vector among the devices you specified in this SYSGEN
>; is 374(octal). This is the default response for this question.
>;
>* CP9632
>*
What is the highest interrupt vector
address? [O R:374-774 D:374]: 774
>;
>;
>;
>;================================================================
>;
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
19-APR-83 at 12:09
>;================================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
>;
>!PIP RSXMC3.MAC=RSXMC1.MAC,RSXMC2.MAC
>!PIP RSXMC.MAC=RSXMC3.MAC,RSXMCO.MAC
>;
D-11
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>!SET
>!PIP
>!PIP
>!PIP
>!PIP
/UIC=[l,24]
[ll,10]/NV=[200,200]RSXMC.MAC
[ll,10]/NV=[200,200]SYSTB.MAC
[ll,24]/NV=[200,200]RSXASM.CMD
[ll,24]/NV=[200,200]DRIVERS.ASM
>;
>;
>* AEOlO
>*
Do you want assembly listings of the Executive and
drivers? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>!ASN NL:=LS:
>;
>;
>* AE030
>*
Do you wish to pause to edit any files before
assembling? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>!SET /UIC=[ll,24]
>;
>!PIP *.OBJ;*/DE/NM,*.TTY;*
>;
>!TIME
>;
>!MAC @RSXASM
>;
>!TIME
>;
>!MAC @DRIVERS.ASM
>;
>!TIME
>;
>!PIP RSXllM.OBS=*.OBJ
>!PIP TTDRV.OBS=*.TTY
>;
>!SET /UIC=[200,200]
>!PIP /NV=[ll,lO]RSXMC.MAC
>;
>!SET
>!PIP
>!PIP
>!PIP
/UIC=[l,24]
RSXBLD.CMD/PU/NM
RSXllM.OLB;*/DE/NM
[200,200]RSXMC.MAC/PU/NM
>;
>!LBR RSX11M/CR:256.:2112.:256.=[ll,24]RSX11M.OBS
>;
>!LBR TTDRV/CR:40.:392.:128.=[ll,24]TTDRV.OBS
>;
>;
>;
>;==============================================================
>;
Building the Executive and Drivers
19-APR-83 at 12:09
>;==============================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
>;
>!SET /UIC=[l,54]
>!PIP SYSVMR.CMD=[200,200]SYSVMR.CMD,VMRTTY.CMD
>;
>;
>* BE030
>*
>
Do you want to pause to edit any files before
task-building? [Y/N D:N]:
> SET /UIC=[l,24]
> PIP [l,24]/NV/NM=[200,200]RSXBLD.CMD,RSX11M,DSP11M,LDR11M
D-12
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>!PIP [l,24]/NV=[200,200]DIR11M.CMD,DR211M,DIRCOM,DR2COM,DIR
>;
>!TIME
>;
>!TKB @RSXBLD
>;
>!TIME
>;
>!TKB @[200,200]DRIVERS.BLD
>;
>!TIME
>;
>;
>;
>;=========================================================
>;
Building the Privileged Tasks
19-APR-83 at 12:10
>;=========================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
>;
>;
>* BP040
Do you want the maps of the privileged tasks? [Y/N D:N]:
>.
> '!ASN NL:=MP:
>.
'
/UIC=[l,24]
>!SET
>·
'
>!TIME
>;
>!TKB @ACCFSLBLD
>!TKB @ACNFSLBLD
> !TKB @ACSFSLBLD
>!TKB @BOOBLD
>!TKB @BPRBLD
>!TKB @BROBLD
>!TKB @BYEBLD
>!TKB @COTFSLBLD
>!TKB @DMOBLD
>!TKB @ELIFSLBLD
>!TKB @ERLBLD
>!TKB @FCPLRGBLD
>!TKB @FXRBLD
>!TKB @FllMSGBLD
>!TKB @HELFSLBLD
>!TKB @HRCBLD
>!TKB @INIBLD
>!TKB @INSBLD
>!TKB @LOABLD
>!TKB @LPPFSLBLD
>!TKB @MCRBLD
>!TKB @MCDBLD
>!TKB @MOUBLD
>!TKB @MTABLD
>!TKB @PMDFSLBLD
>!TKB @PMTBLD
>!TKB @QMGFSLBLD
>!TKB @RMDBLD
>!TKB @SAVBLD
>!TKB @SHABLD
>!TKB @SHFBLD
>!TKB @SHUBLD
D-13
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>lTKB
>!TKB
>lTKB
>!TKB
@SYLFSLBLD
@TKNBLD
@UFDBLD
@UNLFSLBLD
>;
>!TIME
>;
>lASN LB:=OU:
>;
>;
>;
>;============================================================
>; Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
19-APR-83 at 12:10
>;============================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA3.CMD.
>;
>;
>* BNOlO
>;
>;
>;
Do you want to rebuild any nonprivileged tasks? [Y/N D:N]:
>;==========================================================
>; Creating the System Image File
19-APR-83 at 12:10
>;==========================================================
>;
>;
>!SET /UIC=[l,54]
>;
>!PIP OU:RSX11M.SYS/CO/NV/BL:l026.=RSX11M.TSK
>;
>!ASN LB:=SY:
>!VMR @SYSVMR
>;
>; End of SYSGEN
>;
>TIME
12:10:35 19-APR-83
>;
>ASN =
>;
>@
>
>
>
>
>@SYSGEN
>;
>; RSX-llM-PLUS
SYSGEN
BL15
>;
>; COPYRIGHT (C) 1983
>; DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP., MAYNARD MA., 01754
>;
>TIM
12:11:06 19-APR-83
>;
>; To exit from the SYSGEN procedure at any time, type CTRL/Z.
>;
>; If you are unsure of the answer to a question for which a de>; fault answer exists, use the default answer.
>;
D-14
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>; Every question is preceded by a question number (for example SUOlO)
>; which you can use to find the explanation of the question in the
>; RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide.
>;
>; An explanation of every question is also available by pressing
>; the ESC key (or the ALTMODE key) in response to the question.
>;
>; If you are unfamiliar with the SYSGEN procedure, the explanation of
>; each question can be printed automatically before the question.
>;
>* SUOlO
>;
Do you always want the explanation printed? [Y/N D:N]:
>; SYSGEN always creates saved answer files containing your responses
>; to the SYSGEN questions:
>;
>;
>;
SYSGENSAl.CMD
SYSGENSA2.CMD
SYSGENSA3.CMD
Setup questions, Executive options
Peripheral configuration
Nonprivileged task builds
>;
>;
>; You should perform a PREPGEN first to create saved answer files, and
>; then perform a SYSGEN, specifying those saved answer files as input
>; to the Executive, peripheral, and nonprivileged task build sections.
>;
>* SU020
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the Executive options? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>* SU030
Enter saved answer file name [S D:"SYSGENSAl.CMD"]:
>;
>;
>* SU040
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the peripheral configuration? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>;
>* SU050
Enter saved answer file name [S D:"SYSGENSA2.CMD"]:
>;
>* SU060
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the nonprivileged task builds? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>* SU070
Enter saved answer file name [S D:"SYSGENSA3.CMD"]:
>;
>;
>* SU080
>;
>INS
>INS
>INS
>INS
Do you want to do a PREPGEN? [Y/N D:N]:
LB:[3,54]MAC/INC=20000
LB:[3,54]LBR/INC=20000
LB:[3,54]TKB/INC=20000
LB:[3,54]VMR
>;
>* SU090
>*
Enter the name of the disk drive containing your
target system disk [ddnn:] [S R:2-5]: DMO:
>;
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
DMO:=IN:
DMO:=OU:
DMO:=SY:
DMO:=LB:
DMO:=WK:
DMO:=TK:
DMO:=BC:
DMO:=LI:
DMO:=OB:
DMO:=EX:
DMO:=MP:
>;
>* SUlOO
>*
Do you want to run Autoconfigure on the host system
hardware? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
D-15
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>; You can:
>;
>;
o do a complete SYSGEN
>;
>;
o continue a previous SYSGEN from where you left off
>;
>;
o do an individual section of SYSGEN
>;
>;
>* SU120
Do you want to do a complete SYSGEN? [Y/N D:Y]:
>;
>;
>;
>;======================================================
>; Choosing Executive Options
19-APR-83 at 12:11
>;======================================================
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
Using saved answer file DM0:[200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD;l
created on 19-APR-83 at 12:01:15.
Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.1 System Generation
and Installation Guide
>;=============================================================
>; Choosing Peripheral Configuration
19-APR-83 at 12:12
>;=============================================================
>;
>;
>; Using saved answer file DMO: [200,200]SYSGENSA2.CMD;l
>; created on 19-APR-83 at 12:03:02.
>;
>; Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generation
>; and Installation Guide
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
DR:
controllers: RHll, RH70
RH70
devices: RM02
RM03, RMOS, RM80, RP07
>;
RH Configuration
>;
>;
Physical Unit Number
>;
>;
4
6
>;
1
2
3
5
0
>;
>; RHA DRO:
>;
>;
>;
>;
DM:
>;
controllers: RK611, RK711
devices: RK06 I RK07
>;
DM Configuration
>;
>;
>;
Physical Unit Number
>;
>;
1
4
0
2
5
6
3
>;
>; DMA DMO:
DMl:
>;
>;
>;
D-16
7
7
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
Physical Unit Number
0
1
DLO:
DLl:
3
2
4
5
6
7
MS:
controllers: TSll, TU80, TSVOS
DD:
controller:
LP:
controllers: LAlBO, LNOl, LPll, LSll, LVll
devices:
LA180, LNOl, LPOl, LP02, LP04, LPOS, LP06,
LP07, LP14, LP25, LP26, LP27, LSll, LVOl
TT:
controllers: DLll, DLVll
controller mnemonic: YL
TT:
controllers: DZll, DZVll
controller mnemonic: YZ
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
devices: RLOl, RL02
DL Configuration
>; DLA
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
controllers: RLll, RLV12
DL:
DLll
device:
TU58
>;================================================================
>; Assembling the Executive and Drivers
19-APR-83 at 12:17
>;================================================================
>;
>;
>PIP RSXMC3.MAC=RSXMC1.MAC,RSXMC2.MAC
>PIP RSXMC.MAC=RSXMC3.MAC,RSXMCO.MAC
>;
>SET
>PIP
>PIP
>PIP
>PIP
/UIC= [ 1,24]
[ll,10]/NV=[200,200]RSXMC.MAC
[ll,10]/NV=[200,200]SYSTB.MAC
[ll,24]/NV=[200,200]RSXASM.CMD
[ll,24]/NV=[200,200]DRIVERS.ASM
>;
>;
>ASN NL:=LS:
>;
>;
>SET /UIC=[ll,24]
>;
>PIP *.OBJ;*/DE/NM,*.TTY;*
>;
>TIME
12:18:09 19-APR-83
>;
>MAC @RSXASM
>;
>TIME
12:39:08 19-APR-83
>;
>MAC @DRIVERS.ASM
>;
D-17
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>TIME
12:52:29 19-APR-83
>;
>PIP RSXllM.OBS=*.OBJ
>PIP TTDRV.OBS=*.TTY
>;
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>PIP /NV=[ll,lO]RSXMC.MAC
>;
>SET
>PIP
>PIP
>PIP
/UIC=[l,24]
RSXBLD.CMD/PU/NM
RSXllM.OLB;*/DE/NM
[200,200]RSXMC.MAC/PU/NM
>;
>LBR RSX11M/CR:256.:2112.:256.=[ll,24]RSX11M.OBS
>;
>LBR TTDRV/CR:40.:392.:128.=[ll,24]TTDRV.OBS
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>;
>;
>;==============================================================
>; Building the Executive and Drivers
19-APR-83 at 12:57
>;==============================================================
>;
>;
>SET
>SET
>SET
>PIP
>;
/UIC=[l,24]
/UIC=[200,200]
/UIC=[l,54]
SYSVMR.CMD=[200,200]SYSVMR.CMD,VMRTTY.CMD
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>SET /UIC=[l,24]
>PIP [l,24]/NV/NM=[200,200]RSXBLD.CMD,RSXllM,DSPllM,LDRllM
>PIP [l,24]/NV=[200,200]DIR11M.CMD,DR211M,DIRCOM,DR2COM,DIR
>;
>TIME
13:01:59 19-APR-83
>;
>TKB @RSXBLD
>;
>TIME
13:12:34 19-APR-83
>;
>TKB @[200,200]DRIVERS.BLD
>;
>TIME
13:18:57 19-APR-83
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>;
>;
>;=========================================================
19-APR-83 at 13:18
>; Building the Privileged Tasks
>;=========================================================
>;
>;
>;
>ASN NL:=MP:
>;
>SET /UIC=[l,24]
>;
D-18
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>TIME
13:19:02 19-APR-83
>;
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
@ACCFSLBLD
@ACNFSLBLD
@ACSFSLBLD
@BOOBLD
@BPRBLD
@BROBLD
@BYEBLD
@COTFSLBLD
@DMOBLD
@ELIFSLBLD
@ERLBLD
@FCPLRGBLD
@FXRBLD
@FllMSGBLD
@HELFSLBLD
@HRCBLD
@INIBLD
@INSBLD
@LOABLD
@LPPFSLBLD
@MCRBLD
@MCDBLD
@MOUBLD
@MTABLD
@PMDFSLBLD
@PMTBLD
@QMGFSLBLD
@RMDBLD
@SAVBLD
@SHABLD
@SHFBLD
@SHUBLD
@SYLFSLBLD
@TKNBLD
@UFDBLD
@UNLFSLBLD
>;
>TIME
14:07:51 19-APR-83
>;
>ASN LB:=OU:
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>;
>;
>;============================================================
>; Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
19-APR-83 at 14:07
>;============================================================
>;
>;
>; Using saved answer file DM0:[200,200]SYSGENSA3.CMD;l
>; created on 19-APR-83 at 12:10:20.
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;==========================================================
>; Creating the System Image File
19-APR-83 at 14:07
>;==========================================================
>;
>;
D-19
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>SET /UIC=[l,54]
>;
>PIP OU:RSX11M.SYS/CO/NV/BL:l026.=RSX11M.TSK
>;
>ASN LB:=SY:
>VMR @SYSVMR
Loading Executive data space
Data ~pace loadiLg completed
VMR -- *DIAG*-Installed tasks or commons may no longer fit in pa rti ti on
SET /TOP=SYSPAR:-*
VMR -- *DIAG*-Installed tasks or commons may no longer fit in partition
SET /TOP=DRVPAR:-*
SECPOL 117734 00174200 00100000 SEC POOL
SYSPAR 117670 00274200 00102500 MAIN
117624 00274200 00035500 RO COM !DIRllM!
[ ••• LDR]
11 7540 00331 700 00004100 TASK
[MCR ••• ]
116624 00336000 00026200 TASK
[TKTN ]
116424 00364200 00007400 TASK
[SHF ••• ]
116224 00373600 00003100 TASK
DRVPAR 116144 00376700 00073300 MAIN
116100 00376700 00017600 RO COM !TTCOM
116014 00416500 00020000 DRIVER (TT:)
115540 00436500 00005300 DRIVER (DR:)
115160 00444000 00005200 DRIVER (DM:)
114570 00451200 00003100 DRIVER (DL:)
114260 00454300 00004300 DRIVER (MS:)
113554 00460600 00004000 DRIVER (DD:)
113334 00464600 00001100 DRIVER (LP:)
113144 00465700 00000100 DRIVER (NL:)
113100 00466000 00000300 DRIVER (CO:)
113034 00466300 00002400 DRIVER (VT:)
112770 00470700 00001300 DRIVER (RD:)
GEN
112724 00472200 02305600 MAIN
••• LDR 11.05 11 7400 SYS PAR 248. 00004100 LBO :-00116713 FIXED
TKTN
06.00 116470 SYS PAR 248. 00007400 LBO :-00121714 FIXED
FllMSG 13.00 110654 GEN
200. 00006100 LB0:-00117726
MTAACP 14.00 110274 GEN
200. 00015100 LB0:-00121355
SHE ••• 03.00 110030 GEN
200. 00014000 LB0:-00120657
MCR ••• 5.00
117074 SYS PAR 160. 00026200 LB0:-00120363 FIXED
FllACP 05.00 112514 GEN
149. 00014200 LBO :-001176 51
ERR LOG 2.00
112164 GEN
148. 00042500 LB0:-00117602
PMT ••• 2.00
111524 GEN
148. 00006700 LB0:-00120534
COT ••• 01.02 111000 GEN
145. 00013000 LBO :-0011 7512
HRC ••• 02
110414 GEN
140. 00056200 LB0:-00120141
PMD ••• 06.00 110150 GEN
140. 00017000 LB0:-00120630
SYS LOG 1.03
111254 GEN
130. 00020100 LBO :-00121672
SHF ••• 6.00
116270 SYS PAR 105. 00003100 LB0:-00120551 FIXED
FXR ••• 02.00 110534 GEN
100. 00003200 LBO :-0011 7721
BAPO
04.00 112304 GEN
80. 00046600 LBO: -00117751
QMG ••• 03.00 111400 GEN
75. 00033000 LB0:-00121160
LPO
03.00 111740 GEN
70. 00013600 LBO :-00120712
ACNT
05.00 111130 GEN
50. 00040300 LB0:-00117334
SHUTUP 03.00 107710 GEN
so. 00012000 LB0:-00120675
001774+ GEN
••• RMD 2.00
225. 00030200 LB0:-00121504
••• DCL 2.0
001750+ GEN
160. 00040500 LBO :-00011370
••• DMO 04.00 001752+ GEN
160. 00016200 LBO :-00117541
••• MCR 3.00
001766+ GEN
160 • 00040200 LB0:-00120757
••• MOU 26.00 001770+ GEN
160. 00040300 LB0:-00120415
••• CA. 11
002020+ GEN
150 • 00022300 LB0:-00022160
••• INS 14.00 001764+ GEN
100 • 00043700 LB0:-00120313
••• SAV 08.00 002014+ GEN
100. 00055500 LB0:-00121216
••• UFD 05.00 002022+ GEN
100. 00005700 LB0:-00121726
••• ACS 2.01
002000+ GEN
70. 00003600 LBO :-00117372
D-20
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
••• ACC 2.0
001742+ GEN
6S. 00030300 LB0:-00117204
••• SHA 03.00 002016+ GEN
6S. 00027300 LB0:-00122036
••• AT. 6.0
0017S6+ GEN
64. 00073000 LB0:-00014733
••• IN! 23.00 001760+ GEN
60. 0003Sl00 LB0:-00120221
••• HOM 23.00 001762+ GEN
60. 0003Sl00 LB0:-00120221
••• BRO OS.00 001744+ GEN
SO. 00034400 LB0:-00117433
••• BYE 03.00 001746+ GEN
SO. OOOlSSOO LB0:-00117472
••• HEL 2.00
0017S4+ GEN
SO. 00026000 LB0:-00120074
••• PIP 16.00 001772+ GEN
SO. 00026400 LB0:-0001674S
••• UNL 4.0
001776+ GEN
SO. 00031600 LB0:-00121736
••• BOO 06.02 002002+ GEN
SO. 00030200 LB0:-00117401
••• CON 02
002004+ GEN
SO. 00126100 LB0:-00011131
••• ELI 1.00
002006+ GEN
SO. 00016700 LB0:-00117561
••• LOA 4.0
002010+ GEN
SO. 0003S700 LB0:-00120561
••• MAG 01.02 002012+ GEN
50. 00034300 LB0:-0012047S
RHA
OFL
CPA
CSR=l76700
VEC=2S4 PRI=S
OMA
OFL
CPA
CSR=l77440
VEC=210 PRI=S
YLA
OFL
CPA
CSR=l77S60
VEC=60 PRI=S
YZA
OFL
CPA
CSR=l60110
VEC=330 PRI=S
DLA
OFL
CPA
CSR=l74400
VEC=l60 PRI=S
MSA
OFL
CPA
CSR=l72S22
VEC=224 PRI=S
DDA
OFL
CPA
CSR=l76SOO
VEC=300 PRI=4
DOB
OFL
CPA
CSR=l76510
VEC=310 PRI=4
LPA
OFL
CPA
CSR=l77514
VEC=200 PRI=4
COO:
OFL
DRIVER
TTO:
YLAO:
OFL
DRIVER
TTl:
YZAO:
OFL
DRIVER
TT2:
YZAl:
OFL
DRIVER
TT3:
YZA2:
OFL
DRIVER
TT4:
YZA3:
OFL
DRIVER
TTS:
YZA4:
OFL
DRIVER
TT6:
YZAS:
OFL
DRIVER
TT7:
YZA6:
OFL
DRIVER
TTlO:
YZA7:
OFL
DRIVER
VTO:
OFL
DRIVER
RDO:
ONL
DRIVER
ORO:
RHAO:
OFL
DRIVER
DMO:
DMAO:
OFL
DRIVER
DMl:
DMAl:
OFL
DRIVER
DLO:
DLAO:
OFL
DRIVER
DLl:
DLAl:
OFL
DRIVER
MSO:
MSAO:
OFL
DRIVER
ODO:
DDAO:
OFL
DRIVER
DDl:
DDAl:
OFL
DRIVER
DD2:
DDBO:
OFL
DRIVER
DD3:
DDBl:
OFL
DRIVER
LPO:
LPAO:
OFL
DRIVER
NLO:
OFL
DRIVER
POOL=l200:12996.:13S02.:1742
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>; End of SYSGEN
>;
>TIME
14:14:14 19-APR-83
>;
>ASN =
>;
>@
>
>
D-21
'!WO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>BOO [1,54]
XDT: 15
XDT>G
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l
BL15
>
TIM 14:15 19-APR-83
>TIM
14:15:05 19-APR-83
>SAV
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DM:=SY:
>RED DM:=LB:
>RED DM:=SP:
>MOU DM:"RSXllMPBLlS"
>@DM:[l,2]STARTUP
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
384.KW
System:" EXMPLl"
PLEASE NOTE
If you have not yet read the system release notes do so now
before attempting to perform an Update, a SYSGEN, or to
utilize the new features of this system.
>*Please enter time and date (HH:MM MM/DD/YY)
>@
[S]: AZ
>
>
>SAV /WB
DMO -- System disk being dismounted
*** Final dismount initiated ***
DMO -- SYSTEM dismounted from DMO:
14:15:26 *** DMO: -- Dismount complete
>
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l BL15
>RED DM:=SY:
>RED DM:=LB:
>RED DM:=SP:
>MOU DM:"RSX11MPBL15"
>@DM:[l,2]STARTUP
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
384.KW
System:"EXMPLl"
PLEASE NOTE
If you have not yet read the system release notes do so now
before attempting to perform an Update, a SYSGEN, or to
utilize the new features of this system.
>* Please enter time and date (HH:MM MM/DD/YY)
>TIM 14:16 4/19/83
>ACS SY:/BLKS=l024.
>CON ONLINE ALL
>ELI /LOG/LIM
14:16:04 ERRLOG -- Error Logging initialized
>CL! /INIT=DCL
>INS LB:[3,54]RMSRES.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBA.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBB.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB:[l,l]RMSLBC.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB [l,l]RMSLBD.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB [l,l]RMSLBE.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
>INS LB [l,l]RMSLBF.TSK/RON=YES/PAR=GEN
D-22
[S]: 14:16 4/19/83
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>INS $QMGCLI
>INS $QMGCLI/TASK= ••• PRI
>INS $QMGCLI/TASK= ••• SUB
>QUE /START:QMG
>INS $QMGPRT/TASK=PRT ••• /SLV=NO
>QUE LPO:/CR/NM
>START/ACCOUNTING
>CON ESTAT LPO:
>QUE LPO:/SP/FL:2/LOWER/FO:O
>QUE BAPO:/BATCH
>QUE LPO:/AS:PRINT
>QUE BAPO:/AS:BATCH
>@
>
D-23
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
D.2
A SAMPLE ON-LINE SYSTEM GENERATION
>
>MOU MM2:/FOR/NOSHARE
>MOU DR2:/FOR/NOSHARE
>
>RUN $BAD
BAD>DR2:/LIST
BAD
DR2: Bad block
BAD
DR2: Bad block
BAD -- DR2: Bad block
B4D -- DR2: Bad block
BAD -- DR2: Total bad
BAD>"'Z
found found found found blocks=
LBN=
LBN=
LBN=
LBN=
4.
84557.
84717.
84877.
85037.
>
>RUN $BRU
BRU>/DENSITY:800/VERIFY/INITIALIZE/MAX:l0567/HEADERS:4049
From:
MM2:
To:
DR2:
BRU - Starting Tape 1 on MM2:
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MM2:
BRU - Starting verify pass Tape 1 on MM2:
BRU - End of Tape 1 on MM2:
BRU - Completed
BRU>"'Z
>
>DMO DR2:/LOCK=NOUNLOAD
DMO -- TT36:
dismounted from DR2:
*** Final dismount initiated ***
>
>MOU DR2:RSX11MPBL15
>ASN DR2:=SY:
>
>SET /UIC=[2,54]
>@BASTART
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l Online Distribution Kit Installation Procedure
This command file installs the RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l kit and
prepares it for the performance of a SYSGEN. It ass,umes the
current environment is an up-and-running RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l
or RSX-llM-PLUS V2.0 system. All the necessary devices must
already be configured online. The current system will not be
affected in any way by the execution of this file.
>* Enter the name of the target system disk [S]: DR2:
>ASN DR2:=SY:
>ASN DR2:=LB:
>;
>;
>;
The following information is necessary for this command file
to correctly access the remainder of the distribution kit.
>;
>* Did you receive your M-PLUS distribution kit on magnetic tape? [Y/N]: Y
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>·
Please enter the name of the magnetic tape drive, which should
still contain the distribution tape. The name is of the form:
MMl: or
MSO: etc •••
>* Which tape drive contains the distribution tape [S]: MM2:
>*Do you have the 1600-bpi magnetic tape distribution kit? [Y/N]: N
D-24
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>*Is the tape on MM2: mounted foreign? [Y/N]: Y
>;
>;
Prepare to bring in the remainder of the distribution kit
>;
>* Is your target system disk an RK07? [Y/N]: N
>;
>;
Ensure that the BRU task is installed.
>;
>;
>;
We will now load the remainder of the distribution kit.
>;
>TIME
17:12:04 19-APR-83
>;
>BRU /BAC:MPLUSBL15SRC/UFO/NOINI/OENS:800 MM2: SY:
BRU - Starting Tape 1
BRU - End of Tape 1
BRU - Mount Tape 2 on MM2:
BRU - Starting Tape 2 on MM2:
BRU - End of Tape 2 on MM2:
BRU - Completed
>;
>OMO MM2:/LOCK=H
OMO -- TT36:
dismounted from MM2:
>;
*** Final dismount initiated ***
>TIME
17:28:46 19-APR-83
>;
>;
>;
We will now create any UFOs that must be created on your disk(s).
You will not see the UFO commands.
>;
>TIME
17:29:10 19-APR-83
>;
>·,
>;
>.,
>;
>;
>;
>;
The preparation of the RSX-llM-PLUS kit is now complete. The next
time this disk is bootstrapped, this dialog will only be repeated
on request. We will now record the successful installation in the
log file on the new system disk, and either exit if the installation
was done online, or proceed with the normal startup sequence if the
baseline system was used.
>;
>SET /UIC=[2,54]
>PIP LB:[l,l]KITIDENT.OAT/AP=LB:[2,54]INSTALOG.OAT
>;
>;
>SET /UIC=[2,54]
>ASN
>@
>
>
>ASN OR2:=SY:
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>
>
0-25
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>@SYSGEN
>;
>; RSX-llM-PLUS
SYSGEN
BL15
>;
>; COPYRIGHT (C) 1983
>; DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP., MAYNARD MA., 01754
>;
>TIM
17:30:07 19-APR-83
>;
>; To exit from the SYSGEN procedure at any time, type CTRL/Z.
>;
>; If you are unsure of the answer to a question for which a de>; fault answer exists, use the default answer.
>;
>; Every question is preceded by a question number (for example SUO!O)
>; which you can use to find the explanation of the question in the
>; RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide.
>;
>; An explanation of every question is also available by pressing
>; the ESC key (or the ALTMODE key) in response to the question.
>;
>; If you are unfamiliar with the SYSGEN procedure, the explanation of
>; each question can be printed automatically before the question.
>;
>* SUOlO
Do you always want the explanation printed? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>; SYSGEN always creates saved answer files containing your responses
>; to the SYSGEN questions:
>;
Setup questions, Executive options
SYSGENSAl.CMD
>;
Peripheral configuration
SYSGENSA2.CMD
>;
Nonprivileged task builds
SYSGENSA3.CMD
>;
>;
>; You should perform a PREPGEN first to create saved answer files, and
>; then perform a SYSGEN, specifying those saved answer files as input
>; to the Executive, peripheral, and nonprivileged task build sections.
>;
>* SU020
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the Executive options? [Y/N D:N]:
>* SU040
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the peripheral configuration? [Y/N D:N] :
>* SU060
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the nonprivileged task builds? [Y/N D:N] :
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
suo00
>* SU090
>*
>;
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>;
Do you want to do a PREPGEN? [Y/N D:N]: Y
Enter the name of the disk drive containing your
target system disk [ddnn:] [S R:2-5]: DR2:
DR2:=IN:
DR2:=0U:
DR2:=SY:
DR2:=LB:
DR2:=WK:
DR2:=TK:
DR2:=BC:
DR2 =LI:
DR2 =OB:
DR2 =EX:
DR2 =MP:
D-26
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>; You can:
>;
>;
o
do a complete SYSGEN
o
continue a previous SYSGEN from where you left off
o
do an individual section of SYSGEN
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>* SU120
Do you want to do a complete SYSGEN? [Y/N D:Y]:
>;
>;
>;
>;======================================================
>; Choosing Executive Options
19-APR-83 at 17:30
>;======================================================
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
Enter a comment for inclusion in the SYSGENSAl saved answer file.
The comment may contain more than one line. The "V" in the right
>; margin below marks the maximum line length. When you are done,
>; press RETURN in response to the prompt.
>;
>*Comment [S R:0.-55.]: Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generation
>*Comment [S R:0.-55.]: and Installation Guide
>* Comment [S R:0.-55.]:
>;
>* CEOlO
What is your target processor type? [S R:5.-12. D:"ll/70"]: 11/24
>;
>* CE020
Do you want the Full-functionality Executive? [Y/N D:Y]: N
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>* CE030
The User-tailored Executive will require you to answer at least
twenty additional questions specifying which standard RSX-llM-PLUS
features you wish to disable. You should not choose the User-tailored
Executive unless you need to disable specific RSX-llM-PLUS features.
Do you want to reconsider your selection? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>* CE070
>;
>* CE090
Do you want support for task headers out-of-pool? [Y/N D:N]: Y
Do you want to use FCSRES, the FCS resident library? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>;
>* CElOO
>*
Do you want all DIGITAL-supplied drivers and their data bases
to be loadable? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>* CE120
>*
Do you want support for communications products
(such as DECnet)? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>* CE124
Do you want SPM-11 support? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>;
>;
>* CE130
>;
>* CE140
What is the system name? [S R:0-6 D:"RSXMPL"]: EXMPL2
Do you want shadow recording support? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>* CE150
Do you want console driver support? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>* CE160
>;
Do you want accounting support? [Y/N D:N] : Y
D-27
v
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
CE170
Do you want to include the batch processor? [Y/N D:N]: Y
CE200
Which FCP do you want? [S R:l-6 D:"FCPLRG"]:
Two versions of the file system ACP (FllACP) are provided:
FCPMDL -- a SK overlaid FCP that gives good performance
for systems with limited memory
FCPLRG -- a 9K nonoverlaid FCP that gives high performance
Both versions provide the same functionality.
CE200
Which FCP do you want? [S R:l-6 D: "FCPLRG"]:
CE210
Do you want support for file windows in secondary pool? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
This option allows the FCP to put file windows in secondary pool
instead of primary pool.
This increases the amount of primary pool
available for other system functions.
CE210
Do you want support for file windows in secondary pool? [Y/N D:N]: Y
CE230
What is the default virtual terminal unit buffer
size? [D R:l.-512. D:l20.]:
CE240
What is the maximum virtual terminal unit buffer
size? [D R:l.-512. D:l84.]:
CE260
Enter unsolicited input time-out (in seconds)
CE270
Do you want to include XDT? [Y/N D:N]: Y
CE280
Enter the crash notification device CSR
address [O R:l60000-177700 0:177564]:
CE290
On what device do you wish crash dumps to be written? [S R:2-3]: MM
CE300
What is the physical unit number of the crash unit? (0 R:0-7 D:O]:
CE310
Enter memory size (in K words)
CE320
Do you want floating point processor support? [Y/N D:N]: Y
CE330
Is your system clock programmable (KWll-P)? [Y/N D:N]:
CE350
Is your line frequency 50 Hz? [Y/N D:N]:
[D R:0.-255. D:30.]:
[D R:l28.-1920. D:256.]:
>;=============================================================
>;
Choosing Peripheral Configuration
19-APR-83 at 17:32
>;=============================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA2.CMD.
>;
>; Enter a comment for inclusion in the SYSGENSA2 saved answer file.
>; The comment may contain more than one line.
>; margin below marks the maximum line length.
>; press RETURN in response to the prompt.
>;
D-28
The "V" in the right
When you are done,
v
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>*
>*
>*
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
Comment [S R:0.-55.]: Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generation
Comment [S R:0.-55.]: and Installation Guide
Comment [S R:0.-55.]:
CP0604
How many RH controllers do you have? [D R:0.-15. D:4.]: 3
CP0612
Do you want to generate a mixed MASSBUS configuration? [Y/N D:N]:
A mixed MASSBUS configuration has different device types on the
same RH controller.
For example, a DB type disk and a DR type disk
both connected to RHA.
Having an RP04 and an RP06 (both DB type
disks) connected to the same controller is NOT a mixed MASSBUS
configuration.
If you choose to generate a mixed MASSBUS configuration, all the
MASSBUS device data bases will be resident.
CP0612
Do you want to generate a mixed MASSBUS configuration? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>;
>;
DB:
>;
>* CP0808
>;
>;
>;
DR:
>;
controllers: RHll, RH70
devices: RP04, RP05, RP06
How many RP04/05/06 disk drives do you have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
controllers: RHll, RH70
RH70
devices: RM02
RM03, RM05, RM80, RP07
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
CP1008
How many RM02/03/05/80/RP07 disk drives do you
have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]: 4
CP1020
Are any of the units dual-access? [Y/N D:N]:
A dual-access unit is one that is connected to two controllers
at one time, and may be accessed from either controller at the
option of the system software. Since a single device unit may
have only one physical unit number, a dual-access unit must be
attached to both controllers with the same unit number.
CP1020
Are any of the units dual-access? [Y/N D:N]: Y
CP1036
What is the physical unit number of DRO:? [O R: 0-7 D: O] :
CP1040
Is DRO: a dual-access unit? [Y/N D:N]: y
CP1048
To which RH controller is port A of DRO: connected? [S R:l-1]: A
CP1048
To which RH controller is port B of DRO: connected? [S R:l-1]: B
CP1060
Is DRO: an RM02, RM03, RM05, RM80, or RP07? [S R:4-4 D: II RP07 "] : RM02
CP1036
What is the physical unit number of DRl:? [O R:0-7 D: l]:
CP1040
Is DRl: a dual-access unit? [Y/N D:N]: y
CP1048
To which RH controller is port A of DRl: connected? [S R:l-1]: A
CP1048
To which RH controller is port B of DRl: connected? [S R:l-1): B
CP1060
Is DRl: an RM02, RM03, RM05, RM80, or RP07? [S R:4-4 D:"RP07"]: RM02
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
D-29
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
CP1036
What is the physical unit number of DR2:? [O R:0-7 D: 2] :
CP1040
Is DR2: a dual-access unit? [Y/N D:N] : y
CP1048
To which RH controller is port A of DR2: connected? [S R:l-1]: A
CP1048
To which RH controller is port B of DR2: connected? [S R:l-1]: B
CP1060
Is DR2: an RM02, RM03, RM05, RM80, or RP07? [S R:4-4 D: "RP07"]: RM02
CP1036
What is the physical unit number of DR3:? [O R:0-7 D: 3] :
CP1040
Is DR3: a dual-access unit? [Y/N D: N] : y
CP1048
To which RH controller is port A of DR3: connected? [S R:l-1]: A
CP1048
To which RH controller is port B of DR3: connected? [S R:l-1]: B
CP1060
Is DR3: an RM02, RM03, RM05, RM80, or RP07? [S R: 4-4 D: "RP07 "] : RM02
DS:
CP1208
EM:
CP1408
MM:
controllers: RHll, RH70
devices: RS03, RS04
How many RS03/04 disk drives do you have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
controllers: RHll, RH70
device: MLll
How many MLll disks do you have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
controllers: RHll, RH70
formatters:
TM02, TM03
devices: TE16, TU16, TU45, TU77
CP1608
How many TU16/45/77/TE16 tape drives do you
have? [D R:0.-192. D:O.]: 5
CP1612
How many TM02/03 magtape formatters do you
have? [D R:l.-5. D:l.]:
Each TU16/45/77/TE16 drive unit is interfaced to the RH MASSBUS
controller through a TM02/03 magtape formatter.
A single formatter
is connected to the MASSBUS as one physical unit, and in turn will
support up to eight drives.
The formatter and the first drive interfaced to it are called
the "master drive" unit. Any additional drives on the formatter
>; are called "slave drive" units.
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>*
>;
>;
>*
>*
The TM02/03 formatter is usually located behind the lower front
door of the master drive.
It has a white physical unit number plug
inserted into it.
(Do not confuse it with the power supply.)
CP1612
How many TM02/03 magtape formatters do you
have? [D R:l.-5. D:l.]: 2
CP1636
What is the physical unit number of the next
formatter? [O R:0-7 D:O]:
>;
>* CP1644
>;
>* CP1652
>*
>;
To which RH controller is this formatter connected? [S R:l-1]: C
How many tape drives are attached to this
formatter? [D R:l.-4. D:4.]: 2
D-30
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>* CP1656
>;
>* CP1656
What is the physical unit number of MMO:? [O R:0-7 D:O]:
What is the physical unit number of MMl:? [O R:0-7 D:l]:
>;
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
CP1636
What is the physical unit number of the next
formatter? [O R:0-7 D:l]: 2
CP1644
To which RH controller is this formatter connected? [S R:l-1]: C
The 3. remaining tape drive(s)
will be allocated to this formatter.
CP1656
What is the physical unit number of MM2:? [O R:0-7 D:2]:
CP1656
What is the physical unit number of MM3:? [O R:0-7 D:3]:
CP1656
What is the physical unit number of MM4:? [O R:0-7 D:4]:
CP2068
Enter the vector address of RHA [O R:60-774 0:254]:
CP2072
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:176700]:
CP2068
Enter the vector address of RHB [O R:60-774 0:254]: 150
CP2072
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:176700]: 176300
CP2068
Enter the vector address of RHC [O R:60-774 0:224]:
CP2072
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:172440]:
RH Conf igura ti on
Physical Unit Number
>;
>;
>; RHA
>; RHB
>; RHC
>;
0
1
2
3
DRO
DRO
MMO
DRl:
DRl:
OR2:
OR2:
MM2:
OR3:
OR3:
>;
>;
>;
>; Master
>;
>; MMO:
>; MM2:
>;
>;
MM Master I
4
5
6
7
Slave Configuration
Slave Units
MMl:
MM3:
thru
MM4:
>;
>;
>;
DK:
>;
>* CP2204
>;
>;
DM:
>;
>;
controller:
RKll
devices: RK05, RK05F
How many RKll cartridge disk controllers do you have? [O 0:0]:
controllers: RK611, RK711
devices: RK06, RK07
D-31
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>*
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>*
CP2404
How many RK611/711 disk cartridge controllers do
you have? [O D:O]:
controllers: RLll, RLV12
DL:
devices: RLOl, RL02
CP2604
How many RLll/RLVll disk cartridge controllers do
you have? [O D:O]: 1
CP2608
How many RL01/RL02 disk drives do you have? [D R:l.-63. D:l.]: 2
CP2636
What is the physical unit number of ?LO:? [O R:0-7 D:O]:
CP2660
Is DLO: an RLOl or RL02? [S R:4-4 D:"RL02"]:
CP2636
What is the physical unit number of DLl:? [O R:0-7 D:l]:
CP2660
rs DLl: an RLOl or RL02? [S R:4-4 D:"RL02"]:
CP2668
Enter the vector address of DLA [O R:60-774 0:160]:
>;
>* CP2672
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
0
>;
>; DLA
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
DU:
CP3004
CR:
CP4004
CT:
CP4204
MS:
CP4404
DT:
DL Configuration
Physical Unit Number
1
DLO:
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
DP:
>;
>* CP2804
>;
>;
>;
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 D:l74400]:
3
2
4
5
6
7
DLl:
controller:
RPll
devices: RP02, RPR02, RP03
How many RPll disk pack controllers do you have? [O D:O]:
controllers: RQDXl, UDASO
devices:
RXSO, RDSl, RC25, RAGO, RASO, RA81
How many MSCP disk controllers do you have? [D R:0.-63. D:O.]:
controllers: CMll, CRll
How many CM/CRll card readers do you have? [O D:O]:
controller:
TAll
device:
TU60
How many TAll dual cassettes do you have? [O D:O]:
controllers: TSll, TU80, TSVOS
How many TS11/TU80/TSV05 magtape controllers do you have? [O D:O]:
controller:
TCll
device:
D-32
TU56
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>* CP4604
>;
>;
>;
DX:
>;
>* CP4804
>;
>;
>;
DY:
How many TCll DECtape controllers do you have? [O D:O]:
controller:
RXll
device:
RXOl
How many RXll disk controllers do you have? [O D:O]:
controller:
RX211
device:
RX02
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
CP5004
How many RX211 disk controllers do you have? [O D:O]: 1
CP5068
Enter vector address of the next RX211 [O R:60-774 D:264]:
CP5072
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 D:l77170]:
CP5076
How many drives does DYA have? [D R:l.-2. D:2.]:
DD:
controller:
CP5204
LP:
DLll
device:
TU58
How many TU58 controllers do you have? (0 D:O]:
controllers: LA180, LNOl, LPll., LSll, LVll
devices:
LA180, LNOl, LPOl', LP02, LP04, LP05, LP06,
LP07, LP14, LP25, LP26, LP27, LSll, LVOl
CP5404
How many LP/LS/LV11/LA180 line printers do you have? (0 D:O]: 1
CP5408
Enter the number of seconds between
line printer-not-ready messages [D R:0.-255. D:l5.]: 240.
CP5468
Enter vector address of the next line
printer [O R:60-774 D:200]:
CP5472
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 D:l77514]:
CP5480
Enter line printer type for LPA [S R:4-5 D:"LP25"]:
Here is a table of the valid line printer types and their
characteristics:
printer
type
controller
# of
columns
lines per
minute
LA180
LNOl
LPOl
LP02
LP04
LP05
LP06
LP07
LP14
LP25
LP26
LP27
LSll
LVOl
LA180
LNOl
LPll-F/H
LPll-J/K
LPll-R/S
LPll-V/W
LPll-Y/Z
LPll-G
LPll-C/D
LPll-A/B
LPll-E
LPll-U
LSll
LVll
132
132
80
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
150
600
170-1110
170-1110
1110
300
460-600
1200
660-900
215-300
445-600
800-1200
60-200
500
D-33
supports
optimi za ti on
no
NA
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
The printer type is used to set two characteristics in the UCB:
0
Column or buffer width
This is settable in VMR or MCR with the SET /BUF command.
0
Fast line printer support
This is an optimization performed by the driver to eliminate
unnecessary print cycles. This characteristic is not settable
in VMR or MCR.
If you specify the wrong printer type and the driver performs
the optimization for a printer that does not support it, you
will occasionally lose a line of a listing when the printer
is taken off line.
If you specify the wrong printer type and the driver does not
perform the optimization for a printer that supports it, the
printer will run a little slower than it would with the
optimization, but there will be no other adverse effects.
If you do not know the correct printer type for.your printer, take
the default. This will give you a 132-column printer without fast
printer optimization. Once your system is running, you can change
the number of columns if necessary with the MCR SET command.
CP5480
Enter line printer type for LPA [S R:4-5 D:"LP25"]:
CP5484
Does LPA have lowercase characters? [Y/N D:N]: Y
MT:
CP5604
PP:
CP5804
PR:
CP6004
LA:
CP6204
IP:
controllers: TMll, TMAll, TMBll
devices: TElO, TUlO, TUlOW, TS03
How many TM/TMA/TMBll magtape controllers do you have? [O D:O]:
controller:
PCll
How many PCll paper tape reader/punches do you have? [O D:O]:
controller:
PRll
How many PRll paper tape readers do you have? [O D:O]:
controller:
LPAll
How many LPAll lab subsystems do you have? [D R:0.-16. D:O.]:
controller:
IPll
>;
>* CP6404
>;
>;
>;
TT:
>;
>* CP6804
>;
How many IPll industrial control subsystems do you have? [O D:O]:
controllers: DLll, DLVll
controller mnemonic: YL
Enter number of additional DLll/DLVll line interfaces [O D:O]:
D-34
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
>;
>;
CP6832
TT:
controllers:
>;
OHll, OHVll
controller mnemonic: YH
CP7004
Enter number of OHll/OHVll asynchronous line
multiplexers [O R:0.-16. 0:0.]: 1
CP7020
Enter total number of OHll/OHVll dial-up lines [O R:0.-16. 0:0.]: 4
CP7028
At which baud rate do you want to answer? [S R:2-5 0:"300"]:
The valid baud rates are:
50
75
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>*
>;
>*
>;
>*
>;
>;
Enter terminal type for YLA [S R:4-6 O:"LA120"]:
llO
134.5
150
200
300
600
1200
1800
2400
4800
9600
EXTA (external clock A)
EXTB (external clock B)
CP7028
At which baud rate do you want to answer? [S R: 2-5 O: "300 "]: 1200
CP7040
Enter total number of OHll/OHVll local lines [O R:0.-12. 0:0.]: 12
CP7068
Enter vector address of YHA [O R:300-770]: 310
CP7072
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700]: 160020
CP7076
Enter vector address of the OMll-BB associated
with YHA [O R:300-774]: 300
CP7080
What is its CSR address? [O R:l60000-177700 0:170500]:
CP7084
Enter terminal type for YHA [S R:4-6 O:"VTlOO"]:
TT:
>;
>* CP7204
>*
>;
>;
>;
TT:
>;
>* CP7404
>*
>;
>;
>* CP7604
controller:
OJll
controller mnemonic: YJ
Enter number of DJll asynchronous line
multiplexers [O R:0.-15. 0:0.]:
controllers: OZll, OZVll
controller mnemonic: YZ
Enter number of DZll/OZVll asynchronous line
multiplexers [O R:0.-30. 0:0.]:
Do you have any intercomputer communication devices? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>;
>; Enter device mnemonics for any user-supplied drivers. The driver
>; source files must reside in [11,10] and be named ddORV.MAC and
>; ddTAB.MAC where dd is the device mnemonic.
>;
0-35
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>; You may enter the mnemonics on more than one line. When you have
>; listed all the drivers, press RETURN when asked for the device
>; mnemonic.
>;
>; The device mnemonic must not include a colon.
>;
>* CP9604
>* CP9604
Enter device mnemonics for user-supplied drivers (SJ: JA
Enter device mnemonics for user-supplied drivers (SJ:
>* CP9612
Do you want the JA: driver to be loadable? [Y/N D:NJ: Y
>* CP9616
Do you want the JA: driver's data base to be loadable? [Y/N D:NJ: Y
>;
>;
>;
>;
>; The highest vector among the devices you specified in this SYSGEN
>; is 374(octal). This is the default response for this question.
>;
>* CP9632
>*
>;
What is the highest interrupt vector
address? [O R:374-774 D:374J:
>; If you will be adding other devices after this SYSGEN or have
>; included user-supplied devices, you will want to set the highest
>; interrupt vector address high enough to accommodate the vectors for
>; those devices.
>;
>; The highest vector among the devices you specified in this SYSGEN
>; is 374(octal). This is the default response for this question.
>;
>* CP9632
>*
What is the highest interrupt vector
address? [O R:374-774 D:374J: 774
>;
>;
>;
>;================================================================
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
19-APR-83 at 17:42
>;================================================================
>;
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200JSYSGENSA1.CMD.
>;
>!PIP RSXMC3.MAC=RSXMC1.MAC,RSXMC2.MAC
>!PIP RSXMC.MAC=RSXMC3.MAC,RSXMCO.MAC
>;
>!SET /UIC=[l,24J
>!PIP [ll,10J/NV=[200,200JRSXMC.MAC
>!PIP [ll,10J/NV=[200,200JSYSTB.MAC
>!PIP [ll,24J/NV=[200,200JRSXASM.CMD
>!PIP [ll,24]/NV=[200,200JDRIVERS.ASM
>;
>;
>* AEOlO
Do you want assembly listings of the Executive and
>*
drivers? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>;
>* AE020
What is to be the listing device [ddu:]? [S R:2-S D:"SY:"J:
>;
>!ASN SY:=LS:
>;
>;
>* AE030
>*
>;
Do you wish to pause to edit any files before
assembling? [Y/N D:NJ: Y
>; SYSGEN will now pause to let you edit any files before assembling
>; the Executive and drivers.
>;
D-36
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>!SET /UIC=[ll,24]
>;
>!PIP •.OBJ;*/DE/NM,*.TTY;*
>;
>I TIME
>;
>!MAC @RSXASM
>;
>!TIME
>;
>!MAC @DRIVERS.ASM
>;
>I TIME
>;
>!PIP RSXllM.OBS=*.OBJ
>!PIP TTDRV.OBS=*.TTY
>;
>!SET /UIC=[200,200]
>!PIP /NV=[ll,lO]RSXMC.MAC
>;
>!SET
>!PIP
>!PIP
>!PIP
>;
/UIC=[l,24]
RSXBLD.CMD/PU/NM
RSXllM.OLB;*/DE/NM
[200,200]RSXMC.MAC/PU/NM
>ILBR RSX11M/CR:256.:2112.:256.=[ll,24]RSX11M.OBS
>;
>!LBR TTDRV/CR:40.:392.:128.=[ll,24]TTDRV.OBS
>;
>;
>;
>;==============================================================
>;
Building the Executive and Drivers
19-APR-83 at 17:43
>;==============================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
>;
>!SET /UIC=[l,54]
>!PIP SYSVMR.CMD=[200,200]SYSVMR.CMD,VMRTTY.CMD
>;
>;
>* BE030
>*
>;
Do you want to pause to edit any files before
task-building? [Y/N D:N]:
>!SET /UIC=[l,24]
>!PIP [l,24]/NV/NM=[200,200]RSXBLD.CMD,RSX11M,DSP11M,LDR11M
>!PIP [l,24]/NV=[200,200]DIR11M.CMD,DR211M,DIRCOM,DR2COM,DIR
>;
>!TIME
>;
>!TKB @RSXBLD
>;
>!TIME
>;
>!TKB @[200,200]DRIVERS.BLD
>;
>!TIME
>;
>;
>;
D-37
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>;=========================================================
19-APR-83 at 17:43
>; Building the Privileged Tasks
>;=========================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD.
>;
>;
>* BP040
>;
Do you want the maps of the privileged tasks? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>* BPOSO
What is to be the map device [ddu:]? [S R:2-5 D:"SY:"]:
>;
>!ASN SY:=MP:
>;
>!SET /UIC=[l,24]
>·I
>!TIME
>;
>!TKB @ACCRESBLD
>!TKB @ACNRESBLD
>!TKB @ACSRESBLD
>!TKB @BOOBLD
>!TKB @BPRBLD
>!TKB @BROBLD
>!TKB @BYEBLD
>!TKB @DMOBLD
>!TKB @ELIRESBLD
>!TKB @ERLBLD
>!TKB @FCPLRGBLD
>!TKB @FXRBLD
>!TKB @FllMSGBLD
>!TKB @HELRESBLD
>!TKB @HRCBLD
>!TKB @INIBLD
>!TKB @INSBLD
>!TKB @LOABLD
>!TKB @LPPRESBLD
>!TKB @MCRBLD
>!TKB @MCDBLD
>!TKB @MOUBLD
>!TKB @MTABLD
>!TKB @PMDRESBLD
>!TKB @PMTBLD
>!TKB @QMGRESBLD
>!TKB @RMDBLD
>!TKB @SAVBLD
>!TKB @SHFBLD
>!TKB @SHUBLD
>!TKB @SYLRESBLD
>!TKB @TKNBLD
>!TKB @UFDBLD
>!TKB @UNLRESBLD
>.I
>!TIME
>;
> !ASN LB:=OU:
>
>
>
D-38
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>;============================================================
>; Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
19-APR-83 at 17:43
>;============================================================
>;
>;
>;
>; The answers to the questions in this section are put in the saved
>; answer file [200,200]SYSGENSA3.CMD.
>;
>;
>* BNOlO
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
Do you want to rebuild any nonprivileged tasks? [Y/N D:N]: Y
Enter a comment for inclusion in the SYSGENSA3 saved answer file.
The comment may contain more than one line. The "V" in the right
margin below marks the maximum line length. When you are done,
press RETURN in response to the prompt.
>;
>* Comment [S R:0.-55.]: Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generation
>* Comment [S R:0.-55.]: and Installation Guide
>* Comment [S R:0.-55.]:
>;
>; The following nonpr iv i l eged tasks and utilities can be built at this time:
>;
BAD
>;
DMPFSL
IOX
RPTFSL
BRU
DSC
IOXRES
SLP
>;
CDA
>;
EDI
IOXFSL
SLPRES
CDARES
ED IRES
LBR
SLPFSL
>;
>;
CDAFSL
EDIFSL
LBRRES
STK
CFL
EDT
>;
LBRFSL
STKFSL
CFLFSL
>;
EDTRES
MAC
TDX
CMP
EDTFSL
MAC RES
TKB
>;
>;
CM PRES
FLX
MACFSL
TKBRES
CMPFSL
FLXRES
PAT
TKBFSL
>;
CON
>;
FLXFSL
PATRES
VFY
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
CRF
CRFRES
CRFFSL
DCL
OLD
DMP
DMPRES
FMT
FTB
FTBRES
FTBFSL
ICM
ICM RES
ICMFSL
PATFSL
PIP
PI PRES
PIPFSL
QMGCLI
QMGPRT
RPT
VF YR ES
VFYFSL
VMR
ZAP
ZAPRES
ZAPFSL
>;
>; Press ESC to repeat this list of all the nonprivileged tasks
>; and utilities.
>;
>; Enter ALL to build all the non-FCSRES and non-FCSFSL tasks.
>; Enter ALLRES to build all the FCSRES tasks. Enter ALLFSL to
>; build all the FCSFSL tasks.
>;
>; Enter the task names separated by commas. You can enter them on
>; more than one line. When you are done, finish the list with a
>; period or press RETURN in response to the prompt.
>;
>* BN020
>*
Enter task name(s) [S]: ALLRES
Enter task name ( s) [S] :
>* BN030
Do you want the maps of the nonprivileged tasks? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>;
>·,
>!ASN NL:=MP:
>;
>* BN050
>*
>;
Do you want to pause to edit any files before
task-building? [Y/N D:N]:
D-39
v
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>!SET /UIC=[l,24]
>;
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
>!TKB
@CDARESBLD
@CMPRESBLD
@CRFRESBLD
@DMPRESBLD
@EDIRESBLD
@EDTRESBLD
@FLXRESBLD
@FTBRESBLD
@ICMRESBLD
@IOXRESBLD
@LBRRESBLD
@MACRESBLD
@PATRESBLD
@PIPRESBLD
@SLPRESBLD
@TKBRESBLD
@VFYRESBLD
@ZAPRESBLD
>;
>;
>;
>;==========================================================
>;
Creating the System Image File
19-APR-83 at 17:45
>;==========================================================
>;
>;
>!SET /UIC=[l,54]
>;
>!PIP OU:RSX11M.SYS/CO/NV/BL:l026.=RSX11M.TSK
>;
>!ASN LB:=SY:
> ! VMR @SYSVMR
>;
>; End of SYSGEN
>;
>TIME
17:45:51 19-APR-83
>;
>ASN =
>;
>@
>
>
>ASN DR2:=SY:
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>
>
>@SYSGEN
>;
>; RSX-llM-PLUS
>;
SYSGEN
BL15
>; COPYRIGHT (C)
1983
>; DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP., MAYNARD MA., 01754
>;
>TIM
17:47:14 19-APR-83
>;
>; To exit from the SYSGEN procedure at any time, type CTRL/Z.
>;
>; If you are unsure of the answer to a question for which a de>; fault answer exists, use the default answer.
>;
D-40
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>; Every question is preceded by a question number (for example SUOlO)
>; which you can use to find the explanation of the question in the
·>; RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide.
>;
>; An explanation of every question is also available by pressing
>; the ESC key (or the ALTMODE key) in response to the question.
>;
>; If you are unfamiliar with the SYSGEN procedure, the explanation of
>; each question can be printed automatically before the question.
>;
>* SUOlO
Do you always want the explanation printed? [Y/N D:N]:
>;
>; SYSGEN always creates saved answer files containing your responses
>; to the SYSGEN questions:
>;
Setup questions, Executive options
>;
SYSGENSAl.CMD
Peripheral configuration
SYSGENSA2.CMD
>;
Nonprivileged task builds
SYSGENSA3.CMD
>;
>;
>; You should perform a PREPGEN first to create saved answer files, and
>; then perform a SYSGEN, specifying those saved answer files as input
>; to the Executive, peripheral, and nonprivileged task build sections.
>;
>* SU020
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the Executive options? [Y/N D:N] : Y
>* SU030
Enter saved answer file name [S D:"SYSGENSAl.CMD"]:
>;
>;
>* SU040
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the peripheral configuration? [Y/N D:N] : Y
suoso
Enter saved answer file name [S D:"SYSGENSA2.CMD"]:
>* SU060
>*
Do you want to use a saved answer file as input for
the nonprivileged task builds? [Y/N D:N]: Y
>;
>*
>;
>;
>* SU070
Enter saved answer file name [S D:"SYSGENSA3.CMD"]:
>;
>* SU080
Do you want to do a PREPGEN? [Y/N D:N]:
>* SU090
>*
Enter the name of the disk drive containing your
target system disk [ddnn:] [S R:2-5]: DR2:
>;
>;
>;
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
>ASN
DR2:=IN:
DR2:=0U:
DR2:=SY:
DR2:=LB:
DR2:=WK:
DR2:=TK:
DR2:=BC:
DR2:=LI:
DR2:=0B:
DR2:=EX:
DR2:=MP:
>;
>; You can:
>;
>;
o
do a complete SYSGEN
o
continue a previous SYSGEN from where you left off
o
do an individual section of SYSGEN
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
D-41
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>*
>;
>;
>;
Do you want to do a complete SYSGEN? [Y/N D:Y]:
SU120
>;======================================================
>; Choosing Executive Options
19-APR-83 at 17:47
>;======================================================
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
using saved answer file DR2: [200,200]SYSGENSA1.CMD;l
created on 19-APR-83 at 17:30:24.
Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generation
and Installation Guide
>;=============================================================
>; Choosing Peripheral Configuration
19-APR-83 at 17:47
>;=============================================================
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
Using saved answer file DR2:[200,200]SYSGENSA2.CMD;l
created on 19-APR-83 at 17:32:26.
Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generation
and Installation Guide
DR:
controllers: RHll, RH70
RH70
devices: RM02
RM03, RMOS, RM80, RPO?
MM:
controllers: RHll, RH70
formatters:
TM02, TM03
devices: TE16, TU16, TU45, TU77
RH Configuration
Physical Unit Number
>;
>;
>;
>; RHA
>; RHB
>; RHC
0
1
2
3
DRO:
DRO:
MMO:
DRl:
DRl:
DR2:
DR2:
MM2:
DR3:
DR3:
4
5
6
>;
>;
>;
>;
>; Master
>;
>; MMO:
>; MM2:
>;
>;
>;
>;
DL:
>;
>;
MM Master I
Slave Configuration
Slave Units
MMl:
MM3:
thru
MM4:
controllers: RLll, RLV12
devices: RLOl, RL02
D-42
7
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
DL Configuration
Physical Unit Number
>; DLA
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;
0
1
DLO:
DLl:
2
3
RX211
4
device:
6
5
7
RX02
DY:
controller:
LP:
controllers: LA180, LNOl, LPll, LSll, LVll
devices:
LA180, LNOl, LPOl, LP02, LP04, LP05, LP06,
LP14, LP25, LP26, LP27, LSll, LVOl
LP07,
TT:
controllers: DLll, DLVll
controller mnemonic: YL
TT:
controllers:
controller mnemonic: YH
DHll, DHVll
>;
>; SGN -- Warning: JADRV.MAC is not in [11,10] on the target system
>;
disk.
It must be put there before the Executive is assembled.
>;
>;
>; SGN -- Warning: JATAB.MAC is not in [11,10] on the target system
>;
disk.
It must be put there before the Executive is assembled.
>;
>;
>;
>;
>;================================================================
>;
Assembling the Executive and Drivers
19-APR-83 at 17:54
>;================================================================
>;
>;
>PIP RSXMC3.MAC=RSXMC1.MAC,RSXMC2.MAC
>PIP RSXMC.MAC=RSXMC3.MAC,RSXMCO.MAC
>;
>SET
>PIP
>PIP
>PIP
>PIP
/UIC=[l,24]
[11,10]/NV=[200,200]RSXMC.MAC
[ll,10]/NV=[200,200]SYSTB.MAC
[ll,24]/NV=[200,200]RSXASM.CMD
[ll,24]/NV=[200,200]DRIVERS.ASM
>;
>;
>ASN SY:=LS:
>;
>;
>; SYSGEN will now pause to let you edit any files before assembling
>; the Executive and drivers.
>;
AT.T36
Pausing. To continue type "UNS AT."
>
SET /UIC=[ll,10]
>PIP /NV=DB7: [7,20]JADRV.MAC,JATAB
>UNS AT.
AT.T36 -- Continuing
>;
>SET /UIC=[ll,24]
>;
D-43
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>PIP *.OBJ;*/DE/NM,*.TTY;*
>;
>TIME
17:55:17 19-APR-83
>;
>MAC @RSXASM
>;
>TIME
18:15:47 19-APR-83
>;
>MAC @DRIVERS.ASM
>;
>TIME
18:26:59 19-APR-83
>;
>PIP RSXllM.OBS=*.OBJ
>PIP TTDRV.OBS=*.TTY
>;
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>PIP /NV=[ll,lO]RSXMC.MAC
>;
>SET
>PIP
>PIP
>PIP
>;
/UIC=[l,24]
RSXBLD.CMD/PU/NM
RSXllM.OLB;*/DE/NM
[200,200]RSXMC.MAC/PU/NM
>LBR RSX11M/CR:256.:2112.:256.=[ll,24]RSX11M.OBS
>;
>LBR TTDRV/CR:40.:392.:128.=[ll,24]TTDRV.OBS
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>;
>;
>;==============================================================
>;
Building the Executive and Drivers
19-APR-83 at 18:29
>;==============================================================
>;
>;
>SET
>SET
>SET
>PIP
/UIC=[l,24]
/UIC=[200,200]
/UIC=[l,54]
SYSVMR.CMD=[200,200]SYSVMR.CMD,VMRTTY.CMD
>;
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>SET /UIC=[l,24]
>PIP [l,24]/NV/NM=[200,200]RSXBLD.CMD,RSX11M,DSP11M,LDR11M
>PIP [l,24]/NV=[200,200]DIR11M.CMD,DR211M,DIRCOM,DR2COM,DIR
>;
>TIME
18:33:37 19-APR-83
>;
>TKB @RSXBLD
>;
>TIME
18:38:09 19-APR-83
>;
>TKB @[200,200]DRIVERS.BLD
>;
>TIME
18:40:15 19-APR-83
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>;
>;
D-44
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>;=========================================================
>; Building the Privileged Tasks
19-APR-83 at 18:40
>;=========================================================
>;
>;
>;
>ASN SY:=MP:
>;
>SET /UIC=[l,24]
>;
>TIME
18:40:19 19-APR-83
>;
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
@ACCRESBLD
@ACNRESBLD
@ACSRESBLD
@BOOBLD
@BPRBLD
@BROBLD
@BYEBLD
@DMOBLD
@ELIRESBLD
@ERLBLD
@FCPLRGBLD
@FXRBLD
@FllMSGBLD
@HELRESBLD
@HRCBLD
@INIBLD
@INSBLD
@LOABLD
@LPPRESBLD
@MCRBLD
@MCDBLD
@MOUBLD
@MTABLD
@PMDRESBLD
@PMTBLD
@QMGRESBLD
@RMDBLD
@SAVBLD
@SHFBLD
@SHUBLD
@SYLRESBLD
@TKNBLD
@UFDBLD
@UNLRESBLD
>;
>TIME
19:12:54 19-APR-83
>;
>ASN LB:=OU:
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>;
>;
D-45
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
>;============================================================
>; Building the Nonprivileged Tasks
19-APR-83 at 19:12
>;============================================================
>;
>;
>;Using saved answer file DR2:[200,200]SYSGENSA3.CMD;l
>; created on 19-APR-83 at 17:43:51.
>;
>; Example SYSGEN for RSX-llM-PLUS V2.l System Generation
>; and Installation Guide
>;
>;
>SET /UIC=[l,24]
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
>;
>ASN NL:=MP:
>;
>SET /UIC=[l,24]
>;
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>TKB
>SET
>;
>;
>;
@CDARESBLD
@CMPRESBLD
@CRFRESBLD
@DMPRESBLD
@EDIRESBLD
@EDTRESBLD
@FLXRESBLD
@FTBRESBLD
@ICMRESBLD
@IOXRESBLD
@LBRRESBLD
@MACRESBLD
@PATRESBLD
@PIPRESBLD
@SLPRESBLD
@TKBRESBLD
@VFYRESBLD
@ZAPRESBLD
/UIC=[200,200]
>;==========================================================
>; Creating the System Image File
19-APR-83 at 19:35
>;==========================================================
>;
>;
>SET /UIC=[l,54]
>;
>PIP OU:RSX11M.SYS/CO/NV/BL:l026.=RSX11M.TSK
>;
>ASN LB:=SY:
>VMR @SYSVMR
VMR -- *DIAG*-Installed tasks or commons may no longer fit in partition
SET /TOP=SYSPAR:-*
VMR -- *DIAG*-Loadable driver larger than 4K
LOA TT:/SIZE=l6300
VMR -- *DIAG*-Installed tasks or commons may no longer fit in partition
SET /TOP=DRVPAR:-*
SECPOL 117734 00120000 00100000 SEC POOL
SYSPAR 117670 00220000 00100300 MAIN
117624 00220000 00034000 RO COM !DIRllM!
11 7540 00254000 00003400 TASK
[ ••• LOR]
116624 00257400 00026200 TASK
[MCR ••• ]
116424 00305600 00007400 TASK
[TKTN ]
D-46
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
116224
DRVPAR 116144
116100
115060
114130
113540
1131 74
112734
112524
112460
112414
112064
GEN
112000
••• LOR 11.05
TKTN
06.00
FllMSG 13. 00
MTAACP 14.00
MCR ••• 5.00
FllACP os.oo
ERR LOG 2.00
PMT ••• 2.00
HRC ••• 02
PMD ••• 06.00
SYS LOG 1.03
SHF ••• 6.00
FXR ••• 02.00
BAPO
04.00
QMG ••• 03.00
LPO
03.00
ACNT
05.00
SHUTUP 03.00
• • • RMD 2.00
••• DCL 2.0
••• OMO 04.00
••• MCR 3.00
••• MOU 26.00
••• CA. 11
••• INS 14.00
••• SAV 08.00
••• UFO 05.00
••• ACS 2.01
••• ACC 2.0
••• AT. 6.0
••• IN! 23.00
••• HOM 23.00
• • • BRO 05.00
••• BYE 03.00
••• HEL 2.00
• • • PIP 16. 00
••• UNL 4.0
• • • BOO 06.02
••• CON 02
••• ELI 1.00
••• LOA 4.0
••• MAG 01.02
RHA
OFL
RHB
OFL
RHC
OFL
YLA
OFL
YHA
OFL
YMA
OFL
DLA
OFL
OYA
OFL
LPA
OFL
JAA
OFL
00315200 00003100 TASK
[SHF ••• ]
00320300 00064200 MAIN
00320300 00034600 DRIVER (TT:)
00355100 00005400 DRIVER (DR:)
00362500 00005300 DRIVER (MM:)
00370000 00003100 DRIVER (DL:)
00373100 00003100 DRIVER (DY:)
00376200 00001100 DRIVER (LP:)
00377300 00000100 DRIVER (NL:)
00377400 00002400 DRIVER (VT:)
00402000 00001300 DRIVER (RD:)
00403300 00001200 DRIVER (JA:)
00404500 01373300 MAIN
117400 SYSPAR 248. 00003400 LB0:-00232074
1164 70 SYSPAR 248. 00007400 LB0:-00240215
110054 GEN
200. 00006100 LB0:-00233716
107474 GEN
200. 00015100 LB0:-00236434
117074 SYSPAR 160. 00026200 LB0:-002361Sl
111S70 GEN
149. 00014200 LB0:-00233S67
148. 00042SOO LBO: -002334 71
111240 GEN
110600 GEN
148. 00006700 LB0:-00237210
107614 GEN
140. OOOS6200 LB0:-00234617
107350 GEN
140. 00017000 LB0:-00237140
110330 GEN
130. 00021300 LB0:-002401SS
116270 SYSPAR 105. 00003100 LB0:-00240027
107734 GEN
100. 00003200 LB0:-00233706
111360 GEN
80. 00046600 LB0:-00232677
110454 GEN
7S. 00033SOO LB0:-0023722S
111014 GEN
70. 00014600 LB0:-00235307
so. 00040300 LB0:-00232537
110204 GEN
107230 GEN
50. 00012000 LB0:-00240040
001232+ GEN
22S • 00030200 LB0:-00237320
001206+ GEN
160. 00040500 LB0:-00011370
001210+ GEN
160. 00016200 LB0:-00233403
001224+ GEN
160. 00040200 LB0:-00235620
001226+ GEN
160. 00040300 LB0:-00236313
001254+ GEN
lSO. 00022300 LB0:-00022160
001222+ GEN
100. 00043700 LB0:-0023S026
001252+ GEN
100. 00055SOO LB0:-00237706
0012S6+ GEN
100. OOOOS700 LB0:-00240330
001236+ GEN
70. oooosooo LB0:-00232612
001200+ GEN
65. 00031200 LB0:-00232336
001214+ GEN
64. 00073700 LB0:-00015064
001216+ GEN
60. 00035100 LB0:-00234702
001220+ GEN
60. 0003Sl00 LB0:-00234702
001202+ GEN
so . 00034400 LB0:-00233213
001204+ GEN
so. OOOlSSOO LB0:-002333S4
001212+ GEN
50 • 00026700 LB0:-002337Sl
001230+ GEN
so . 00033400 LB0:-00017024
001234+ GEN
so. 00031600 LB0:-00240346
001240+ GEN
so • 00030200 LB0:-00232630
so. 00126100 LB0:-00011131
001242+ GEN
so. 00017400 LB0:-00233436
001244+ GEN
so. 00035700 LBO :-00235114
001246+ GEN
001250+ GEN
so. 00034300 LB0:-00237066
VEC=254 PRI=S
CPA
CSR=l76700
CPA
CSR=l76300
VEC=l50 PRI=5
VEC=224 PRI=5
CPA
CSR=l72440
CPA
CSR=l77560
VEC=60 PRI=S
VEC=310 PRI=S
CPA
CSR=l60020
CPA
CSR=l70500
VEC=300 PRI=S
VEC=l60 PRI=S
CPA
CSR=l74400
VEC=264 PRI=S
CPA
CSR=l77170
VEC=200 PRI=4
CPA
CSR=l 77514
VEC=220 PRI=S
CPA
CSR=l77404
D-47
FIXED
FIXED
FIXED
FIXED
TWO SYSTEM GENERATION EXAMPLES
TTO:
YLAO:
OFL
TT!:
YHAO:
OFL
TT2:
YHAl:
OFL
TT3:
YHA2:
OFL
TT4:
YHA3:
OFL
TTS:
YHA4:
OFL
TT6:
YHA5:
OFL
TT7:
YHA6:
OFL
TTlO:
YHA7:
OFL
TTll:
YHAlO:
OFL
TT12:
YHAll:
OFL
TT13:
YHA12:
OFL
TT14:
YHA13:
OFL
TT15:
YHA14:
OFL
TT16:
YHA15:
OFL
TT17:
YHA16:
OFL
TT20:
YHA17:
OFL
VTO:
OFL
RDO:
ONL
DRO:
RHBO: RHAO:
OFL
DR!:
RHB!: RHAl:
OFL
DR2:
RHB2: RHA2:
OFL
DR3:
RHB3: RHA3:
OFL
MMO:
RHCO:
OFL
MM!:
RHCO:
OFL
MM2:
RHC2:
OFL
MM3:
RHC2:
OFL
MM4:
RHC2:
OFL
DLO:
DLAO:
OFL
DLl:
DLA!:
OFL
DYO:
DYAO:
OFL
DY!:
DYAl:
OFL
LPO:
LPAO:
OFL
NLO:
OFL
JAO:
JAAO:
OFL
JAl:
JAAl:
OFL
POOL=l200:1708.:02216.:1200
>SET /UIC=[200,200]
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
>;
>; End of SYSGEN
>;
>TIME
19:39:06 19-APR-83
>;
>ASN =
>;
>@
>
D-48
APPENDIX E
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
Specific algorithms exist for assigning UNIBUS addresses and interrupt
vector addresses to all devices attached to PDP-11 hardware. UNIBUS
addresses and interrupt vector address assignments are either floating
or fixed.
If a device has a floating address assignment, the presence
or absence of any floating address device affects the assignment of
addresses to other floating address devices.
Similarly, certain
devices have floating vector addresses.
Interrupt vectors must be assigned in a specific sequence and the
presence of one type of device affects the correct assignment of
interrupt vectors to other devices.
If a device has a fixed address
or vector, its location is unaffected by other devices on the system.
This appendix presents the algorithms for assigning floating addresses
and vectors.
It also lists the fixed assignments for devices
supported by the Autoconfigure task.
DIGITAL recommends that you
configure your hardware according to the configuration rules.
E.l
AUTOCONFIGURE DEVICE SUPPORT
The following table lists the devices supported by Autoconfigure. The
complete list of devices supported by RSX-llM-PLUS can be found in the
RSX-llM-PLUS Software Product Description.
Certain devices have floating CSR addresses. A complete description
of the algorithm used to determine these CSR addresses can be found in
Section E.2.
Table E-1 also identifies those devices that have floating vectors.
These devices can be identified by a ranking priority under the vector
label. The floating vectors begin at address 300{octal)
and proceed
continuously upward.
Gaps in the vector assignments are not required.
The
vector
assignment sequence is done based on ascending vector ranking.
That
is, the device with the lowest rank is assigned the next floating
vector address.
The autoconfiguration process dynamically computes
the vectors of all supported devices. This is done by forcing each
present device to interrupt.
E-1
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
Table E-1
Autoconfigure Device Support
Device
First
Vector
Maximum
Number
Ctrl
CSR
Address
Reg.
Size
Interrupt
Priority
177500
260
1.
4.
220
160
210
254
214
154
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
6
5
5
5
5
5
6
5
TAll
TU58
RKll
RL11/RL211
RK 611/RK 711
RPll
TCll
UDA50
177404
174400
177440
176174
177342
177510
4
10
20
20
40
40
20
4
RX11/RX211
RH11/RH70
RH11/RH70
RH11/RH70
RH11/RH70
RH11/RH70
RH11/RH70
1 77170
172040
172440
175400
176300
176400
176700
10
40
40
100
100
54
54
264
204
224
260
150
204
254
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
TMll
TS11/TU80
or TSV05
LP/LS/LVll
LP/LS/LVll
LP/LS/LVll
LP/LS/LVll
LP/LS/LVll
LP/LS/LVll
LP/LS/LVll
LP/LS/LVll
PRll
PCll
DHll/DHVll
DLll-A/B/J
DLll-C/D/E
DLll-W
DMll-BB
DZll/DZVll
172522
20
224
1.
5
172522
177514
164004
164014
164024
164034
164044
164054
164064
177550
177554
FLOAT
176500
175610
177560
170500
FLOAT
4
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
4
4
20
10
10
10
10
10
224
200
170
174
270
274
774
770
764
070
074
Rank
Rank
Rank
060
Rank
Rank
8.
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
4
5
5
E.2
1.
1.
1.
1.
16
2
14
6
28
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
16.
16.
31.
1.
16.
16.
Remarks
On an DLll
UDA, RC25, and
RQDXl devices
RS03/RS04
TU16/45/77 ,TE16
RS/RP /RM/TU ALT.
TU78
MLll
RP04/05/06/07 or
RM02/03/05/80
LPA
LPB
LPC
LPD
LPE
LPF
LPG
LPH
Console
FLOATING ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT ALGORITHM
The autoconfiguration process finds only the devices listed in the
previous table.
If the system contains devices not listed, you must
configure them manually.
The floating address space starts at 760010(octal) and proceeds upward
to 764000(octal). A gap in the address space (no SLAVE SYNC) implies
that a device does not exist.
The first address of a new type device is always on a 2*N word
boundary, where N is the first integer greater than or equal to LOG M
and M is the number of device registers.
E-2
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
Number of Registers
in Device
Possible Boundaries
2
Any word
XXXXXO,XXXXX4
3,4
5,6,7,8
9 thru 16
XXXXOO,XXXX20,XXXX40,XXXX60
XXXXOO,XXXX40
1
xxxxxo
A gap of at least one word is left after each type of device.
Note
that the gap must be at least one word but may be longer than one
word.
Address 760010 is reserved for the first DJll.
Since the DJll has
four
registers, additional DJlls are assigned addresses modulo
lO(octal) immediately following the first DJll (that is, 760010,
760020, and the like.) The modulo lO(octal) address following the last
DJll is left empty and is known as the DJll gap.
If there are no
DJlls, the gap is at 760010. If there is one DJll, the gap is at
760020. All gaps must be at least one word.
After all DJll addresses and the DJll gap are defined, the address for
the first DHll can be assigned. DHlls have eight registers, which
implies a modulo 20(octal) boundary. The address of the first DHll is
the first modulo 20 address following the DJll gap. If there are no
DJlls (DJll gap at 760010), the first DHll is assigned address 760020.
Similarly, if there is one DJll, the DJll gap begins at 760020 and the
next available modulo 20 boundary is 760040. All additional DHlls are
assigned addresses modulo 20 immediately after the first DHll. The
DHll gap begins on the modulo 20 boundary following the last DHll.
After all DHll addresses and the
DUPll, LKll, DMCll, DZll, and
can be assigned in sequence.
address devices will be assigned
E.3
OHll gap are defined, DQll, DUll,
KMCll addresses and the required gaps
Addresses for any future floating
in a similar manner.
FLOATING ADDRESS WORKSHEET
The algorithm for assigning floating addresses can be difficult to
follow for a large configuration with multiple units of several types
of floating address devices. The floating address worksheet (Figure
E-1) is provided as an aid in determining your hardware configuration.
The worksheet allows you to assign device addresses quickly, without
requiring that you refer to the algorithm. Section E.3.2 contains
instructions for using the worksheet, and a filled-out worksheet is
provided as an example (Example E-1) •
E.3.1
Worksheet Format
The worksheet is divided into four sections covering the address range
760010 through 762000. Although the floating address area continues
up through address 764000, the
worksheet
should
cover
most
configurations.
If necessary, you can create a second worksheet by
adding 2000 to all addresses listed.
E-3
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
E.3.2
Worksheet Instructions
The following are the instructions for the use of the worksheet:
1.
Record the quantity of each type of floating address
in the spaces provided on page 1 of the worksheet.
2.
Beginning at the upper left of the worksheet at address
760010 and proceeding down the DJll column, record the unit
numbers for all DJlls in the configuration. Begin with unit
0 and end with unit n-1.
(There are n DJlls in the
configuration.)
Immediately below the last DJll unit, mark
required DJll address gap.
Also mark
immediately to the right (DHll column).
device
an "X" for the
an "X" in the box
When numbering device units down the appropriate column, use
only the unshaded boxes. The shaded boxes represent illegal
addresses for the particular device type.
Because the gap
address must also be a legal device address, use only an
unshaded box for marking the gap with an "X" when numbering
down a column.
In marking an "X" in the column to the right of a device
address gap, use shaded boxes because the "X" in the next
column merely provides a starting point for numbering units
of the next device type.
If there are no units of a
particular device type, enter only the "X's" to mark the gap
on the worksheet.
If you use all available space in one section of the
worksheet, simply copy the entries on the last line of the
full section to the top line of the next section.
Then
continue numbering in the new section.
Continuing just below the "X" in the DHll column, number all
DHll units. Once again, start with unit 0 and end with unit
n-1. Skip the shaded boxes in numbering down the column. In
the first unshaded box below the last DHll unit, mark an "X"
for the DHll gap. Also mark an "X" in the box to the right
(whether it is shaded or unshaded).
Continue with the remaining floating address devices.
In
each case, number units from 0 through n-1 down the column
beginning in the first unshaded box below the "X".
Mark an
"X" in the next unshaded box below the last unit and in the
box immediately to the right of the last unit (whether that
box is shaded or unshaded) •
3.
After you have recorded all floating address devices, read
the UNIBUS address for each device unit directly from the
worksheet and list each address in the spaces provided on
page 2 of the worksheet.
E-4
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
0
Record quantity of each device:
DJ11
DH11
DQ11*
DU11 *
DUP11
LK11*
DMC11
DZ11
0
0
KMC11 * _ _ _
0_ _
0
@ Enter unit numbers:
DEVICE
ADDRESS
D
D
H
D
D
D
Q
u u
1
1
p
* *
DEVICE
L
K
D
M
D
z
K
M
1
1
c
1
c
*
ADDRESS
D
1
L
K
1
1
* *
*
D
D
D
H
Q
u u
D
p
1
D
M
c
D
z
K
M
c
1
*
*
~~wmw0aw0000wwv0
760400
760010
760410
rr (f ?frt ~~t~ i~~~ rt ff ?f l}tt t)\<
~tJ
760420
~{t
760430
760440
/\~
760450
760460
~{(
760470
760500
~~{~~~
760510
2_0-+----+~+----+--+----+-+--------+--+--+ft ~~~t~ }} )\
~~~)ti
760520
1--7_6_0_1
~tnt~
760140
760540
760150
760550
760160
760560
760170
;~t~~~
760530
1---76_0_13_0-+---+:=\={+----+---+-----+-+---+--+----+-l---+-t?
;?t
:){:
760570
))
760600
760200
760210
.. ..
760610
:{{
760620
760220
?/
760230
760630
..
760640
760240
~::\
760250
760650
......·
760660
760260
:···::
760270
··/::~
760670
.-:·:·.
760300
760700
760310
760710
760320
760720
760330
760730
760340
760740
760360
760760
....
..···::
~?/
760750
760370
760770
...
..
761000
760400
D
J
D
H
D
D
Q
u u
D
p
* *
L
K
1
1
D D
M z
c 1
D
K
M
D
H
D
D
Q
u u
c
D
p
* *
*
1
L
K
1
D
M
c
*
1
1
D
z
1
K
M
c
*
*
* This device is not supported on RSX-11 M-PLUS but this entry in the worksheet is required as a place holder.
ZK-620/1-82
Figure E-1
Blank Floating Address Worksheet
E-5
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
DEVICE
DEVICE
ADDRESS
D
D
H
D
D
D
a u u
p
* *
L
K
D
M
1
c
*
D
z
1
1
ADDRESS
K
M
D
D
D
D
L
D
D
K
H
0
U
U
p
K
M
Z
M
1
c
1
c
*
1
c
1
1
* *
*
761000
761400
~;~~~~~~~
761010
D
1
*
rr
761410
761420
761020
tt
761030
l@l~:
761430
761440
761040
~~~~t
761050
~~~t
761450
761460
761060
tt~
761070
@m
761470
761500
761100
~~~f~;
761110
@m
761510
761120
761520
~~~~~~~~~
761130
tt
761530
761140
761540
~tt
761150
rr
761550
761160
761560
t?~~
761170
tf
761570
761600
761200
~f~~~
761210
~t~~
761610
761620
761220
::::::::
761230
l}
761630
:·:·:-:·
761640
761240
761250
)?
~;{;
761650
761260
761660
~~;r=~
761270
tr
761670
761700
761300
~(}
761310
rr
761710
761720
761320
761330
\):
lt
761730
761740
761340
c:·.:·.::
:::::::.
761350
~~rn:
761 750
761360
761760
I\
761370
t~~~
761770
761400
762000
D
D
D
H 0
D
D
L
D
D
K
D
U U K M Z M
c
p
* *
*
1
1
D
H
c
1
1
L
D
a u u
D
K
M
M
1
c
1
1
1
c
z
p
* *
*
D
1
*
D
D
K
1
*
8 List UNIBUS addresses for each device, reading from the tables just completed:
DEVICE
UNIT
ADDRESS
DEVICE
UNIT
ADDRESS
DEVICE
UNIT
ADDRESS
* This device is not supported on RSX-11 M-PLUS but this entry in the worksheet is required as a place holder
ZK-620/2-82
Figure E-1 {Cont.)
Blank Floating Address Worksheet
E-6
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
0 Record quantity of each device:
0
3
0
0
DJ11
DH11
0011*
DU11*
KMC11* _ _ _
0_ _
DUP11
LK11*
DMC11
DZ11
0
2.
3
f) Enter unit numbers:
DEVICE
ADDRESS
D D D D D L
H
76001 o
760020
760030
K
a u u
K
M
z
M
p
1
1
c
1
c
1
* *
*
1
1
760000
DEVICE
D D
ADDRESS
0
0
H
0
0· D
a u u
L
K
M
p
1
c
1
1
1
*
1
1
1
1
1
D D
1
* *
z
1
K
M
c
*
tf rr tr ~~t~ tt tt r~~~ tt ~r~~* ~~~t tt tr ~~ff: t>
760400
x ~x rt tltt ~t~~ tt tt ~t~~ ~~t~ tttt rr t>
o tl tt tt ~~~t ~n~~ tt r~~~ ~f~~ rr rr ri th
({
) } ~~~t ~~1~ tt t t ~~~t tt rr tr rr t(
760410
760420
760430
760040
760440
760050
760450
760460
760470
760500
760510
x
760520
0
760530
x
760540
760150
xx
760550
760160
0
760560
')(
760140
760570
760170
x x
760200
760600
760210
0
760610
760220
I
760620
760230
2.
760630
760240
x 'JC
760640
xx
760250
760260
760650
760660
...
760270
760670
760700
760300
760310
760710
760320
760720
760330
··.
760730
:..::·
760340
760740
760350
760750
760360
760760
760370
760770
761000
760400
D D D D D L D D K
D D D D D L D D K
J
H Q U U K M Z M
c
p
* *
*
·.·...·
........
*
1
H
0
U
c
* *
1
*
This device 1s not supported on RSX-11 M-PLUS but this entry
in
U
p
K
1
c
M
1
*
1
Z
1
M
c
*
the worksheet is required as a place holder.
ZK-842/ 1-82
Example E-1
Completed Floating Address Worksheet
E-7
ADDRESS AND VECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
DEVICE
ADDRESS
0
J
0
H
DEVICE
0
L
a u u
K
0
M
p
1
c
0
0
0
z
1
ADDRESS
K
0
M
0
H
c
0
L
a u u
0
0
.D
K
M
p
1
1
c
1
1
*
* *
* *
1
1
*
761000
c
*
l~~~3
761410
761020
K
M
1
1
761400
~~~~~~~~:
761010
1
1
1
*
1
0
z
761420
rt
761030
~~;~~~~~
761430
761040
761440
~r~~~
761050
~~~~~~~~
761450
761060
761460
~~t~~~
761070
::::::::
761470
761100
·:·:·:·:
761500
t~r
761110
@m~~
761510
761120
761520
;~~f~~
761130
::::::::
761530
761140
:·:·:·:·
761540
~fm~
761150
::::::::
761550
761160
::::::::
761560
"ft
761170
;~~t~~
761570
761200
761600
~~I~~
761210
;~~~~;~~
761610
761220
761620
:::::::
:·:-:·:·
761230
I~~~~~
761630
761240
761640
?\
761250
~~~~;~~;
761650
761260
761660
t~t
761270
~~~~~~~~~
761670
761300
761700
:\)
761310
~~~~~i~~
761710
761320
761720
:~:):
761330
::::::::
761730
761340
·:·:·:·:
761740
.:~/\
761350
::::::::
761750
761360
·:·:·::.
761760
){
761370
i~~~~~~:
761770
761400
762000
0
J
0
0
H
a u u
0
D
p
L
D
K
M Z M
1
c
1
* *
*
1
0
1
K
0
0
H
c
0
1
1
1
1
0
a u
1
1
* *
*
0
L
u
K
p
1
1
D
M
D
Z
K
M
c
1
c
*
1
*
8 List UNIBUS addresses for each device, reading from the tables just completed:
DEVICE
ADDRESS
760020
7600'10
DEVICE
DH
UNIT
_1J_
_I_
l}H
_2._
160060
:DH
:DUP
:»MC
DMC
_o_
-,0
_o_
ADDRESS
7&0210
DZ.
_l_
1'0220
DZ
_2._
7602.30
:DZ.
UNIT
DEVICE
UNIT
ADDRESS
160(~0
11i016Q
7~0f70
* This device is not supported on RSX-11 M-PLUS but this entry in the worksheet is required as a place holder.
ZK-842/2-82
Example E-1 (Cont.)
Completed Floating Address Worksheet
E-8
INDEX
Account file
on distribution kit, 4-5
on pregenerated kit, 5-28
Accounting
SYSGEN question, 3-25
ACP, C-5
definition, 1-10
Alternate CL!
SYSGEN question, 3-26
Ancillary Control Processor
See ACP
Assembly listings
Executive
SYSGEN question, 3-67
Au toconf ig ur e
definition, 1-11
description, 3-6
device support, E-1
hardware support, 3-10
overriding, 3-7, 3-17
remark, 3-9
restriction, 3-7, 3-10
sample output, 3-8
SYSGEN question, 3-17
Backup copy
of generated system, 4-3
Baseline system
definition, 1-11
description, 3-il
device configuration, 3-12
terminal configuration, 3-12
Batch message file
BATCH. TXT, 4-5
Batch processor
SYSGEN question, 3-25
Blank media
requirement, 2-2
B LDLAINIT. CMD
on pregenerated kit, 5-37
Bootblack
writing, 4-2
Bootstrap
hardware
definition, 1-11
software
definition, 1-11
BRU
disk initialization values,
2-10
/HEADERS switch
using to copy distribution
kit, 2-10
/MAX switch
BRU
/MAX switch (Cont.)
using to copy distribution
kit, 2-10
BRUSYS system, 2-6
Card reader
CM/CRll
SYSGEN question, 3-44
CEX, 5-38
Checkpointing, C-1
dynamic space allocation, C-6
CL!
See also DCL
alternate
SYSGEN question, 3-26
Clock
system
SYSGEN question, 3-29
CM/CRll card reader
SYSGEN question, 3-44
CNF, 2-7
switches, 2-7
Command ring
SYSGEN question, 3-43
Communications
SYSGEN question, 3-24
Communications device
SYSGEN question, 3-63
Communications Executive
See CEX
Configuration program
See CNF
Configuration worksheet, A-1 to
A-8
Console driver
SYSGEN question, 3-25
Control and status register
See CSR
Controller
DECtape
SYSGEN question, 3-46
DECtape I I
SYSGEN question, 3-48
IPll
SYSGEN question, 3-54
LA180
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LPll
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LSll
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LVll
SYSGEN question, 3-49
MSCP-type
Index-!
INDEX
Controller
MSCP-type (Cont.)
SYSGEN question, 3-42
RH-type
SYSGEN question, 3-31
RKll
SYSGEN question, 3-37
RK611/711
SYSGEN question, 3-38
RLll/RLVll
SYSGEN controller, 3-40
RXll
SYSGEN question, 3-47
RX211
SYSGEN question, 3-48
TCll
SYSGEN question, 3-46
TM/TMA/TMBll
SYSGEN question, 3-51
TU58
SYSGEN question, 3-48
Controller mnemonic
format, 3-31
Copy
backup of generated system,
4-3
distribution kit, 2-6
on line, 2-14
stand alone, 2-7
magnetic tape kit
on line, 2-14
stand alone, 2-7
pregenerated kit
RL02 kit to DU-type disk,
5-2
RL02 kit to RL02 disk, 5-2
RK07 disk kit
on line, 2-1 7
stand alone, 2-11
Crash dump device
on pregenerated kit, 5-35
SYSGEN question, 3-28 to 3-29
CSR
definition, 1-13
determining, 2-1
CSR address
BRUSYS default, 2-7
determining, 3-31
floating, assignment
algorithm, E-2
DB-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-32
DCL
SYSGEN question, 3-26
DD-type magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-48
DECnet
CEX on pregenerated kit, 5-38
pool use on pregenerated kit,
5-38
SYSGEN question, 3-24
DECtape controller
SYSGEN question, 3-46
DECtape II controller
SYSGEN question, 3-48
DELETESYS.CMD
on pregenerated kit, 5-8,
5-14
Device
See also Controller
See also Disk
See also Line interface
See also Line printer
See also Magnetic tape
See also Multiplexer
adding after SYSGEN, 4-9
restrictions, 4-10
changing CSR and vector with
CNF, 2-7
conf igura ti on
in baseline, 3-12
on pregenerated kit, 5-34
driver, loading
on pregenerated kit, 5-30
dual-access
SYSGEN question, 3-33 to
3-34 I 3-39
LA-type
SYSGEN question, 3-54
PCLll
SYSGEN question, 3-63
pseudo, B-3
support
by Autoconfigure, 3-10, E-1
on pregenerated kit, 5-32
on RSX-llM-PLUS, B-2 to B-3
support on
RSX-llM-PLUS, B-1
Device mnemonic, 2-3
Device notation
format, 3-31
DHll/DHVll line multiplexer
SYSGEN question, 3-58
Dial-up line
baud rate, 3-59
modem support, 3-62
SYSGEN question, 3-58
DIGITAL-supplied driver
definition, 1-12
Disk
DB-type
SYSGEN question, 3-32
DK-type
SYSGEN question, 3-37
DL-type
SYSGEN question, 3-40
DM-type
SYSGEN question, 3-38
DP-type
SYSGEN question, 3-41
DR-type
SYSGEN question, 3-33
DS-type
SYSGEN question, 3-34
Index-2
INDEX
Di s k ( Cont • )
DU-type
SYSGEN question, 3-42
DX-type
SYSGEN question, 3-47
EM-type
SYSGEN question, 3-35
initialization values, 2-10
MLll
SYSGEN question, 3-35
RA60/80/81
SYSGEN question, 3-42
RC25
SYSGEN question, 3-42
RD51
SYSGEN question, 3-42
RK05
SYSGEN question, 3-37
RK05F
SYSGEN question, 3-37
RL01/RL02
SYSGEN question, 3-40
RM02/03/05/80
SYSGEN question, 3-33
RP02/RPR02/RP03
SYSGEN question, 3-41
RP04/06/06
SYSGEN question, 3-32
RPO?
SYSGEN question, 3-33
RS03/04
SYSGEN question, 3-34
RXOl
SYSGEN question, 3-47
RX02
SYSGEN question, 3-48
RXSO
SYSGEN question, 3-42
swapping, C-2
Disk space
recovery
See also DELETESYS.CMD
after SYSGEN, 4-3
on pregenerated kit, 5-35
Distribution kit
See also Pregenerated kit
backup set, 2-4
contents, 2-3
copying, 2-6
on line, 2-14
stand alone, 2-7
definition, 1-1
label, 2-4
magnetic tape, 2-4
RC25, 2-3
RK07 disk, 2-4
RL02 disk, 2-3
types, 2-3
DJll line multiplexer
SYSGEN question, 3-60
DK-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-37
DL-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-40
DLll/DLVll line interface
SYSGEN question, 3-57
DM-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-38
DMll-BB interface
SYSGEN question, 3-60
DMCll line interface
SYSGEN question, 3-64
DMRll line interface
SYSGEN question, 3-64
Documentation set
organization, 4-7
DP-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-41
DR-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-33
Driver
def i n i ti on , 1-8
loadable
SYSGEN question, 3-23
loading
on pregenerated kit, 5-30,
5-36
MSCP
command ring, 3-43
user-supplied
SYSGEN question, 3-65
DS-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-34
DSR (Dynamic Storage Region)
See Pool
DT-type magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-46
DU-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-42
Dual-access device
definition, 1-12
SYSGEN question, 3-33 to 3-34,
3-39
DUPll line interface
SYSGEN question, 3-65
DX-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-47
DY-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-48
Dynamic checkpoint space
allocation, C-6
Dynamic memory, C-4
Dynamic Storage Region
See Pool
DZll/DZVll line multiplexer
SYSGEN question, 3-61
EM-type disk
SYSGEN question, 3-35
Error
SYSGEN, 3-3
system initialization, 4-13
Executive
definition, 1-7
Full-functionality, 1-10
Index-3
INDEX
Executive {Cont.)
User-tailored, 1-10
Executive data space
SYSGEN question, 3-21
Executive Debugging Tool
See XDT
FllACP
SYSGEN question, 3-26
FCPLRG
See FllACP
FCPMDL
See FllACP
FCS
definition, 1-8
library
FCSFSL, 3-72
FCSRES, 3-72
library on pregenerated kit,
5-29
FCSFSL
definition, 1-9
on pregenerated kit, 5-29
tasks supplied, 4-6
FCSRES
definition, 1-9
on pregenerated kit, 5-29
SYSGEN question, 3-23
tasks supplied, 4-6
File Control Services
See FCS
File system
options, C-5
File window
in secondary pool
SYSGEN question, 3-26
Files
required for system, 4-3
Files-11 ACP
See FllACP
Floating CSR address, E-1
assignment algorithm, E-2
worksheet
blank, E-5 to E-6
completed example, E-7 to
E-8
format, E-3
instructions, E-4
Floating point processor
SYSGEN question, 3-29
Floating vector, E-1
Formatter
TM02/03
SYSGEN question, 3-35
Full-functionality Executive
definition, 1-10
features, 3-20
SYSGEN question, 3-20
Hardware bootstrap
definition, 1-11
/HEADERS switch
BRU, 2-10
Help file, 4-5
Help paragraph
SYSGEN, 3-3
Host system
definition, 1-11
on line, 2-6
stand alone, 2-5
!CB pool size
SYSGEN question, 3-24
Interrupt
definition, 1-13
Interrupt vector
highest address
SYSGEN question, 3-66
IPll industrial controller
SYSGEN question, 3-54
IPll industrial controller
modules
SYSGEN question, 3-54 to 3-56
K-series
on pregenerated kit, 5-37
LA-type device
SYSGEN question, 3-54
LA180 line printer controller
SYSGEN question, 3-49
Line frequency
SYSGEN question, 3-30
Line interface
DLll/DLVll
SYSGEN question, 3-57
DMll-BB
SYSGEN question, 3-60
DMCll
SYSGEN question, 3-64
DMRll
SYSGEN question, 3-64
DUPll
SYSGEN question, 3-65
TT-type
SYSGEN question, 3-58
Line printer
LA180 controller
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LP-type
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LPll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LSll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LVll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-49
type
SYSGEN question, 3-50
Line printer controller
See Controller
Login message file
LOGIN. TXT, 4-5
LP-type printer
SYSGEN question, 3-49
Index-4
INDEX
LPll line printer controller
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LPAll-K laboratory subsystem
microcode version, 3-70
on pregenerated kit, 5-37
SYSGEN question, 3-54
LSll line printer controller
SYSGEN question, 3-49
LVll line printer controller
SYSGEN question, 3-49
Magnetic tape
OT-type
SYSGEN question, 3-46
MM-type
SYSGEN question, 3-35
MS-type
SYSGEN question, 3-45
MT-type, 3-51
TAll cassette
SYSGEN question, 3-45
TE16
SYSGEN question, 3-35
TSll
SYSGEN question, 3-45
TSV05
SYSGEN question, 3-45
TU16/45/77
SYSGEN question, 3-35
TU58
SYSGEN question, 3-48
TU80
SYSGEN question, 3-45
Magnetic tape kit
contents, 2-5
copying
on line, 2-14
stand alone, 2-7
Map
microcode loader, 3-70
nonprivileged task build,
3-74
privileged task build, 3-70
Mapped system
definition, 1-10
Mass Storage Control Protocol
See MSCP
/MAX switch
BRU, 2-10
Media
blank
requirement, 2-2
Memory
compaction, C-2
dynamic, C-4
parity support, C-4
partitions, C-1
size
SYSGEN question, 3-29
Mixed MASSBUS
definition, 1-13
SYSGEN question, 3-32
MLll disk
SYSGEN question, 3-35
MM-type magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-35
Mnemonic
device, 2-3
MS-type magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-45
MSCP
controller
SYSGEN question, 3-42
disk
SYSGEN question, 3-42
driver
command ring, 3-43
MT-type magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-51
Multiple file systems, C-5
Multiplexer
DHll/DHVll
SYSGEN question, 3-58
DJll
SYSGEN question, 3-60
DZll/DZVll
SYSGEN question, 3-61
Nonprivileged task
rebuilding, 4-10
types supplied, 3-72
On-line system
definition, 1-10
Overlapped I/O completion, C-7
Paper tape
PCll reader/punch
SYSGEN question, 3-52
PRll reader
SYSGEN question, 3-53
Parity support, C-4
PCll paper tape reader/punch
SYSGEN question, 3-52
PCLll receiver/transmitter
SYSGEN question, 3-63
Pool, C-4
definition, 1-8
use by DECnet on pregenerated
kit, 5-38
PRll paper tape reader
SYSGEN question, 3-53
Pregenerated kit
account file, 5-28
BLDLAINIT.CMD, 5-37
changing crash dump device,
5-35
copying, 5-2
RL02 kit to DU-type disk,
5-9
RL02 kit to RL02 disk, 5-3
DECnet, 5-38
definition, 1-1
DELETESYS.CMD, 5-8, 5-14
deleting unused system, 5-5
Index-5
INDEX
Queue Manager
SYSGEN question, 3-25
RK07 disk kit
copying (Cont.)
on line, 2-17
stand alone, 2-11
RKll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-37
RK611/711 controller
SYSGEN question, 3-38
RL01/RL02 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-40
RLll/RLVll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-40
RM02/03/05/80 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-33
RMS-11
installing libraries and
utilities, 4-4
on pregenerated kit, 5-29
Round-robin scheduler, C-3
RP02/RPR02/RP03 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-41
RP04/05/06 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-32
RP07 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-33
RPll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-41
RS03/04 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-34
RXOl disk
SYSGEN question, 3-47
RX02 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-48
RXll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-47
RX211 controller
SYSGEN question, 3-48
RXSO disk
SYSGEN question, 3-42
RA60/80/81 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-42
RC25 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-42
RD51 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-42
Record Management Services
See RMS-11
Resource Accounting
SYSGEN question, 3-25
Response ring
SYSGEN question, 3-43
RH controller
SYSGEN question, 3-31
RK05 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-37
RK05F disk
SYSGEN question, 3-37
RK06/07 disk
SYSGEN question, 3-38
RK07 disk kit
contents, 2-5
copying
Saved answer file
comment line, 3-5
content, 3-5
default names, 3-5
definition, 1-12
description, 3-5
incomplete, 3-5 to 3-6
SYSGEN question, 3-16
Saved system
backing up, 4-3
definition, 1-11
Sections of SYSGEN
Adding a Device, 4-9
Assembling the Executive and
Drivers, 3-67
Building the Executive and
Drivers, 3-68
Building the Nonprivileged
Tasks, 3-72
Building the Privileged Tasks,
3-70
Choosing Executive Options,
3-20
Pregenerated kit (Cont.)
description of system images,
5-5
detailed description, 5-31
device configuration, 5-34
example of copying, 5-16 to
5-20
Executive features included,
5-31
hardware support, 5-32
installation, 5-2
K-Series device, 5-37
kit contents, 5-1
LPAll-K laboratory subsystem,
5-37
overview, 5-1
recovering disk space, 5-35
restrictions, 5-33
RMS-11, 5-29
set-up information, 5-20
start-up procedure, 5-20
configuration file
statement, 5-21
error message, 5-27
tasks supplied, 5-29
PRE PG EN
definition, 1-12
description, 3-6
SYSGEN question, 3-16
Processor
floating point
SYSGEN question, 3-29
memory size, 3-29
support on RSX-llM-PLUS, 3-20
type
SYSGEN question, 3-20
Index-6
INDEX
Sections of SYSGEN (Cont.)
Choosing Peripheral
Configuration, 3-31
Choosing SYSGEN Options, 3-15
Creating the System Image
File, 3-75
Shadow recording
SYSGEN question, 3-25
Software bootstrap
definition, 1-11
Stand-alone system
definition, 1-10
Start-up procedure
content, 4-4
description, 4-4
for pregenerated kit, 5-20
STARTUP.CMD, 4-4
system, 4-4
Supervisor-mode library
SYSGEN question, 3-22
SYSGEN
See also Pregenerated kit
abnormal exit, 3-6
Adding a Device section, 4-9
Assembling the Executive and
Drivers section, 3-67
Autoconfigure, 3-6
baseline system, 3-11
Building the Executive and
Drivers section, 3-68
Building the Nonprivileged
Tasks section, 3-72
Building the Privileged Tasks,
3-70
changing system without, 4-8
Choosing Executive Options
section, 3-20
Choosing Peripheral
Configuration section,
3-31
Choosing SYSGEN Options
section, 3-15
compared to system generation,
1-1
Creating the System Image
File section, 3-75
definition, 1-4
error message, 3-3
error recovery, 3-3
example, D-1 to D-48
features, 1-4
generating V2.1 on v2.o, 3-12
help paragraph, 3-3
invoking, 3-13
making changes, 3-4
media requirement, 2-2
moving old system
SYSGEN question, 3-68
prepa ration, 2-1
processor
support on RSX-llM-PLUS,
3-20
question
SYSGEN
question (Cont.)
format, 3-1
sections, 3-14
restarting, 3-19
saved answer file, 3-5
sections, 1-5
setting up system, 4-3
terminal support, 3-58
terms defined, 1-7
SYSGEN question
default response, 3-1
example, 3-2
number format, 3-1
prompt format, 3-1
System clock
SYSGEN question, 3-29 to 3-30
System generation
definition, 1-1
example, D-1 to D-48
flow, 1-2
glossary, 1-7
System image file, 3-75
System name
SYSGEN question, 3-25
System parameter
changing after SYSGEN, 4-8
System setup
after SYSGEN, 4-3
SYSVMR.CMD
definition, 3-75
TAll cassette
SYSGEN question, 3-45
Target system
definition, 1-11
Target system disk
definition, 2-2
types, 2-2
Task headers
out-of-pool
SYSGEN question, 3-22
Tasks
installing and using, 4-6
on pregenerated kit, 5-29
nonprivileged
definition, 3-72
1i st, 3-73
SYSGEN question, 3-73
TCll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-46
TE16 magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-35
Terminal
interface
See Line interface
multiplexer
See Multiplexer
type
SYSGEN question, 3-58, 3-60
to 3-62
TM/TMA/TMBll controller
SYSGEN question, 3-51
Index-7
INDEX
TM02/03 formatter
SYSGEN question, 3-35
TSll magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-45
TSV05 magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-45
TT-type line interface
SYSGEN question, 3-58
TU16/45/77 magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-35
TU58 controller
SYSGEN question, 3-48
TU80 magnetic tape
SYSGEN question, 3-45
UETP, 4-3
UMR
See UNIBUS Mapping Register
Unibus Mapping Register
SYSGEN question, 3-54
Unsolicited input time-out
SYSGEN question, 3-27
Update, 3-12
definition, 1-12
User data space
SYSGEN question, 3-22
User Environment Test Package
See UETP
User-supplied driver
definition, 1-12
SYSGEN question, 3-65
User-tailored Executive
definition, 1-10
vector
definition, 1-13
floating
assignment algorithm, E-1
vector address
BRUSYS default, 2-7
determining, 2-1
Virgin system
bootstrapping and saving, 4-1
definition, 1-11
saving with /WB switch, 4-2
Virtual MCR
See VMR
Virtual terminal
SYSGEN question, 3-27
VMR
changing system parameters,
4-8
diagnostic messages, 3-76
XDT
SYSGEN question, 3-28
Index-8
RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation
and Installation Guide
AA-H431C-TC
READER'S COMMENTS
NOTE: This form is for document comments only. DIGITAL will use comments submitted on this form at the
company's discretion. If you require a written reply and are eligible to receive one under Software
Performance Report (SPR) service, submit your comments on an SPR form.
Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well organized? Please make suggestions for improvement.
Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.
Please indicate the type of user/reader that you most nearly represent.
D Assembly language programmer
D Higher-level language programmer
D Occasional programmer (experienced)
D User with little programming experience
D Student programmer
D Other (please specify)
Organization
Street
S t a t e - - - - - - Zip Code - - - - - or Country
- -
-
DoNotTear-FoldHereandTape -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
~nmnomn
No Postage
Necessary
if Mailed in the
United States
111111
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT N0.33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
BSSG PUBLICATIONS ZK1-3/ J35
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
110 SPIT BROOK ROAD
NASHUA, NEW HAMPSHIRE 03061
-
-
Do Not Tear - Fold Here
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I
I
I
I
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Create Date : 2015:01:27 16:01:36-08:00 Modify Date : 2015:01:27 15:30:47-08:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Metadata Date : 2015:01:27 15:30:47-08:00 Producer : Acrobat 11.0.10 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:4dd18147-7c83-3640-9aa1-0975c51a190f Instance ID : uuid:4bde26a1-42b7-3447-8dd4-9f1998d5403c Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 264EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools